Rules: For Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships

RULES
FOR CLASSIFICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

OF SEA-GOING SHIPS
PART IX
MATERIALS AND WELDING
July
2021
GDAŃSK
RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEA-GOING SHIPS prepared and edited
by Polski Rejestr Statków S.A., hereinafter referred to as PRS, consist of the following Parts:
Part I – Classification Regulations
Part II – Hull
Part III – Hull Equipment
Part IV – Stability and Subdivision
Part V – Fire Protection
Part VI – Machinery Installations and Refrigerating Plants
Part VII – Machinery, Boilers and Pressure Vessels
Part VIII – Electrical Installations and Control Systems
Part IX – Materials and Welding
Part IX – Materials and Welding – July 2021, was approved by PRS Executive Board on 28 June 2021 and enters
into force on 1 July 2021.
From the entry into force, the requirements of Part IX – Materials and Welding apply, in full, to new ships.
For existing ships, the requirements of Part IX – Materials and Welding are applicable within the scope specified in
Part I – Classification Regulations.
The requirements of Part IX – Materials and Welding are extended by the following publications:
Publication 7/P – Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers,
Publication 23/P – Pipelines Prefabrication,
Publication 30/P – Principles for Certification of Welders
Publication 34/P – Inspection of Underwater Welded Joints,
Publication 40/P – Non-metallic Materials,
Publication 48/P – Requirements Concerning Gas Tankers,
Publication 56/P – Procedural Requirements for Laboratories,
Publication 70/P – Non-destructive Testing of Hull and Machinery Steel Forgings,
Publication 71/P – Non-destructive Testing of Hull Marine Steel Castings,
Publication 74/P – Principles for Welding Procedure Qualification Tests,
Publication 80/P – Non-destructive Testing,
Publication 117/P – Using LNG or other Low-Flashpoint Fuels onboard Ships other than Gas Carriers
© Copyright by Polski Rejestr Statków S.A., 2021
PRS/RP, 06/2021
CONTENTS
Page
1 General ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Application ................................................................................................................................................. 9
1.2 Definitions, Explanations, Symbols, Abbreviations and Normative References ........................................ 9
1.3 Scope of Survey ........................................................................................................................................ 13
1.4 Technical Documentation ......................................................................................................................... 14
1.5 Approval of Materials’/Products’ Manufacturers ..................................................................................... 14
1.6 Approval of Welded Structures’ Manufacturers ....................................................................................... 15
1.7 Survey of Materials’/Products’ Manufacture ............................................................................................ 15
1.8 Inspection Certificate ................................................................................................................................ 16
1.9 Marking .................................................................................................................................................... 16
2 Testing .............................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.1 General Requirements............................................................................................................................... 18
2.2 Testing Laboratories ................................................................................................................................. 18
2.3 Re-Tests .................................................................................................................................................... 18
2.4 Chemical Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 19
2.5 Tensile Test ............................................................................................................................................... 19
2.6 Impact Test ............................................................................................................................................... 22
2.7 Bend Test .................................................................................................................................................. 23
2.8 Pellini Dropweight Test (DWT) ............................................................................................................... 24
2.9 Hardness Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 24
2.10 Macroscopic and Microscopic Examinations ........................................................................................ 24
2.11 Ductility Tests for Pipes and Tubes ....................................................................................................... 24
2.12 ESSO Test .............................................................................................................................................. 26
2.13 Weldability Test ..................................................................................................................................... 29
2.14 Non-Destructive Testing ........................................................................................................................ 29
2.15 Other Tests ............................................................................................................................................. 29
3 Normal and Higher Strength Hull Structural Steel ..................................................................................... 31
3.1 Scope of Application ................................................................................................................................ 31
3.2 Approval of Manufacturer ........................................................................................................................ 31
3.3 Methods of Manufacture........................................................................................................................... 32
3.4 Chemical Composition ............................................................................................................................. 33
3.5 Supply Condition ...................................................................................................................................... 35
3.6 Mechanical Properties............................................................................................................................... 36
3.7 Surface Quality and Internal Soundness ................................................................................................... 38
3.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality................................................................................................... 40
3.9 Test Material ............................................................................................................................................. 42
3.10 Mechanical Test Specimens ................................................................................................................... 43
3.11 Number of Test Specimens .................................................................................................................... 44
3.12 Retest Procedures ................................................................................................................................... 44
3.13 Marking.................................................................................................................................................. 47
3.14 Inspection Certificate ............................................................................................................................. 47
3.15 Additional Requirements for Corrosion Resistant Steel Used as the Alternative Means
of Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks ......................................................................................... 47
3.16 Requirements for YP47 steels and brittle crack arrest steels ................................................................ 47
4 High Strength Steels ........................................................................................................................................ 51
4.1 Application ............................................................................................................................................... 51
4.2 Approval ................................................................................................................................................... 51
4.3 Manufacturing Methods ............................................................................................................................ 51
4.4 Chemical Composition .............................................................................................................................. 52
4.6 Mechanical Properties ............................................................................................................................... 54
4.7 Tolerances ................................................................................................................................................. 56
4.8 Surface and Work Quality......................................................................................................................... 57
4.9 Stress-relieving Heat Treatment and Other Heat Treatments.................................................................... 57
4.10 Facilities for Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 57
4.11 Material Identification ............................................................................................................................ 57
4.12 Marking .................................................................................................................................................. 57
4.13 Inspection Certificate ............................................................................................................................. 57
5 Steel with Specified through thickness properties (Steel “Z”)..................................................................... 59
5.1 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................... 59
5.2 Reduction of Area ..................................................................................................................................... 59
5.3 Testing ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
5.4 Marking ..................................................................................................................................................... 61
6 Steel for Boilers and Pressure Vessels ........................................................................................................... 62
6.2 Steel Grades .............................................................................................................................................. 62
6.6 Testing ...................................................................................................................................................... 66
6.7 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality ................................................................................................... 67
6.8 Marking ..................................................................................................................................................... 67
7 Steel for Low Temperature Service ............................................................................................................... 68
7.1 Steel for Hull Structures ............................................................................................................................ 68
7.2 Steels for Construction of Liquefied Gas Tankers .................................................................................... 68
7.3 Steels for Other Structures ........................................................................................................................ 68
8 Stainless Steels ................................................................................................................................................. 69
8.5 Testing ...................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.7 Marking ..................................................................................................................................................... 76
9 Clad Steels ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
9.5 Testing ...................................................................................................................................................... 77
9.7 Marking ..................................................................................................................................................... 79
10 Steel Tubes ....................................................................................................................................................... 80
10.1 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 80
10.2 Manufacturing Techniques ..................................................................................................................... 80
10.3 Chemical Composition ........................................................................................................................... 80
10.4 Mechanical Properties ......................................................................................................................... 80
10.5 Supply Condition ................................................................................................................................ 81
10.6 Testing ................................................................................................................................................. 81
10.7 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality ............................................................................................. 82
10.8 Marking ............................................................................................................................................... 82
10.9 Inspection Certificate .......................................................................................................................... 82
11 Rolled Steels for Anchor Chain Cables ......................................................................................................... 83
11.1 General Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 83
11.2 Manufacturing Procedures ................................................................................................................... 83
11.3 Supply Condition ................................................................................................................................. 83
11.4 Chemical Composition......................................................................................................................... 83
11.5 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................................. 83
11.6 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality .............................................................................................. 84
11.7 Freedom from Defects ......................................................................................................................... 84
11.8 Marking................................................................................................................................................ 85
11.9 Inspection Certificate ........................................................................................................................... 85
12 Steel Forgings .................................................................................................................................................. 86
12.1 General Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 86
12.2 Manufacturing Procedure..................................................................................................................... 86
12.3 Quality of Forgings .............................................................................................................................. 87
12.4 Chemical Composition......................................................................................................................... 87
12.5 Supply Condition ................................................................................................................................. 88
12.6 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................................. 89
12.7 Mechanical Properties.......................................................................................................................... 92
12.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality.............................................................................................. 94
12.9 Rectification of Defective Forgings ..................................................................................................... 94
12.10 Identification of Forgings .................................................................................................................... 94
12.11 Marking ............................................................................................................................................... 94
12.12 Inspection Certificate .......................................................................................................................... 94
13 Steel Castings ................................................................................................................................................... 95
13.1 Carbon Steel Castings for Hull and Machinery Components .............................................................. 95
13.2 Cast Stainless Steel Propellers ............................................................................................................. 99
14 Grey Iron Castings ........................................................................................................................................ 105
14.1 General Requirements........................................................................................................................ 105
14.2 Manufacture ....................................................................................................................................... 105
14.3 Quality of Castings ............................................................................................................................ 105
14.4 Chemical Composition....................................................................................................................... 105
14.5 Supply Condition ............................................................................................................................... 105
14.6 Mechanical Tests ............................................................................................................................... 105
14.7 Mechanical Properties........................................................................................................................ 107
14.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality............................................................................................ 108
14.9 Rectification of Defective Castings ................................................................................................... 108
14.10 Marking.............................................................................................................................................. 108
14.11 Inspection Certificate ......................................................................................................................... 108
15 Nodular Iron Castings .................................................................................................................................. 109
15.2 Manufacture ....................................................................................................................................... 109
15.3 Quality of Castings ............................................................................................................................ 109
15.4 Chemical Composition....................................................................................................................... 109
15.5 Supply Condition ............................................................................................................................... 109
15.6 Mechanical Tests................................................................................................................................ 110
15.7 Mechanical Properties ........................................................................................................................ 111
15.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality ............................................................................................ 112
15.9 Metallographic Examination .............................................................................................................. 112
15.10 Rectification of Defective Castings.................................................................................................... 112
15.11 Marking .............................................................................................................................................. 112
16 Malleable Iron Castings ................................................................................................................................ 113
17 Copper Alloys ................................................................................................................................................ 113
17.1 Copper and Copper Alloy Tubes ........................................................................................................ 113
17.2 Copper Alloy Castings other than Castings for Propellers ................................................................. 115
17.3 Cast Copper Alloys for Propellers ..................................................................................................... 117
18 Aluminium Alloys .......................................................................................................................................... 122
18.1 Wrought Aluminium Alloys............................................................................................................... 122
18.2 Aluminium Alloy Castings ................................................................................................................ 128
19 Requirements for Manufacture of Anchors ................................................................................................ 132
19.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 132
19.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 132
19.3 Manufacture of Anchors .................................................................................................................... 133
19.4 Testing and Certification .................................................................................................................... 134
20 Anchor Chain Cables and Accessories ........................................................................................................ 139
20.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 139
20.3 Design and Manufacture of Chain Cables and Accessories ............................................................... 140
20.4 Testing and Inspection Certificate of Finished Chain Cables ............................................................ 143
20.5 Testing and Inspection Certificate for Accessories ............................................................................ 146
20.6 Chafing Chain for ETA Equipment ................................................................................................... 147
21 Steel Wire Ropes ............................................................................................................................................ 149
21.2 Manufacture ....................................................................................................................................... 149
21.3 Tests ................................................................................................................................................... 149
21.5 Marking .............................................................................................................................................. 151
22 Fibre Ropes .................................................................................................................................................... 153
22.2 Manufacture ....................................................................................................................................... 153
22.3 Tests ................................................................................................................................................... 153
22.5 Marking .............................................................................................................................................. 155
23 Welding .......................................................................................................................................................... 155
23.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 155
23.2 Welding of Ship Hull and its Equipment ........................................................................................... 156
23.3 Welding of Machinery ....................................................................................................................... 158
23.4 Welding of Boilers and Pressure Vessels ........................................................................................... 158
23.5 Welding of Pipelines .......................................................................................................................... 159
23.6 Welding of Stainless Steels ................................................................................................................ 160
23.7 Welding of Stainless Steels with other Steels .................................................................................... 160
23.8 Welding of Clad Steels with Austenitic Stainless Steels .................................................................... 160
23.9 Welding of Steel Forgings and Castings ........................................................................................... 160
23.10 Welding of Cast Iron ......................................................................................................................... 161
23.11 Welding of Copper and Copper Alloys ............................................................................................. 161
23.12 Welding of Wrought Aluminium Alloys........................................................................................... 161
23.13 Hard Soldering .................................................................................................................................. 161
24 Welding Consumables................................................................................................................................... 162
24.2 Approval Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 163
24.3 Preparation and Testing of Welding Consumables Test Assemblies ................................................. 164
24.4 Assessment of Results of Tests of Welding Consumables for Hull Structure Steels ......................... 165
24.5 Approval Tests of Covered Electrodes for Manual Arc Welding of Hull Structural Steels............... 167
24.6 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Submerged Arc Welding of Hull Structural Steels ...... 172
24.7 Approval Tests of Wires without and with Shielding Gas ................................................................. 176
24.8 Approval Tests of Consumables for Use in Electroslag and Electrogas Welding ............................. 179
24.9 Approval Tests of Consumables for One Side Welding on Backing Strips ....................................... 180
24.10 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for High Strength Steels .................................................. 180
24.11 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Boiler Steels............................................................... 184
24.12 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Machinery, Equipment and Piping Steels .................. 184
24.13 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Stainless and Clad Steels ........................................... 184
24.14 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Copper, Heavy Metals and other
on-Ferrous Metals ............................................................................................................................ 185
24.15 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Aluminium Alloys ................................................... 185
24.16 Welding consumables for YP47 steels ............................................................................................ 187
25 Welded Structure Manufacturers ................................................................................................................ 189
25.2 Approval Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 189
25.3 Technical Documentation .................................................................................................................. 190
25.4 Manufacturer Inspection .................................................................................................................... 190
25.5 Welding Procedure Qualification....................................................................................................... 191
Appendix A – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Hull Structural Steels ............................................... 193
Appendix B – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Hull Structural Steels Intended for Welding
with High Heat Input .................................................................................................................. 203
Appendix C – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Corrosion Resistant Steel
Used as Alternative Means of Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks ............................ 206
Appendix D – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of High Strength Steel for the Container
Carrier Hull Construction ................................................................................................ 207
Appendix E – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of High Strength Steels for Welded Structures ............. 209
Appendix F – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of YP47 Steels ............................................................... 217
Appendix G – Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Brittle Crack Arrest Steels ........................................ 218
General 9
1 GENERAL
1.1 Application
1.1.1 Part IX – Materials and Welding applies to materials, including welding consumables, used for
the construction and repair of the following ship structures which are subject to PRS survey:
– hull,
– machinery and machinery installations,
– steam boilers and pressure vessels,
– hull equipment,
– piping systems.
1.1.2 The requirements specified in this Part also apply to materials, including welding consumables
and welding processes, used for the construction and repair of other structures which are subject to PRS
survey.
1.1.3 When selecting materials, the requirements specified in other Parts of PRS Rules shall be taken
into account.
1.1.4 Materials which, due to their chemical composition and mechanical properties, do not fulfil the
requirements specified in this Part of the Rules are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
1.1.5 Additional requirements for materials, including welding consumables, and welding processes
used for the construction and repair of ships using LNG or other low-flashpoint fuel, other than gas carriers,
are given in Publication 117/P – Using LNG or other Low-Flashpoint Fuels onboard Ships other than Gas
Carriers.
1.1.6 Non-metallic organic materials and products, as well as plastics not covered by this Part, subject
to PRS survey according to the requirements specified in other Parts of the Rules shall fulfil the
requirements given in Publication 40/P – Non-Metallic Materials.
1.2 Definitions, Explanations, Symbols, Abbreviations and Normative References
The definitions and explanations relating to the general terminology of the Rules for the Classification
and Construction of Sea-Going Ships (hereinafter referred to as the Rules) are specified in Part I –
Classification Regulations. For the purpose of this Part, additional definitions, explanations and symbols
specified in sub-chapters 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 have been adopted.
1.2.1 Definitions and Explanations
As rolled condition (AR) – supply condition without any additional special rolling and/or heat treatment.
Chain diameter [mm] – nominal diameter of the particular chain, corresponding to the common link cross-
section diameter.
Controlled rolling (CR) or normalising rolling (NR) – a rolling procedure in which the final deformation
is performed in the normalizing temperature range, resulting in a material condition generally equivalent
to that obtained by normalizing.
Heat affected zone (HAZ) – metal area in the welded joint adjacent to the weld, undergoing changes of
structural, physical, mechanical and other properties under the effect of welding heat.
Heat input (linear energy) – the amount of heat energy supplied to the welded material during a welding
run of unit length.
Impact energy (KV) [J] – amount of energy used to break a specimen of the defined temperature.
Isothermal annealing (I) – heat treatment process in which steel is heated to an appropriate temperature
above Ac3, and subsequently cooled to an appropriate temperature not exceeding Ac1 and kept in constant
temperature and then cooled. The process aims to obtain good toughness properties.
10 Materials and Welding
Manufacturer – factory (steelworks, forging shop, foundry, rolling mill, etc.) producing materials or products
which are subject to PRS survey.
Normalising (N) – heat treatment process that involves austenitising and subsequent cooling in still air.
One-side welding – welding process where the whole weld is made from one side of a welded joint only.
Parent material – material from which the element to be welded is made.
Preliminary welding procedure specification (pWPS) – welding procedure specification prepared by the
manufacturer, which will constitute the basis for welding procedure qualification tests.
Quenching (Q) – heat treatment process where steel is heated to a temperature above Ac3 and then cooled
in order to harden its structure.
Quenching and tempering (QT) – heat treatment process in high temperature to obtain desirable
mechanical properties, in particular good toughness and good plasticity.
Sample – piece of test product from which test specimens are taken. In the case of castings, sample may
be integrally cast or gated.
Specimen – section of the material taken from the sample, with specified shape and dimensions, to be
subjected to mechanical, technological and other tests.
Supply condition – the final heat treatment of the material in delivery condition (e.g. as rolled (AR),
normalised (N), normalised and tempered (NT), quenched and tempered (QT), thermomechanical rolling
(TM), controlled rolling (CR), isothermal annealing (I) etc.).
Tempering (T) – heat treatment process where steel is heated to a temperature below Ac1 in order to restore
its ductility through structure improvement.
Test product – product taken from a batch to be checked and/or subjected to examination.
Thermo-mechanical rolling (TM) – procedure which involves strict control of both the steel temperature and
rolling reduction to obtain the properties which cannot be reproduced by other heat treatment without plastic
strain. Thermo-mechanical rolling may or may not include accelerated cooling, and may or may not include
direct quenching followed by tempering after TM-rolling.
Test assembly – welded joint made for the purpose of examination of the properties of welding
consumables, correctness of technological process used or for checking the welder’s qualifications.
Test batch – a number of products (items) or mass of products which are together approved or rejected as
a result of the tests performed in accordance with the requirements specified in the Rules or in the order
placed.
Weld – part of a welded joint made of the material melted during the welding process.
Welded joint scheme – list of particulars about the individual joints in welded structures. Cases, in which
it is required to submit the welded joint scheme and the range of information to be contained therein, are
determined by the Rules.
Welding consumable – material constituting the weld or which allows the weld to be made; it may be e.g.
covered electrode, welding rod, wire, flux or gas.
Welding imperfection – weld metal discontinuity or deviation from the assumed weld geometry.
Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR) – record including all the required particulars of the
test assembly welding, as well as the results of all tests of the welded test assembly performed during the
welding procedure qualification.
Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) – a document stating details of variable parameters required for
a specified welding process and ensuring that welded joints made in accordance with this document satisfy
quality uniformity criteria.
Weld layer – one or several weld runs deposited side by side at one level.
Weld run – metal melted or deposited under one heat source passage.
General 11
1.2.2 Explanations
A [%] – relative elongation of specimen after fracture – percentage elongation determined on a proportional
gauge length L0 (L0 = 5.65 ⋅ S 0 for proportional flat test specimens, L0 = 5d0 for proportional round test
specimens).
For proportional flat test specimens whose initial gauge length is different from 5.65 ⋅ S 0 , symbol A
shall be assigned an index representing the proportionality factor, e.g.:
A11.3 – relative elongation for original gauge length (L0) corresponding to 11.3 ⋅ S 0 .
In the case of specimens with non-proportional gauge length, symbol A shall be assigned an index
representing the original gauge length in millimetres, e.g.:
A200 mm – relative elongation for original gauge length (L0) of 200 mm.
The elongation value is valid if the distance between the fracture and the nearest gauge mark is not less
than one third of the original gauge length (L0).
KV [J] – impact energy value (energy absorbed by a fractured specimen) determined by Charpy V-notch
impact test on a specimen defined in sub-chapter 2.6 of this Part.
Re, [MPa] – yield stress (yield point) – stress at which strain increases without an increase in tensile force.
Unless stated otherwise, the values of Re mentioned in this Part and in other Parts of the Rules shall be
identified with ReH.
Rp0,2 [MPa] – proof stress (yield strength) – stress determined at non-proportional strain equal to 0.2%
of extensometer gauge length (L0); in technically justified cases, proof stress may be determined for other
permanent elongation values within 0.05 to 1.0%.
Rm [MPa] – tensile strength – stress corresponding to the maximum tensile force.
Z [%] – relative reduction of area – the maximum reduction in the cross-section area during the tensile test
related to its initial cross-section area (S0).
1.2.3 Symbols and Abbreviations
A – relative elongation of specimen after fracture,
AR – as rolled,
CR – controlled rolling,
D – former diameter,
d – specimen diameter,
I – isothermal annealing,
KV – impact energy value,
MT – magnetic-particle testing,
N – normalising,
NDT – non-destructive testing,
NR – normalising rolling,
NT – normalising and tempering,
PT – penetrant testing,
pWPS – preliminary welding procedure specification,
Q – quenching,
QT – quenching and tempering,
Re – yield stress,
Rm – tensile strength,
R p0,2 – proof stress (yield strength) – determined at non-proportional strain,

RT – radiographic testing,
HAZ – heat affected zone,
t – thickness of product,
T – tempering,
UT – ultrasonic testing,
VT – visual testing,
WPQR – welding procedure qualification record,
WPS – welding procedure specification,
Z – relative reduction of area.
1.2.4 Normative references
PN-EN 515 – Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Wrought products – Temper designations.
PN-EN 573-1 – Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Chemical composition and form of wrought products –
Part 1: Numerical designation system.
PN-EN 573-2 – Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Chemical composition and form of wrought products –
Part 2: Chemical designation system.
PN-EN 1057 – Copper and copper alloys – Seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and
heating applications.
PN-EN 1561 – Founding – Grey cast irons.
PN-EN 10028-2 – Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes – Part 2: Non-alloy and alloy steels with
specified elevated temperature properties.
PN-EN 10029 – Hot rolled steel plates 3 mm thick or above – Tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass.
PN-EN 10160 – Ultrasonic testing of steel flat product of thickness equal or greater than 6 mm (reflection
method).
PN-EN 10164 – Steel products with improved deformation properties perpendicular to the surface of the
product – Technical delivery conditions.
PN-EN 10204 – Metallic products – Types of inspection documents.
PN-EN 10216-2 – Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes – Technical delivery conditions – Part 2:
Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes with specified elevated temperature properties.
PN-EN 10264-1 – Steel wire and wire products – Steel wire for ropes – Part 1: General requirements.
PN-EN 10264-2 – Steel wire and wire products – Steel wire for ropes – Part 2: Cold drawn non alloy steel
wire for ropes for general applications.
PN-EN 10314 – Method for the derivation of minimum values of proof strength of steel at elevated
temperatures.
PN-EN 12385-2 – Steel wire ropes – Safety – Part 2: Definitions, designation and classification.
PN-EN 12385-4 – Steel wire ropes – Safety – Part 4: Stranded ropes for general lifting applications.
PN-EN 12449 – Copper and copper alloys – Seamless, round tubes for general purposes.
PN-EN 12451 – Copper and copper alloys – Seamless round tubes for heat exchanges.
PN-EN ISO 945-1 – Microstructure of cast irons – Part 1: Graphite classification by visual analysis.
PN-EN ISO 2307 – Fibre ropes – Determination of certain physical and mechanical properties.
PN-EN ISO 3452-1 – Non-destructive testing – Penetrant testing – Part 1: General principles.
PN-EN ISO 3651-1 – Determination of resistance to intergranular corrosion of stainless steels – Part 1:
Austenitic and ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless steels – Corrosion test in nitric acid medium by
measurement of loss in mass (Huey test).
PN-EN ISO 3651-2 – Determination of resistance to intergranular corrosion of stainless steels – Part 2: Ferritic,
austenitic and ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless steels – Corrosion test in media containing sulphuric acid.
PN-EN ISO 3785 – Metallic materials – Designation of test specimen axes in relation to product texture.
PN-EN ISO 6506-1 – Metallic materials – Brinell hardness test – Part 1: Test method.
PN-EN ISO 6507-1 – Metallic materials – Vickers hardness test – Part 1: Test method.
General 13
PN-EN ISO 6508-1 – Metallic materials – Rockwell hardness test – Part 1: Test method
PN-EN ISO 6892-1 – Metallic materials – Tensile testing – Part 1: Method of test at room temperature.
PN-EN ISO 6892-2 – Metallic materials – Tensile testing – Part 2: Method of test at elevated temperature.
PN-EN ISO 7438 – Metallic materials – Bends test.
PN-EN ISO 8492 – Metallic materials – Tube – Flattening test.
PN-EN ISO 8493 – Metallic materials – Tube – Drift-expanding test.
PN-EN ISO 8494 – Metallic materials – Tube – Flanging test.
PN-EN ISO 8495 – Metallic materials – Tube – Ring-expanding test.
PN-EN ISO 8496 – Metallic materials – Tube – Ring tensile test.
PN-EN ISO 9001 – Quality management systems – Requirements.
PN-EN ISO 9554 – Fibre ropes – General specifications.
PN-EN ISO/IEC 17025 – General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories.
PN-EN ISO 17639 – Destructive test on welds in metallic materials – Macroscopic and microscopic
examination of welds.
PN-ISO 1704 – Shipbuilding – Stud-link anchor chains.
ISO 3108 – Steel wire ropes for general purposes – Determination of actual breaking load
PN-H-92140 – Steel plate with corrosion resisting steel single side plated.
ASTM A262-15 – Standard Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic
Stainless Steels.
ASTM A578 – Standard Specification for Straight – Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel
Plates for Special Applications.
ASTM E165-18 – Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination.
ASTM E208-17 – Standard Test Method for Conducting Drop – Weight Test to Determine Nil – Ductility
Transition Temperature of Ferritic Steels.
ASTM G66-99 – Standard Test Method for Visual Assessment of Exfoliation Corrosion Susceptibility
of 5xxx Series Aluminium Alloys (ASSET Test).
ASTM G67-04 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Susceptibility to Intergranular Corrosion
of 5xxx Series Aluminium Alloys by Mass Loss after Exposure to Nitric Acid (NAMLT Test).
IMO MSC.1/Circ. 1599 Interim Guidelines on the Application of High Manganese Austenitic Steel for
Cryogenic Service.
1.3 Scope of Survey
1.3.1 General provisions concerning the scope and procedure of survey are specified in PRS General
Survey Regulations.
1.3.2 PRS survey during manufacture covers the following materials/products:
.1 rolled products from hull structural steel and aluminium alloys,
.2 rolled products from steel intended for Class I and II boilers and pressure vessels,
.3 steel tubes for Class I and II boilers, pressure vessels and piping systems,
.4 steel forgings and castings of essential parts,
.5 propeller castings,
.6 chain cables and ropes,
.7 anchors,
.8 welding consumables.
1.3.3 PRS survey of manufacture covers the following:
.1 consideration of technical documentation,
.2 inspection – survey of materials during manufacture and tests,
.3 issuing of the relevant PRS documents (material certificates, certificates, statements, etc.).
1.3.4 PRS survey of welding applies to the structures which are subject to PRS survey and covers the
following:
.1 ensuring that the requirements of PRS Rules relevant to welded joints and application of parent
materials and welding consumables are fulfilled,
.2 ensuring that the requirements concerning the welding procedures included in this Part and in the
accepted technological documentation are fulfilled,
.3 inspection of welded joints in accordance with the requirements specified in Publication 80/P – Non-
destructive Testing.
1.4 Technical Documentation
1.4.1 General Requirements
1.4.1.1 Sub-chapter 1.4 specifies the requirements for technical and technological documentation which
shall be agreed with PRS if PRS survey covers:
− survey during manufacture of materials/products (plates, sections, castings, forgings, etc.),
− survey of welded structures manufacture.
The above documentation shall be submitted to PRS prior to the commencement of survey.
1.4.1.2 In the case when survey refers to repair of welded structures, the requirements of sub-chapter
1.4 shall be regarded as guidelines, while the detailed scope of the required documentation shall be agreed
with PRS in each particular case. The scope of the required documentation will depend on the extent
of repair.
1.4.2 Technical Documentation Relating to Materials/Products
1.4.2.1 The documentation relating to materials and products shall contain/specify:
– types (grades) of materials according to the Rules or standards,
– characteristics of the material (product), its chemical composition, mechanical and technological
properties; this requirement applies only in cases where the material type (grade) is not specified in the
Rules or the relevant standards,
– the method of manufacture,
– the manufacture process description,
– standards and/or technical specifications stating acceptance requirements.
1.4.2.2 The scope of the required information relating to the manufacture processes shall be agreed with
PRS in each particular case.
1.4.3 Technical Documentation Relating to Welded Structures
1.4.3.1 The documentation relating to the survey of welded structures shall contain:
– technical documentation of materials/products listed in 1.4.2,
– technological documentation connected with welding work, complying with the requirements of the
present Part of the Rules (Chapters 23, 24, 25),
– non-destructive testing plan, complying with the requirements of Publication 80/P – Non-destructive
Testing,
– coating specification for ballast tanks; applies only to ships of 500 gross tonnage and upwards.
1.5 Approval of Materials’/Products’ Manufacturers
1.5.1 Manufacturers of the materials specified in paragraph 1.3.2 and semi-finished products used for
their manufacture shall be approved by PRS.
1.5.2 Request for approval shall include the following data:
– characteristics of the material (the chemical composition, mechanical and technological properties, etc.),
– designation of the material, the manufacturing and quality control procedures,
– particulars of raw materials,
– proposed scope of approval.
General 15
The request shall also contain information on the previous experience of the manufacturer in the
production of materials subject to approval. The approval granted shall not be transferred to branches
or other factories and any changes of the material manufacturing method shall be reported to PRS.
1.5.3 Tests connected with the manufacturer approval are conducted in accordance with the Tests’
Programme prepared by the manufacturer and accepted by PRS in each particular case. The approval tests
shall be performed under the direct survey by PRS in the laboratory approved by PRS.
1.5.4 Approval of manufacturing process and manufacturers of hull steel intended for high heat input
welding shall be issued in accordance with the procedures specified in Annex A or Annex B to Chapter 3 of this
Part, respectively.
1.5.5 Within the approval procedure, PRS conducts inspection at the manufacturers requesting the
approval.
1.5.6 Approval is renewed upon the manufacturer request and after the relevant inspection has been
conducted again.
1.5.7 The above mentioned approval procedure also applies to the already approved manufacturers
wishing to extend the existing scope of approval or manufacturers introducing new methods of material
production, not provided for in this Part.
1.6 Approval of Welded Structures’ Manufacturers
Manufacturers of steel welded structures, i.e. shipyards and other works shall be approved by PRS in
accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 25 of this Part. The approval tests programme
depends on the expected welding work and is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
1.7 Survey of Materials’/Products’ Manufacture
1.7.1 Direct Survey
1.7.1.1 Materials/products, specified in paragraph 1.3.2, except welding consumables, are subject
to PRS direct survey during manufacture. The survey covers inspection and testing of materials within the
scope determined in this Part, the relevant standards or agreed material specifications.
Surface inspection and verification of dimensions, mass of materials and products are the responsibility
of the manufacturer. Issuance, by PRS, of the Inspection Certificate for the material or product later found
defective or not meeting the standards or material specifications in respect of the material dimensions,
mass or the surface condition does not absolve the manufacturer from this responsibility.
1.7.1.2 Prior to acceptance tests, the manufacturer shall furnish PRS with the following particulars:
– name, type or grade of material,
– name and number of standard,
– grade of material in accordance with this Part or order specifications,
– supply condition,
– purchaser’s name and the object (if known) for which the material is intended,
– quantity of the supplied material (number of pieces, weight, etc.),
– cast number, identification number,
– identification number of tests or test specimens.
1.7.1.3 Approval tests of the material are performed after the technological operations (e.g. after heat
treatment) affecting the material properties are complete.
1.7.2 Indirect Survey
PRS conducts indirect survey of welding consumables’ manufacture. The procedure for approval of
welding consuambles is specified in Chapter 24 of this Part.
PRS may approve series-production of certain materials manufactured by the works approved in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.5, the workmanship of which fulfils the quality
requirements for materials and may issue Type Approval Certificate for such materials. This Certificate
entitles the manufacturer’s duly authorized personnel to conduct inspections and to issue the relevant
documents.
General principles concerning the issue of Type Approval Certificates and indirect survey procedure
are specified in Supervision Activity Regulations.
1.8 Inspection Certificate
1.8.1 Inspection Certificate is issued in accordance with the requirements specified in standard PN-EN
10204.
1.8.2 Inspection Certificate shall include, apart from dimensions and quantity of the supplied material
(number of pieces, weight, etc.) the following particulars:
– purchaser’s name and the object (if known) for which the material is intended,
– cast number, identification number,
– manufacturer’s name,
– grade of material in accordance with this Part or order specifications,
– chemical composition,
– supply condition,
– results of mechanical tests,
– results of technological testing (if any),
– results of corrosion tests (if any).
1.8.3 If the test results obtained during direct survey fulfil the requirements specified in this Part, PRS
issues the Inspection Certificate. Before the Inspection Certificate has been issued, the manufacturer shall
produce a written declaration stating that the product has been made in accordance with the approved
procedure and fulfils the relevant requirements specified in this Part.
The following form of such a declaration is accepted by PRS:
It is hereby certified that the product has been made in accordance with the approved procedure and it
fulfils the requirements specified in PRS Rules
signed by the duly authorized manufacturer’s representative.
1.8.4 Each Inspection Certificate issued by the manufacturer for a product being type-approved by PRS
through Type Approval Certificate shall contain the following clause:
PRS TYPE APPROVED PRODUCT
Type Approval Certificate
No. ......................................................
Valid until ................ ..........................
1.9 Marking
1.9.1 Materials shall be marked in accordance with recognised standards taking into account the
following requirements.
1.9.2 Where products are delivered in single pieces, each one shall be marked.
1.9.3 Where products are delivered in bundles or packages, two weather-resistant labels containing the
marks shall be provided and fastened to the opposite ends of the bundle or directly on the package.
1.9.4 In the case of delivery of small size products, their marking is subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case.
1.9.5 Products shall be marked, as far as practicable, in places that are not likely to be further machine
treated.
General 17
1.9.6 The marks shall stand out clearly and shall be framed with a bright paint resistant to atmosphere.
1.9.7 In each case, the marks on products shall contain at least the following particulars:
.1 category or grade of material,
.2 number of cast, number of batch or other marking allowing to ascertain that the product belongs to
the batch for which the Inspection Certificate has been issued,
.3 manufacturer’s name or brand,
.4 manufacturer’s control stamp,
.5 Inspection Certificate number,
.6 PRS stamp.
1.9.8 In the case of any marked material showing defects that prevent its intended use, the marks shall
be removed.
2 TESTING
2.1 General Requirements
2.1.1 Materials which are subject to PRS survey during manufacture shall be submitted to tests. The
type of tests and criteria of the test results assessment shall be in accordance with the requirements specified
in Part IX– Materials and Welding, unless stated otherwise in other Parts of the Rules.
2.1.2 The present Chapter specifies the test conditions, types and dimensions of specimens, as well as
requirements relating to test specimens preparation.
PRS may agree to the use of test methods and specimen types other than those stated in the present
Chapter, provided they enable proper identification and evaluation of the material properties.
2.1.3 Unless stated otherwise in the Rules, the types and particulars of special tests of materials /
products intended for specific use, as well as the criteria of the tests results’ assessment are subject to PRS
acceptance in each particular case.
2.1.4 During tests, the requirements of relevant standards or material specifications agreed with PRS
shall also be fulfilled.
2.1.5 Samples shall be heat-treated together (in one furnace charge) with the product or part to which
they belong. Test specimens shall be prepared in a manner that will not affect the material properties.
2.2 Testing Laboratories

2.2.1 The provisions specified in this sub-chapter apply to laboratories engaged in testing of the
materials and products which are subject to PRS survey.
2.2.2 Testing shall be performed in the laboratories approved by PRS. The criteria for approval of such
laboratories are specified in Publication 56/P – Procedural Requirements for Laboratories.
2.2.3 Laboratories of approved materials/products manufacturers are entitled to conduct chemical
analysis of materials/products necessary for acceptance of the material/product, without special approval
granted by PRS for this purpose.
Test results of these laboratories will constitute sufficient grounds for the chemical composition data to
be entered in the Inspection Certificate.
2.2.4 PRS may approve – on a case by case basis – a laboratory or test results obtained in a laboratory
not approved by PRS through the Approval Certificate provided the following conditions are fulfilled:
– the tests will be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor (if possible),
– testing equipment is checked periodically,
– personnel conducting the tests is suitably qualified,
– laboratory has a quality management system implemented.
2.2.5 Testing shall be conducted at a temperature corresponding to the requirements of the relevant
standards unless stated otherwise in other chapters of this Part of the Rules.
2.3 Re-Tests
2.3.1 If the obtained test results are unsatisfactory, the tests may be repeated subject to the following
conditions:
.1 if unsatisfactory test results are due to local defects in the specimen material, faulty machining
of specimens or faulty test equipment, the test shall be repeated on the same number of specimens;
.2 when the tensile test fails to meet the requirements, two further tests may be made from the same piece.
If both of these additional tests satisfy the requirements of this Part, the item and batch are acceptable.
If one or both of these tests fail, the item and batch shall be rejected. The additional tests detailed above
shall be performed using the specimens taken, preferably from material taken adjacent to the original
test specimens, but alternatively from another test position or sample representative of the item;
Testing 19
.3 when the average impact test energy values obtained on three specimens fail to meet the requirement
or when two results obtained are below the required value, or when one result is less than 70% of the
required value, the tests may be performed on the additional set of specimens consisting of three
specimens taken from the same product. The product or the batch of products may be accepted,
provided that the average value of all results obtained from the first or second series of tests is at least
equal to the required value and when not more than two results, among all the results obtained, are
below the required value or when not more than one result is less than 70% of the required value;
.4 if the properties of the material can be improved by heat treatment, then, after the treatment, the
test shall be repeated on the standard number of specimens;
.5 if, to ensure the required mechanical properties of alloy steels, the manufacturer is compelled to
subject the steels to heat treatment for the second time, the process of such treatment is subject to
PRS acceptance in each particular case;
.6 where, based on the tests of some pieces in a batch, the batch of material is rejected, then, at the
option of the manufacturer, the remaining pieces in the batch may be submitted individually for
tests and those pieces which give satisfactory results may be accepted.
2.3.2 PRS may require the tests to be repeated (in the presence of the Surveyor) if confusion
of specimens or test results has taken place or the test results do not allow for determining the material
quality with the required accuracy.
2.4 Chemical Analysis
Permissible deviations from the results of ladle analysis – in the case of check analysis of the finished
products – shall be in accordance with the relevant standards or the requirements of this Part.
2.5 Tensile Test
2.5.1 At the tensile test, the following mechanical properties are determined:
Re, [MPa]; Rp (Rp 0.2 to 1.0), [MPa]; Rm, [MPa]; A (A, A11.3, A50 mm, A200 mm), [%] and Z, [%].
Unless provided otherwise, tensile test shall be performed at ambient temperature.
At tensile tests of metals at elevated temperature, the determined values shall be supplemented with
350 400 200 300
index stating the temperature of testing, in °C (e.g. Rm , Re , A , Z ).
2.5.2 The test intended to determine the yield point, Re, shall be performed with an elastic stress within
the limits specified in Table 2.5.2.
For austenitic and austenitic-ferritic (duplex) stainless steel products, the 1% proof stress (Rp1.0) may be
determined in addition to Rp0.2 or to the physical yield point Re.
After reaching the yield or proof load for ductile materials, the machine speed during the tensile test
shall not exceed that corresponding to a strain rate of 0.008 s–1. For brittle materials, such as cast iron, the
elastic stress rate shall not exceed 10 MPa · s–1.
Table 2.5.2
Modulus of elasticity of the material, E Rate of stressing [MPa ·s-1]

[MPa] min max
< 150 000 2 20
≥150 000 6 60
2.5.3 For tensile test, the specimens having the shape and dimensions as shown in figures 2.5.3-1 to
2.5.3-4 and in Table 2.5.3 shall be used. Permissible dimensional deviations and tolerance of form of the
specimens shall fulfil the requirements of standard PN-EN ISO 6892-1.
Fig. 2.5.3-1
Fig. 2.5.3-2
Fig. 2.5.3-3
Fig. 2.5.3-4
Explanation of symbols used in the figures and Table 2.5.3:

d – diameter of specimen, [mm];
a – thickness of specimen, [mm];
b – width of specimen, [mm];
Lc – parallel test length, [mm];
L0 – original gauge length, [mm];
R – transition radius, [mm];
S0 – original cross sectional area of specimen, [mm2];
D – external diameter of tube, [mm];
t – thickness of product (wall), [mm].
Proportional test specimens shall be of a round or rectangular cross-section and shall have a gauge length
L0 = 5 d or L0 = 5.65 S0 , respectively (L0 shall, however, be greater than 20 mm). Basic dimensions
of tensile test specimens depending on their type are specified in Table 2.5.3.
Table 2.5.3
Item Name of product Type and dimensions of specimen
1 2 3
1 Forgings, castings 1. Round specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-1):
(except grey iron d = 10 ÷ 20 mm (preferably d = 14 mm); L0 = 5 d; Lc ≥ L0 + d/2;
castings) R = 10 mm (R ≥ 1.5 d for materials with A ≤ 10% and for nodular cast iron)
2 Plates, strips and 1. Flat specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-2):
sections a = t; b = 25 mm; L0 = 5.65 S0 ; Lc ≅ L0 + 2 S0 ; R = 25 mm
(Note: If the capacity of the available testing machine does not allow the use of flat
specimens of full thickness t, the thickness may be reduced by machining one side only).
2. Non-proportional flat specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-2):
a = t; b = 25 mm; L0 = 200 mm; Lc ≥ 212.5 mm; R = 25 mm
3. Proportional round specimen of dimensions as in item 1, located with its centre ¼ t from
product surface or as close to this position as possible (applies to products of t ≥ 40 mm)
and with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to product surface.
Testing 21
1 2 3
3 Tubes 1. Full cross-section tensile test specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-4):
L0 = 5.65 S0 ; Lc ≥ 5.65 S0 + D/2;
(Lc is the distance between the grips or the plugs, whichever is smaller)
2. Strips cut longitudinally from full thickness wall (Fig. 2.5.3-2):
a = t; b ≥ 12 mm; L0 = 5.65 S0 ; Lc ≅ L0 + 2b; R = 10 mm
The parallel test length is not flattened, but the enlarged ends may be flattened for gripping in
the testing machine.
3. Proportional round specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-1):
as for item 1 (Round test specimens may also be used provided that the wall thickness is
sufficient to allow for machining of such specimens to the dimensions given in Fig. 2.5.3-1
with their axes situated at the midwall thickness).
4 Wires and rods with Not machine-treated full cross-section tensile test specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-3):
diameter equal or less L0 = 200 mm; Lc ≅ L0 + 50 mm
than 4 mm
5 Wires and rods with Proportional round specimen (Fig. 2.5.3-1):
diameter more than d = 5 ÷ 20 mm ; L0= 5 d; Lc ≥ L0 + d/2
4 mm
The elongation value is valid only if the distance between the fracture and the nearest gauge mark is not
less than one third of the original gauge length. The result, however, is valid irrespective of the location of the
fracture if the percentage elongation after fracture is equal to or greater than the required value.
The elongation value after fracture shall be determined on proportional specimens. In justified cases,
PRS may agree that the mechanical properties of materials be determined on specimens other than the
proportional ones.
For non-proportional specimens from non-alloyed and alloy steels not subjected to cold plastic working,
the elongation value after fracture shall not be less than that determined in accordance with the formula
below:
0.4
 S 
A0 = 2 A  0  [%] (2.5.3)
 
 L0 
2.5.4 To determine the tensile strength of grey cast iron, the specimen of a round cross-section, as shown
in Fig. 2.5.4, shall be used.
Fig. 2.5.4
2.5.5 For testing of aluminium alloys, flat tensile test specimens shall be used for specified thicknesses not
exceeding 12.5 mm. For thicknesses t > 12.5 mm, round tensile test specimens shall be used. For thicknesses
not exceeding 40 mm, the longitudinal axis of the round tensile test specimen shall be located at a distance
from the surface equal to half of the thickness of the tested material item. For thicknesses over 40 mm, the
longitudinal axis of the round tensile test specimen shall be located at a distance from one of the surfaces
equal to one quarter of the thickness of the tested material item.
2.5.6 To determine the butt weld tensile strength, a flat specimen with the weld machined (or ground)
flush with the surface of the plate, shall be used. The dimensions of the specimen shall be in accordance
with Fig. 2.5.6:
≥ 50
s – the greatest width of weld
b
Lc
R>
25
≥ 200 a=t
Fig. 2.5 6
a = t
b = 12 mm for t ≤ 2 mm
b = 25 mm for t > 2 mm
Lc = s+ 60 mm
R > 25 mm.
2.5.7 To determine the deposited metal tensile strength, a round specimen with the following dimensions
shall be used:
d = 10 ± 0.075 mm
L0 = 50 ± 0.5 mm
Lc ≥ 55 mm
R ≥ 10 mm.
For specially small or large dimensions, other specimens may be used after PRS approval provided they
conform to the geometrical relationship specified in Table 2.5.3 item 1.
2.6 Impact Test
2.6.1 Impact value KV, [J], shall be determined on the ISO Charpy V-notch specimens. The test
specimens shall be machined to the dimensions and tolerances given in Fig. 2.6.1 and Table 2.6.1-1.
Fig. 2.6.1
Dimensions of impact test specimens are given in Table 2.6.1-1.

V-notch specimens with a width of 7.5 and 5 mm shall be used only for these products from which test
specimens with a width of 10 mm cannot be prepared. The impact test values obtained on such specimens
shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 2.6.1-2.
Table 2.6.1-1
Dimensions of impact test specimens
Dimension Nominal Tolerance
L 55 mm ±0.60 mm
L/2 27.5 mm ±0.42 mm
a 10 mm ±0.06 mm
10 mm ±0.11 mm
b 7.5 mm ±0.11 mm
5 mm ±0.06 mm
h 8 mm ±0.06 mm
r 0.25 mm ±0.025 mm
γ 45° ±2°
θ 90° ±2°
Testing 23
Table 2.6.1-2
Dimensions of specimen Average impact value, KV l)
[mm] [J]
10 × 10 × 55 KV
10 × 7.5 × 55 5/6 KV
10 × 5 × 55 2/3 KV
1) KV – required impact value specified in the relevant Chapters of this Part of the Rules.
On specimens taken from plates, flats and sections, the notch shall be perpendicular to the external surface
of the product, with at least one surface in rough condition.
Impact value KV shall be determined on three specimens. One of the obtained values may be lower than the
required one, but by not more than by 30 per cent.
2.6.2 Impact test shall be performed on the Charpy pendulum impact testing machine with an initial
striking energy of 300 or 150 J.
The distance between the hammer supports shall be 40 ± 5 mm. The point of impact of the hammer
shall be in plane of symmetry of the specimen notch, from its opposite side, the distance between the planes
of symmetry of the notch and the cutter not exceeding 0.5 mm.
Where the impact test is performed at a lower temperature, the test specimens shall be kept in the
cooling medium for at least 15 minutes from the moment the temperature of the medium has become
steady. At the test temperature down to −60°C, the value of over-cooling may be reduced to −4°C; at the
moment of specimen fracture, the temperature shall not vary from the prescribed test temperature by more
than ±2°C.
2.6.3 Impact tests may be performed (according to the definitions adopted in standard PN-EN ISO 3785)
on longitudinal specimens (L) or transverse specimens (T). Longitudinal specimens are taken parallel with
the longitudinal axis of arolled or extruded product (along the grain flow pattern). Transverse specimens
are taken perpendicular to the longitudinal and Z axes (axis Z is parallel with the direction of main force
causing the material strain).
2.6.4 Where hull structural steel ageing resistance shall be determined (the ageing conditions – 5% strain
and annealing at a temperature of 250°C for 1 hour), the test conditions and requirements are subject to
PRS acceptance in each particular case.
2.7 Bend Test
2.7.1 Flat bend test specimen shall be made in accordance with Fig. 2.7.1. Tension side edges shall be
rounded to a radius of 1÷2 mm.
Fig. 2.7.1
Particulars of the testing conditions are specified in standard PN-EN ISO 7438. Unless specified in the
particular chapters of Part IX, the former diameter and the angle of bending the specimen shall be selected
in accordance with the relevant standards.
2.7.2 Bend tests of castings, forgings and similar products shall be performed on specimens with the
following cross-section dimensions:
a = 20 mm; b = 25 mm.
2.7.3 Bend tests of plates, structural sections and strips shall be performed on specimens with the
following cross-section dimensions:
a = t; b = 30 mm.
If product thickness t is greater than 25 mm, it may be reduced to 25 mm by machining on one side.
In that case, the former shall be placed on the machined face when testing.
2.7.4 Bend tests of butt welds shall be performed on specimens with the following cross-section
dimensions:
a = t; b = 30 mm.
For bend tests of welded joints, one part of the specimens shall be tested with the weld face in tension
and the other with the weld root in tension. The weld shall be machined (or ground) flush with the surface
of the plate. If product thickness t is greater than 25 mm, it may be reduced to 25 mm by machining on one
side. In that case, the former shall be placed on the machined face when testing.
2.7.5 Side bend tests of butt welds shall be performed on specimens with the following cross-section
dimensions:
a = 10 mm; b = t.
Where thickness of butt welds t ≥ 40 mm, a side bend test specimen may be so split into parts of a width
b ≥ 20 mm that the entire weld thickness is covered.
2.7.6 Test specimens for longitudinal face and root test shall be made in accordance with standard PN-
EN ISO 5173. One part of the specimens shall be tested with the weld face in tension and the other with
the weld root in tension.
2.8 Pellini Dropweight Test (DWT)
Pellini dropweight test shall be performed in accordance with standard ASTM E208-6. The dimensions
(in mm) of test specimens shall be as follows:
Type P-1 25 × 90 × 360,
Type P-2 19 × 50 × 130 or
Type P-3 16 × 50 × 130.
For flame-cut specimens, their dimensions shall be increased by 25 mm, however not less than the plate
thickness.
Machining of the plate to prescribed specimen thickness shall be on one side only. Unless otherwise
stated in the relevant standards, the specimens may be of any orientation; the orientation, however, shall
be the same for all specimens.
2.9 Hardness Testing
Hardness shall be determined by Brinell (HB), Vickers (HV), Rockwell (HRC) method or other method
subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case. Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with
the relevant standards (PN-EN ISO 6506-1, PN-EN ISO 6507-1, PN-EN ISO 6508-1).
2.10 Macroscopic and Microscopic Examinations
If required by the Rules, macroscopic and microscopic examinations shall be performed in accordance
with the relevant standards (PN-EN ISO 17639, PN-EN ISO 945-1 or equivalent).
2.11 Ductility Tests for Pipes and Tubes
2.11.1 Flattening Test
Flattening test shall be performed for metallic tubes with an outside diameter D not exceeding 406.4 mm
and wall thickness t not exceeding 0.15 D.
Specimen length shall be L = 1.5 D, however the following condition shall be fulfilled: 10 mm ≤ L ≤
100 mm.
Unless otherwise stated in the Rules or relevant standards, the tube section shall be flattened until
distance H between the testing machine pressure plates reaches the value:
Testing 25
H=
(1 +c ) t [mm] (2.11.1)
t
c+
D
D – outside diameter of tube, [mm];
t – nominal tube wall thickness, [mm];
c – factor depending on the material (to be assumed in accordance with the relevant standards
or subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case).
Where it is required that the flattening test be performed until the inner surfaces of the tube meet, the
distance H between the testing machine pressure plates shall not exceed 2.25 t.
In the case of flattening test of welded tubes, the specimen shall be so placed in the tensile testing device
that the welded seam lies at 90° to the direction of flattening, in the specimen’s centreline. The test result
is considered satisfactory if the specimen is free from cracks or pulls.
Plain and smoothed ends shall be cut perpendicular to the tube axis. Reference is made to standard PN-
EN ISO 8492.
2.11.2 Drift Expanding Test
Drift expanding test shall be performed for tubes with the external diameter up to and including 150 mm
and the wall thickness up to 9 mm. A tapered drift shall be forced into the tube until the required expansion
degree is reached. Length L of the drift expanding test specimen shall be equal to twice the outside diameter D
of the tube if the angle of the drift β is 30°, and L equal to 1.5D if the angle of the drift is 45° or 60°. The test
piece may be shorter provided that after testing the remaining cylindrical portion is not less than 0.5D. The rate
of penetration of the mandrel shall not exceed 50 mm/min. The test result is considered satisfactory if the test
specimen is free from cracks or pulls. Reference is made to standard PN-EN ISO 8493.
2.11.3 Ring Tensile Test
Ring tensile test shall be performed for steel tubes with external diameter D within the range 110÷510 mm,
wall thickness t not exceeding 30 mm and t/D ratio not greater than 0.13.
The specimen shall be a tube piece with a length ∼15 mm. The ring shall be stretched in a tensile testing
machine until it breaks using two pins with a diameter equal to at least three times the wall thickness of
the tube.
In the case of welded tubes, the specimen shall be so placed in the tensile testing device that the welded
seam lies at 90° to the direction of the tensile load, in the specimen’s centreline.
The ring shall be drawn with the rate not exceeding 5 mm/s. The ring shall have plain and smoothed
ends cut perpendicular to the tube ends.
The test result is considered satisfactory if the specimen is free from surface defects and reveals no
laminations or symptoms of brittleness at the point of fracture.
Reference is made to standard PN-EN ISO 8496.
2.11.4 Flanging Test
Flanging test specimen shall be of length L equal to approximately 1.5D. The test piece may be shorter
provided that after testing the remaining cylindrical portion is not less than 0.5D. The rate of penetration
of the forming tool shall not exceed 50 mm/min.
The test result is considered satisfactory if no fracture is visible with an unaided eye. Reference is made
to standard PN-EN ISO 8494.
2.11.5 Ring Expanding Test
Ring expanding test specimen shall have a length between 10 to 16 mm. The rate of penetration of the
mandrel shall not exceed 30 mm/min. The test consists in uniform and consistent forcing a tapered drift
of a taper 1:10 or 1:5 into the specimen until the expansion degree is reached. Reference is made to standard
PN-EN ISO 8495.
The test result is considered satisfactory if no fracture is visible with an unaided eye.
2.12 ESSO Test

2.12.1 The ESSO test is used to estimate the brittle crack arrest toughness value Kca of rolled hull steel
plates of thickness not greater than 100 mm.
2.12.2 In the current sub-chapter the following symbols are used:
ts [mm] – thickness of test specimen,
Ws [mm] – width of test specimen,
Ls [mm] – length of test specimen,
tr [mm] – thickness of tab plate,
Wr [mm] – width of tab plate,
Lr [mm] – length of tab plate,
LP [mm] – distance between pins,
a [mm] – length of crack projected on surface normal to the line of load,
aa [mm] – maximum crack length at brittle crack arrest position,
T [°C] – temperature of test specimen,
dT/da [°C/mm] – temperature gradient of test specimen,
σ [N/mm2] – gross stress in tested part (load / Wsts),
Kca [N/mm3/2] – brittle crack arrest toughness value
2.12.3 The purpose of this test is to encourage the performance of a standard test for assessment of brittle
crack arrest toughness with temperature gradient and to obtain the corresponding brittle crack arrest
toughness value Kca. The conceptual view of test specimen, tab and load jig is shown in Fig. 2.12.3.
Fig. 2.12.3
2.12.4 The shape and size of the standard test specimen is shown in Figure 2.12.4. The thickness and
width of the test specimen shall be in accordance with Table 2.12.4.
Fig. 2.12.4
Testing 27
Table 2.12.4
Thickness and width of test specimen
Thickness ts [mm] 100 mm and below
Width Ws [mm] 500 mm 1)
1) If the width of the test specimen cannot be made at 500 mm, it may be taken as 600 mm.
The test specimens shall be taken from the same steel plate.
Test specimens shall be taken in such a way that the axial direction of the load is parallel to the rolling
direction of the steel plate.
The thickness of the test specimen shall be the same as the thickness of the steel plate to be used in the
ship structure.
2.12.5 The test equipment to be used shall consist of pin load type hydraulic test equipment capable
of tensile tests.
The distance between the pins shall be not less than 2000 mm. The distance between pins refers to the
distance between the centres of the pin diameters.
Drop weight type or air gun type impact equipment may be used for the impact energy required for
generating brittle cracks.
The wedge shall have an angle greater than the upper notch of the test specimen and an opening force
shall be applied on the notch.
2.12.6 The test piece shall be fixed directly to the pin load jig or by means of weld joint through the tab
plate. The overall length of the test specimen and tab plate shall be not less than 3Ws. The thickness and
width of the tab plate shall be in accordance with Table 2.12.6.
Table 2.12.6
Allowable dimensions of tab plate
Thickness tr [mm] 0.8ts ≤ tr ≤ 1.5ts
Width Wr [mm] Ws1) ≤ Wr ≤ 2Ws
1) If the tab plate has a thickness smaller than the test specimen, the reflection of stress wave will be on the safer side for the
assessment; therefore, considering the actual circumstances for conducting the test, the lower limit of thickness is taken as 0.8ts.
Thermocouples shall be fitted at 50 mm pitch on the notch extension line of the test specimen.
If the brittle crack is estimated to deviate from its presumed course, thermocouples shall be fitted at two
points separately by 100 mm on the line of load from the notch extension line at the centre of width of the
test specimen.
If dynamic measurements are necessary, strain gauges and crack gauges shall be fitted at specific
locations.
The test specimen shall be fixed to the testing machine together with the tab plate after welding and the
pin load jig.
The impact equipment shall be mounted. The construction of the impact equipment shall be such that
the impact energy is correctly transmitted. An appropriate jig shall be arranged to minimize the effect
of bending load due to the impact equipment.
2.12.7 To eliminate the effect of residual stress or correct the angular deformation of tab welding,
a preload less than the test load may be applied before cooling.
Cooling and heating may be implemented from one side on the side opposite the side on which the
thermocouple is fitted, or from both sides.
The temperature gradient shall be controlled in the range of 0.25°C/mm to 0.35°C/mm in the range
of width from 0.3Ws to 0.7Ws at the central part of the specimen.
When the specific temperature gradient is reached, the temperature shall be maintained for more than
10 minutes, after which the specified test load may then be applied.
After maintaining the test load for at least 30 seconds, a brittle crack shall be generated by impact.
The standard impact energy is taken as 20 to 60 J per 1 mm plate thickness. If the brittle crack initiation
characteristics of the base metal are high, and it is difficult to generate a brittle crack, the impact energy
may be increased to the upper limit of 120 J per 1 mm plate thickness.
Loading is stopped when the initiation, propagation, and arrest of crack have been confirmed. Normal
temperature is restored, and if necessary, the ligament is broken by gas cutting and forcibly the specimen
is broken by using the testing machine. Or, after the ductile crack has been propagated to an adequate
length with the testing machine, the ligament is broken by gas cutting.
After forcing the fracture, photos of the fractured surface and the propagation route shall be taken, and
the crack length shall be measured.
2.12.8 The distance from the top of the test specimen including the notch to the maximum length in the
plate thickness direction of the arrested crack tip shall be measured. If the crack surface deviates from the
surface normal to the line of load of the test specimen, the projected length of the surface normal to the
line of load shall be measured. In this case, if the trace of brittle crack arrest is clearly visible on the
fractured surface, the first crack arrest position is taken as the arrest crack position.
From the results of thermocouple measurements, the temperature distribution curve shall be plotted,
and the arrest crack temperature shall be measured corresponding to the arrest crack length.
The brittle crack arrest toughness value Kca of each test shall be determined by using the following
formula:
2Ws πa
K ca = σ π a tan
πa 2Ws
2.12.9 The following items shall be reported:
.1 Testing machine specifications, testing machine capacity, distance between pins (Lp),
.2 Load jig dimensions: tab plate thickness (tr), tab plate width (Wr), test specimen length including
tab plate (Ls+2Lr),
.3 Test specimen dimensions: plate thickness (ts), test specimen width (Ws) and length (Ls),
.4 Test conditions: preload stress, test stress, temperature distribution (figure or table), impact energy,
.5 Test results: crack arrest length (aa), temperature gradient at arrest position, brittle crack arrest
toughness (Kca),
.6 Dynamic measurements results (if measurement is performed): crack growth rate, strain change,
.7 Test specimen photos: fracture route, fractured surface.
If the conditions below are not satisfied, the test results shall be treated as reference values:
.1 The brittle crack arrest position shall be in the range of the hatched part shown in Fig. 2.12.9. In
this case, if the brittle crack arrest position is more than 50 mm away from the centre of the test
specimen in the longitudinal direction of the test specimen, the temperature of the thermocouple at
the ±100 mm position is to be within ±3°C of the thermocouple at the centre.
.2 The brittle crack should not have a distinct crack bifurcation while it propagates.
Fig. 2.12.9
Testing 29
From effective test results measured at more than 3 points, the linear approximation equation shall be
determined on the Arrhenius plot, and Kca at the desired temperature shall be calculated. In this case, data
should exist on both sides, that is, the high temperature and low temperature sides around the assessed
temperature.
2.13 Weldability Test
2.13.1 The requirements specified in this sub-chapter apply to testing weldability of the materials
submitted for approval. PRS reserves the right to increase or reduce the scope of testing.
Weldability tests shall be performed for rolled steel, cast steel, forged steel and aluminium alloys if they
are intended for welded hull structures. The tests shall be performed under PRS direct survey.
2.13.2 Weldability test of material shall be performed using the same welding methods which shall be
applied in welded structures that are subject to PRS survey.
2.13.3 Steel weldability test shall determine:
.1 chemical composition and mechanical properties of parent metal;
.2 welded joint susceptibility to cold cracking;
.3 parent metal resistance to ageing in accordance with paragraph 2.6.4;
.4 welded joint mechanical properties.
2.13.4 Weldability test specified in paragraph 2.12.3 shall be performed on test assemblies selected from
products of the maximum thickness, from at least two casts.
2.13.5 Weldability test of metallic materials other than steel shall be performed in accordance with the
test programme which is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
2.14 Non-Destructive Testing
2.14.1 Unless otherwise specified in other Parts of the Rules, non-destructive testing of materials and welded
joints shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in Publication 80/P – Non-destructive
Testing.
2.14.2 Testing of steel forgings intended for hull structures shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements specified in Publication 70/P – Non-destructive Testing of Hull and Machinery Steel Forgings.
2.14.3 Testing of steel castings intended for hull structures shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements specified in Publication 71/P – Non-destructive Testing of Hull Marine Steel Castings.
2.15 Other Tests
For some other products, other tests than those mentioned in sub-chapters 2.4 to 2.14 may be required.
In such cases, testing procedures are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
MATERIALS
Normal and Higher Strength Hull Structural Steel 31
3 NORMAL AND HIGHER STRENGTH HULL STRUCTURAL STEEL

3.1 Scope of Application
3.1.1 The requirements, set forth in the present Chapter, apply to weldable normal and higher strength
hot-rolled steel plates 1), sections and bars intended to be used in hull construction.
3.1.2 The requirements given below apply to steel products with the thickness as follows:
– for steel plates and wide flats of all grades: up to 100 mm in thickness,
– for sections and bars of all grades: up to 50 mm in thickness.
For greater thickness, the requirements are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
3.1.3 Provision is made for four grades of normal steel grades (A, B, D, E) based on the impact test
requirements. For higher strength steels provision is made for three yield strength levels (315, 355 and
390 MPa), each subdivided into four forms of toughness (A, D, E, F), based on the impact test temperature.
3.1.4 Additional requirements for normal and higher strength corrosion resistant steel plates, sections
and bars up to a maximum thickness of 50 mm used as the alternative means of corrosion protection for
cargo oil tanks of oil tankers according to IMO Resolution MSC.289(87) are specified in sub-chapter 3.15.
3.1.5 Steels differing in chemical composition, deoxidation practice, supply conditions or mechanical
properties may be accepted subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case. Such steels shall be given
a special designation: e.g. mark “S” may be added to the grade symbol.
3.1.6 Fatigue resistant hull steels according to IACS Recommendation No. 139 shall be given a special
designation added to the grade symbol “FR”, e.g. AH36-FR.
3.1.7 Additional requirements for YP47 steels and brittle crack arrest steels intended for use in container
ships are specified in 3.16.
3.2 Approval of Manufacturer
3.2.1 Hull steels of the particular grade shall be manufactured at works which have been approved by
PRS (see sub-chapter 1.5 of this Part). Suitability of each grade of steel for forming and welding shall be
demonstrated during the initial tests at the steelworks. Approval of the steel works shall follow a scheme
specified in Appendix A (see the Chapter Appendixes). For steels intended for high heat input welding over
50 kJ/cm, the approval of the manufacturer shall follow a scheme specified in Appendix B (see the Chapter
Appendixes). The procedure of approval of manufacturer of corrosion resistant steels defined in 3.1.4 shall
be supplemented by the requirements given in Appendix C. The procedure of approval of manufacturer of
YP47 steels shall follow the scheme specified in Appendix F. The procedure of approval of manufacturer
of brittle crack arrest steels shall follow the scheme specified in Appendix G. For hull steels with improved
fatigue properties called fatigue resistant steels, approval procedure shall be covered according to the
requirements of IACS (Recommendation No. 139).
3.2.2 It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to assure that effective process and production controls in
operation are adhered to within the manufacturing specifications. Where control imperfection inducing
possible inferior quality of product occurs, the manufacturer shall identify the cause and establish
a countermeasure to prevent its recurrence. Also, the complete investigation report shall be submitted to
PRS. Frequency of testing for subsequent products offered may be increased to gain confidence in the
quality.
3.2.3 When steel is not produced at the works at which it is rolled, an Approval Certificate shall be
supplied to PRS Surveyor at the rolling mill stating the process by which it was manufactured, the name
of the manufacturer who supplied it, the number of the cast from which it was made and the chemical
composition.
1) The word "plate" used in this Chapter covers plates and wide flats of width 600 mm or greater (universal plates).
3.3 Methods of Manufacture

3.3.1 Steel shall be manufactured by the basic oxygen, electric furnace or open hearth processes or by
other processes approved by PRS.
3.3.2 Deoxidation practice used for each grade shall fulfil the relevant requirements specified in Table
3.4.1-1 and Table 3.4.1-2.
3.3.3 The rolling practice applied for each grade shall fulfil the appropriate condition of supply specified
in Table 3.5-1 and Table 3.5-2. Schematic diagrams of applicable conventional and thermo-mechanical
processes are shown in Table 3.3.3.
Table 3.3.3
Schematic diagrams of thermo-mechanical and conventional processes
Type of processing
Structure Temperature Conventional processes Thermo-mechanical processes
AR N CR (NR) QT TM
Normal slab heating
temperature
Recrystallised
austenite
Normalising or
quenching
temperature
Non-recrystallised
austenite Ar3 or Ac3
Austenite + ferrite
Ar1 or Ac1
Ferrite + pearlite Tempering

or temperature
(ferrite + bainite)
□ – start rolling temperature

▬ – delays to allow cooling before finishing rolling process
Notes:
AR – As Rolled, N – Normalising, CR (NR) – Controlled Rolling (Normalising Rolling), QT – Quenching and Tempering,
TM – Thermo-Mechanical Rolling (Thermo-Mechanical Controlled Process), R – Reduction, (*) – Sometimes rolling in the dual-
phase temperature region of austenite and ferrite), AcC – Accelerated Cooling.
Description of applicable rolling processes are given as follows:

.1 As Rolled (AR)
This procedure involves steel being cooled as it is rolled with no further heat treatment. The rolling
and finishing temperatures are typically in the austenite recrystallization region and above the
normalising temperature. The strength and toughness properties of steel produced by this process
are generally less than steel heat treated after rolling or than steel produced by advanced processes.
.2 Normalising (N)
Normalising involves heating rolled steel above the critical temperature, Ac3, and in the lower end
of the austenite recrystallization region of a specific period of time, followed by air cooling. The
process improves the mechanical properties of as rolled steel by refining the grain size and
homogenising the microstructure.
.3 Controlled Rolling (CR), Normalizing Rolling (NR)

A rolling procedure in which the final deformation is carried out in the normalising temperature
range, allowed to cool in air, resulting in a material condition generally equivalent to that obtained
by normalising.
.4 Quenching and Tempering (QT)
Quenching involves a heat treatment process in which steel is heated to an appropriate temperature
above the Ac3, held for a specific period of time, and then cooled with an appropriate coolant for
the purpose of hardening the microstructure. Tempering subsequent to quenching is a process in
which the steel is reheated to an appropriate temperature not higher than the Ac1, maintained at that
temperature for a specific period of time to restore toughness properties by improving the
microstructure and reduce the residual stress caused by the quenching process.
.5 Thermo-mechanical Rolling (TM), Thermo-Mechanical Controlled Processing (TMCP)
This is a procedure which involves the strict control of both the steel temperature and the rolling
reduction. Generally a high proportion of the rolling reduction is carried out close to the Ar3
temperature and may involve the rolling in the dual phase temperature region. Unlike controlled
rolled (normalised rolling) the properties conferred by TM (TMCP) cannot be reproduced by
subsequent normalising or othe heat treatment.
The use of accelerated cooling on completion of TM-rolling may also be accepted subject to the
special approval of PRS. The same applies for the use of tempering after completion of TM-rolling.
.6 Accelerated Cooling (AcC)
Accelerated cooling is a process, which aims to improve mechanical properties by controlled
cooling with rates higher than air cooling immediately after the final TM-rolling operation. Direct
quenching is excluded from accelerated cooling.
The material properties conferred by TM and AcC cannot be reproduced by subsequent normalising
or other heat treatment.
Where NR (CR) and TM with/without AcC are applied, the programmed rolling schedules shall be
verified by PRS at the time of the manufacturer approval, and shall be made available when required by the
Surveyor. On the manufacturer’s responsibility, the programmed rolling schedules shall be adhered to during
the rolling operation, as required in 3.2.2. To this effect, the actual rolling records shall be reviewed by the
manufacturer and occasionally by the Surveyor.
When deviation from the programmed rolling schedules or normalizing or quenching and tempering
procedures occurs, the manufacturer shall take further measures required in 3.2.2 to the Surveyor’s
satisfaction.
3.4 Chemical Composition
3.4.1 Chemical composition of samples taken from each ladle of each cast shall be determined by the
manufacturer and shall fulfil the appropriate requirements specified in Table 3.4.1-1 and Table 3.4.1-2.
For steel plates of thickness exceeding 50 mm, any deviations from the chemical composition specified in
Table 3.4.1-1 are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Table 3.4.1-1
Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for normal strength hull steels
Steel grade A B D E
For t ≤ 50 mm: any For t ≤ 50 mm: any For t ≤ 25 mm: killed. Killed and fine grain
method except rimmed method except rimmed For t > 25 mm: killed treated
Deoxidation practice steel.1) For t > 50 mm: steel. For t > 50 mm: and fine grain treated.
killed. killed.
Chemical composition [%]
Carbon equivalent, CEV = C + Mn ≤ 0.40% (3.4.1-1)
(ladle samples) 4), 7), 8) 6
C max 0.212) 0.21 0.21 0.18
Steel grade A B D E
Mn min. 2.5 × C 0.803) 0.60 0.70
Si max 0.50 0.35 0.35 0.35
P max 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
S max 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
Al (acid soluble) min. – – 0.0155), 6) 0.0156)
t – product thickness
Notes:
1) Grade A sections of up to 12.5 mm in thickness may be accepted in rimmed steel subject to PRS acceptance in each particular
case.
2) Sections may be made from steel with the carbon content C max. = 0.23%.
3) Where Grade B steel is impact tested, the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0.60%.
4) Where any grade of steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically rolled (TM) condition, variations in the specified chemical
composition may be permitted by PRS.
5) For Grade D steel over 25 mm in thickness.
6) For Grade D steel over 25 mm in thickness and Grade E steel, the total aluminium content may be determined instead of acid
soluble content. In such case, the total aluminium content shall not be less than 0.020%. Other suitable grain refining elements
may be used subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
7) PRS may limit the amount of residual elements which may have an adverse effect on the steel properties, e.g. copper and tin.
8) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice, the content shall be indicated on
the Inspection Certificate.
Table 3.4.1-2
Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for higher strength hull steels
AH32 DH32 EH32 FH32
Steel grade 1) AH36 DH36 EH36 FH36
AH40 DH40 EH40 FH40
Deoxidation practice Killed and fine grain treated
Chemical composition, [%] (ladle
samples) 5), 7)
C max 0.18 0.16
Mn 0.90÷1.602) 0.90÷1.60
Si max 0.50 0.50
P max 0.035 0.025
S max 0.035 0.025
Al (acid soluble) min. 0.015 3), 4) 0.015 3), 4)
Nb 0.02÷0.05 4)  total 0,02÷0.05 4)
 total
V 0.05÷0.10 4)  not more 0.05÷0.10 4)
 not more
Ti max 0.02  than 0.12% 0.02
 than 0.12%
Cu max 0.35 0.35
Cr max 0.20 0.20
Ni max 0.40 0.80
Mo max 0.08 0.08
N max – 0.009 (0.012 if Al is present)
Carbon equivalent CEV 6)
Notes:
1) Letter “H” is added to the grade mark.
2) In products up to 12.5 mm in thickness, the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0.70%.
3) Total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid soluble content. In that case, the total aluminium content shall
not be less than 0.020%.
4) The steel shall contain aluminium, niobium, vanadium or other suitable grain refining elements, either singly or in any
combination. When used singly, the steel shall contain the minimum content of the grain refining element, specified in the above
Table. When used in combination, the minimum content of the grain refining element, specified in the Table, is not applicable.
5) Where any grade of higher strength steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically rolled (TM) condition, variations in the
specified chemical composition may be permitted by PRS.
6) Where required, the carbon equivalent value CEV shall be calculated from the ladle analysis in accordance with the following
formula:
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
CEV = C + + + [%] (3.4.1-2)
6 5 15
This formula is applicable only to steels which are basically of the carbon-manganese type and gives a general indication of
the steel weldability.
7) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice, the content shall be indicated in the
Inspection Certificate.
3.4.2 The manufacturer’s chemical composition analysis may be subject to check if deemed necessary
by PRS Surveyor.
3.4.3 For TM steels, the carbon equivalent calculated in accordance with formula 3.4.1-2 shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 3.4.3.
Table 3.4.3
Carbon equivalent of higher strength steel up to 100 mm in thickness supplied in TM condition
Carbon equivalent, CEV max, [%] 1)
Steel grades
t ≤ 50 50 < t ≤ 100
AH32, DH32, EH32, FH32 0.36 0.38
AH36, DH36, EH36, FH36 0.38 0.40
AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40 0.40 0.42
t – product thickness, mm.
1) It is a matter for the manufacturer and PRS to mutually agree in individual cases as to whether they wish to specify a more
stringent carbon equivalent.
Upon PRS agreement, the following formula (Pcm – cold cracking susceptibility) may be used for
evaluating weldability instead of the carbon equivalent CEV:
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Pcm = C + + + + + + + + 5 B [%] (3.4.3)
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
In that case, Pcm max. value is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case (e.g. at approval
procedure).
3.5 Supply Condition
3.5.1 All products shall be supplied in condition conformant to the relevant requirements specified in
Table 3.5.1-1 and Table 3.5.1-2.
Table 3.5.1-1
Supply condition of normal strength steels
Steel grade Product thickness, t, [mm] Steel grade
t ≤ 50 as rolled, N, CR or TM
A, B
50 < t ≤ 100 N, CR or TM 1)
D
35 ≤ t ≤ 100 N, CR or TM 2)
E t ≤ 100 N or TM 2)
1) Grades A and B steel plates may be supplied in the as rolled condition subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
2) Grade D steel sections may be supplied in the as rolled condition, provided satisfactory results are consistently obtained from
Charpy V-notch impact tests subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Similarly, Grade E steel sections may be supplied in the as rolled or controlled rolled (CR) condition. The number of impact
test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 3.11.2 or 3.11.3.
Table 3.5.1-2
Supply condition of higher strength steels
Steel grade Grain refining elements used Product thickness, t, [mm] Supply condition
AH32 t ≤ 12.5 as rolled, N, CR or TM
Nb and/or V
AH36 12.5 < t ≤ 100 N, CR or TM 2)
AH32 20 t ≤ 35 N, CR TM or as rolled subject to PRS
Al or Al + Ti
AH36 acceptance in each particular case 1)
35 < t ≤ 100 N, CR or TM 2)
t ≤ 12.5 as rolled, N, CR or TM
AH40 any 12.5 < t ≤ 50 N, CR or TM
50 < t ≤ 100 N, TM or QT
DH32 t ≤ 12.5 as rolled, N, CR or TM
Nb and/or V
DH36 12.5 < t ≤ 100 N, CR or TM 2)
DH32 20 < t ≤ 25 N, CR TM or as rolled subject to PRS
Al or Al + Ti
DH36 acceptance in each particular case 1)
25 < t ≤ 100 N, CR or TM 2)
t ≤ 50 N, CR or TM
DH40 any
50 < t ≤ 100 N, TM or QT
EH32 t ≤ 50 N or TM 2)
any
EH36 50 < t ≤ 100 N or TM
t ≤ 50 N, TM or QT
EH40 any
50 < t ≤ 100 N, TM or QT
FH32 t ≤ 50 N, TM or QT 3)
FH36 any
FH40 50 < t ≤ 100 N, TM or QT
1) The number of impact test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 3.11.2.
2) Subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case, sections in AH32, AH36, DH32 and DH36 grade steels may be supplied in
the as rolled condition, provided satisfactory results are consistently obtained from Charpy V-notch impact tests. Similarly,
sections in EH32 and EH36 grade steels may be supplied in the as rolled or controlled rolled (CR) condition. The number of
impact test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 3.11.2 or 3.11.3.
3) Sections in FH32 and FH36 grade steels may be supplied in the as controlled rolled (CR) condition subject to PRS acceptance in
each particular case. The number of impact test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter
3.11.3.
3.6 Mechanical Properties

3.6.1 For tensile test either the upper yield stress Re or, where Re cannot be determined, the 0.2 percent
proof stress Rp0.2 shall be determined and the material is considered to fulfil the requirements if either value
meets or exceeds the specified minimum value for yield strength Re.
3.6.2 The results of tensile tests for normal strength steels shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table
3.6.2-1, and for higher strength steels – the requirements specified in Table 3.6.2-2.
Table 3.6.2-1
Mechanical properties of normal strength steels
Tensile test
Impact test
Re A Average impact energy

Steel grade Rm
[MPa] [%] Test temp [J] min.
[MPa]
min. min. [°C] t ≤ 50 50 < t ≤ 70 70 < t ≤ 100
L3) T3) L3) T3) L3) T3)
A +20 – – 345) 245) 415) 275)
B 0 274) 204) 34 24 41 27
235 400÷5201) 222)
D –20 27 20 34 24 41 27
E –40 27 20 34 24 41 27
t – product thickness, [mm], L – longitudinal specimen, T – transverse specimen

1) For all thicknesses of Grade A sections, the upper limit for the specified tensile strength Rm range may be exceeded subject
to PRS acceptance in each particular case
2) Elongation A200 mm determined on non-proportional flat specimens, shall fulfil the following requirements:
Product thickness t [mm] t≤5 5 < t ≤ 10 10 < t ≤ 15 15 < t ≤ 20 20 < t ≤ 25 25 < t ≤ 30 30 < t ≤ 40 40 < t ≤ 50
A200 mm [%] min. 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
3) See 3.6.3.
4) PRS may waive the Charpy V-notch impact tests for Grade B steel with the thickness of 25 mm or less.
5) Impact tests for Grade A steel products over 50 mm in thickness are not required when the material is produced using fine
grain practice and furnished normalized. TM rolling may be accepted without impact testing subject to PRS acceptance in
each particular case.
Table 3.6.2-2
Mechanical properties of higher strength steels
Tensile test
Impact test
Re A Average impact energy

Steel grade Rm
[MPa] [%] [J] min.
[MPa] Test temp.
min. min. [°C] t ≤ 50 50 < t ≤ 70 70 < t ≤ 100
L2) T2) L2) T2) L2) T2)
AH32 0 313) 223) 38 26 46 31
DH32 –20 31 22 38 26 46 31
315 440÷570 221)
EH32 –40 31 22 38 26 46 31
FH32 –60 31 22 38 26 46 31
3)
AH36 0 34 243) 41 27 50 34
DH36 –20 34 24 41 27 50 34
355 490÷630 211) 41 27 50 34
EH36 –40 34 24
41 27 50 34
FH36 –60 34 24
AH40 0 39 27 46 31 55 37
DH40 –20 39 27 46 31 55 37
390 510÷660 201)
EH40 –40 39 27 46 31 55 37
FH40 –60 39 27 46 31 55 37
t – product thickness, [mm], L – longitudinal specimen, T – transverse specimen

1) Elongation A200 mm determined on non-proportional flat specimens, shall fulfil the following requirements:
Product thickness t [mm]

Steel grade t≤5 5 < t ≤ 10 10 < t ≤ 15 15 < t ≤ 20 20 < t ≤ 25 25 < t ≤ 30 30 < t ≤ 40 40 < t ≤ 50
Elongation A200 mm [%], min.
AH32, DH32, EH32, FH32 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
AH36, DH36, EH36, FH36 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
2) See 3.6.3.
3) For AH32 and AH36 steel grades, a relaxation in the number of impact tests for acceptance purposes may be permitted by
PRS acceptance in each particular case, provided that satisfactory results are obtained from occasional check tests.
3.6.3 The minimum average energy values shall be specified on Charpy V-notch test specimens taken
in longitudinal direction (KVL). Transverse test specimens (KVT) may be required by the purchaser or PRS.
Transverse test results shall, however, be guaranteed by the supplier.
The tabulated values are for standard specimens 10×10×55 mm. For plate thicknesses less than 10 mm,
impact test may be waived subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case or sub-size specimens,
as specified in sub-chapter 2.6.1 of this Part, may be used.
3.6.4 The average value obtained from one set of three impact tests shall fulfil the requirements specified
in Table 3.6.2-1 and 3.6.2-2. One individual value only may be below the specified average value, provided
it is not less than 70% of that value.
3.6.5 Impact tests are not required when the nominal plate thickness is less than 6 mm.
3.7 Surface Quality and Internal Soundness
3.7.1 The steel shall be free from surface defects prejudicial to the use of the material for the intended
application. The finished material shall have a surface quality in accordance with a recognized standard
such as EN 10163 parts 1, 2 and 3, or an equivalent standard accepted by PRS, unless otherwise specified
in this section.
3.7.2 The responsibility for meeting the surface finish requirements rests with the manufacturer of the
material, who is to take the necessary manufacturing precautions and is to inspect the products prior to the
delivery. At that stage, however, rolling or heat treatment scale may conceal surface discontinuities and
defects. If, during the subsequent descaling or working operations, the material is found to be defective,
PRS may require materials to be repaired or rejected.
3.7.3 The surface quality inspection method shall be in accordance with recognized national or
international standards agreed between purchaser and manufacturer, accepted by PRS.
3.7.4 If agreed by the manufacturer and purchaser, steel may be ordered with improved surface finish
over and above these requirements.
3.7.5 If plates and wide flats are ordered with ultrasonic inspection, this shall be made in accordance
with an accepted standard at the discretion of PRS.
3.7.6 Verification of internal soundness is the responsibility of the manufacturer. The acceptance
of internal soundness by PRS surveyor shall not absolve the manufacturer from this responsibility.
3.7.7 Acceptance Criteria
3.7.7.1 Imperfections
Imperfections of a harmless nature, for example pitting, rolled-in scale, indentations, roll marks,
scratches and grooves, regarded as being inherent of the manufacturing process, are permissible
irrespective of their number, provided the maximum permissible limits of Class A of EN 10163-2 or limits
specified in a recognized equivalent standard accepted by PRS, are not exceeded and the remaining plate
of wide flat thickness remains within the average allowable minus thickness tolerance specified in 3.8.1.
Total affected area with imperfection not exceeding the specified limit shall not exceed 15% of the total
surface in question.
3.7.7.2 Defects
Affected areas with imperfections with a depth exceeding the limits of Class A of EN 10163-2 or the
maximum permissible limits specified in a recognized equivalent standard accepted by PRS, shall be
repaired irrespective of their number.
Cracks, injurious surface flaws, shells (overlapping material with non-metallic inclusion), sand patches,
laminations and sharp edged seams (elongated defects) visually evident on surface and/or edge of plate are
considered defects, which would impair the end use of the product and which require rejection or repair,
irrespective of their size and number.
3.7.7.3 Repair
3.7.7.3.1 Grinding repair
Grinding may be applied provided all the conditions below are adhered to:
.1 The nominal product thickness will not be reduced by more than 7% or 3 mm, whichever is less;
.2 Each single ground area does not exceed 0.25 m2;
.3 All ground areas do not exceed 2% of the total surface in question;
.4 Ground areas lying in a distance less than their average breadth to each other are to be regarded as
one single area;
.5 Ground areas lying opposite each other on both surfaces shall not decrease the product thickness
by values exceeding the limits as stated under .1.
Defects or unacceptable imperfections are to be completely removed by grinding and the remaining
plate or wide flat thickness shall remain within the average allowable minus thickness tolerances specified
in 3.8.1. The ground areas shall be a smooth transition to the surrounding surface of the product. Complete
elimination of the defect is to be verified by magnetic particle or by liquid penetrant testing.
3.7.7.3.2 Welding repair
Weld repair procedures and the method are to be reported and be approved by PRS. Repair of defects
such as unacceptable imperfections, cracks, shells or seams shall be followed by magnetic particle or liquid
penetrant testing.
Local defects which cannot be repaired by grinding as stated in 3.7.5.3.1 may be repaired by welding
with the agreement of PRS subject to the following conditions:
.1 Any single welded area shall not exceed 0.125 m2 and the sum of all areas shall not exceed 2%
of the surface side in question;
.2 The distance between two welded areas shall not be less than their average width;
.3 The weld preparation shall not reduce the thickness of the product below 80% of the nominal
thickness. For occasional defects with depths exceeding the 80% limit, special consideration at the
Surveyor’s discretion will be necessary’
.4 If weld repair depth exceeds 3 mm, ultrasonic testing may be requested by PRS. If required,
ultrasonic testing shall be carried out in accordance with an approved procedure;
.5 The repair shall be carried out by qualified welders using an approved procedure for the appropriate
steel grade. The electrodes shall be of low hydrogen type and shall be dried in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements and protected against rehumidification before and during welding.
3.7.7.4 The surface quality and condition requirement herein are not applied to products in forms of bars
and tubulars, which will be subject to manufacturers’ conformance standards.
3.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality

3.8.1 Tolerances
3.8.1.1 Unless otherwise agreed with PRS or specially required, thickness tolerances specified in
paragraph 3.8.1.3 apply.
3.8.1.2 Tolerance for length, width, flatness and over thickness may be in accordance with a recognized
national or international standard unless otherwise required by PRS.
3.8.1.3 Under thickness tolerances of hull plates of 5 mm and above in thickness shall not exceed 0.3 mm.
The under thickness tolerances of hull plates of less than 5 mm in thickness are to be in accordance
with a national or international standard, e.g. Class B of ISO 7452. However, the minus tolerance shall not
exceed 0.3 mm. .
The under thickness tolerances for plates intended for the construction of machinery appliances (except
for boilers, pressure vessels and independent tanks for the carriage of liquefied gases and chemicals) shall
fulfil the requirements specified in Table 3.8.1.3.
Table 3.8.1.3
Minus tolerances on nominal thickness for products for machinery structures
Nominal plate thickness t [mm] Minus tolerance on nominal thickness [mm]
3≤t<5 –0.3
5≤t<8 –0.4
8 ≤ t < 15 –0.5
15 ≤ t < 25 –0.6
25 ≤ t < 40 –0.7
40 ≤ t < 80 –0.9
80 ≤ t < 150 –1.1
150 ≤ t < 250 –1.2
3.8.1.4 Class C of ISO 7452 or equivalent according to national or international standard may be applied
in lieu of requirements specified in paragraph 3.8.1.3, in which case the requirements of 3.8.1.7 and 3.8.1.8.
need not to be applied.
Additionally, if Class C of ISO 7452 is applied, it is required that the steel mill demonstrates to the
satisfaction of PRS that the number of measurements and measurement distribution is appropriate to
establish that the mother plates produced are at or above the specified nominal thickness.
3.8.1.5 Other requirements regarding under thickness tolerances, including tolerances of products
intended for the construction of lifting appliances, are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
3.8.1.6 The tolerances on nominal thickness specified in 3.8.1.3 are not applicable to areas repaired by
grinding. For areas repaired by grinding the requirements of 3.7.7.3.1 are to be applied, unless stricter
requirements as per recognized standard are considered by PRS.
3.8.1.7 The average thickness of products, i.e. arithmetic mean of the single measurements made in
accordance with the requirements of 3.8.1.8, shall not be less than the nominal thickness.
3.8.1.8 Thickness measurements
3.8.1.8.1 Automated method or manual method is applied to the thickness measurements.
3.8.1.8.2 The measurement procedure and the records of measurements shall be made available to the
PRS Surveyor and copies provided on request.
3.8.1.8.3 The thickness shall be measured according to the following requirements.
At least two of three lines shall be selected for the thickness measurements. At least three points on
each selected line shall be selected for thickness measurement. The number of measuring points shall be
equal on each line. The location of measuring points is defined in Fig. 3.8.1.6.3-1.
← Rolling direction
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
measurement point
Fig. 3.8.1.8.3-1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
measurement point
Fig. 3.8.1.8.3-2
For automated methods, the measuring points at sides shall be located not less than 10 mm but not
greater than 300 mm from the transverse or longitudinal edges of the product
For manual methods, the measuring points at sides shall be located not less than 10 mm but not greater
than 100 mm from the transverse or longitudinal edges of the product.
Note:
The measurement locations apply to a product rolled directly from one slab or steel ingot even if the product is to be later cut by
the manufacturer. Examples of the original measurements relative to later cut products are shown in Fig. 3.8.1.6.3-2
3.8.2 Identification of Materials

3.8.2.1 Manufacturer shall furnish PRS Surveyor with information which will enable determining of the
material origin.
3.8.2.2 Steelmaker shall adopt a system for the identification of ingots, slabs and finished products
which will enable the material to be traced to its original cast.
3.8.3 Inspection and Testing

3.8.3.1 The manufacturer shall afford the Surveyor all necessary facilities and access to all relevant parts
of the works to enable him to verify the approved process is adhered to, for the selection of test materials,
and the witnessing of tests, as required by the Rules and for verifying the accuracy of the testing equipment.
3.8.3.2 The prescribed tests and inspections shall be performed at the place of manufacture before the
dispatch. Test procedures and specimens shall fulfil the requirements specified in Chapter 2 of this Part.
Test specimens shall be selected and stamped by PRS Surveyor and tested in his presence, unless otherwise
agreed with PRS.
3.8.3.3 If plates and wide flats with thickness of 15 mm and over are ordered with through thickness
properties, the through thickness, tensile test shall be performed on specimens taken perpendicular to the
plate surface in accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 5 of this Part.
3.8.3.4 Verification of dimensions is the responsibility of the steel maker. Acceptance by PRS Surveyor
shall not absolve the steel maker from this responsibility.
3.9 Test Material
3.9.1 The term "piece" is understood to mean the rolled product from a single slab, billet or ingot if this
is rolled directly into plates, sections or bars. Batch means a number of similar pieces presented as a group
for acceptance tests. Test samples are taken from such pieces.
3.9.2 All material in a batch presented for acceptance tests shall be of the same product form e.g. plates,
flats, sections, etc. from the same cast and in the same condition of supply. The test samples shall be fully
representative of the material and shall not be cut from the material until heat treatment has been completed.
The test samples shall not be separately heat treated in any way.
3.9.3 Unless otherwise specified, the test specimens shall be taken in accordance with the requirements
specified in paragraphs 3.9.3.1, 3.9.3.2 and 3.9.3.3.
3.9.3.1 From plates and flats with a width of 600 mm or more, the test specimens shall be taken from one
end at a position approximately midway between the axis in the direction of the rolling and the edge of the
rolled product (see Fig. 3.9.3.1). Unless otherwise agreed, the tensile test specimens (and bend test specimens,
if any) shall be prepared with their longitudinal axes transverse to the final direction of rolling.
Fig. 3.9.3.1
3.9.3.2 From flats with a width less than 600 mm, bulb flats and other sections, the test specimens shall
be taken from one end at a position approximately one third from the outer edge (see Figures 3.9.3.2-1,
3.9.3.2-2, 3.9.3.2-3 and 3.9.3.2-4 or – in the case of small sections – as near as possible to this position.
In the case of channels and H-sections, the test samples may alternatively be taken from a position
approximately one quarter of the width from the web centre line or axis (see Figures 3.9.3.2-3 and 3.9.3.2-4).
The tensile test specimens may be prepared with their longitudinal axes either parallel or transverse to the
final direction of rolling.
Fig. 3.9.3.2-1 Fig. 3.9.3.2-2
Fig. 3.9.3.2-3 Fig. 3.9.3.2-4
3.9.3.3 From bars and other similar products, the test specimens shall be taken from one end so that the
longitudinal axes of the test specimens are parallel to the direction of rolling and are as near as possible to
the following:
– for cylindrical sections, at one third of the radius from the outer edge (see Fig. 3.9.3.3-1),
– for non-cylindrical sections, at one third of the half diagonal from the outer edge (Fig. 3.9.3.3-2).
Fig. 3.9.3.3-1 Fig. 3.9.3.3-2
3.10 Mechanical Test Specimens

3.10.1 Tensile test specimens (and bend test specimens, if any), as well as the impact test specimens
shall be taken from the thickest product in a batch.
3.10.2 Dimensions of the tensile test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements specified
in sub-chapter 2.5.3. For plates, wide flats and sections, flat test specimens of full product thickness shall
be used. Round test specimens may be used where the product thickness exceeds 40 mm or for bars and
other similar products. For small sizes of bars, etc., test specimens shall consist of a suitable length of the
full cross section of the product.
3.10.3 Impact test specimens shall be of Charpy V-notch type cut with their edge within 2 mm from the
"as rolled" surface with their longitudinal axes either parallel (indicated "L" in Tables 3.6.2-1 and 3.6.2-2)
or transverse (indicated "T") to the final direction of rolling of the material. The position of the notch shall
not be nearer than 25 mm to a flame cut or sheared edge. Where the product thickness exceeds 40 mm, the
impact test specimens shall be taken with their longitudinal axis at a quarter thickness position.
3.11 Number of Test Specimens

3.11.1 Number of Tensile Test Specimens
Unless otherwise agreed with PRS, from each batch presented with a weight not exceeding 50 tonnes,
one tensile test specimen shall be taken. Where the weight of a batch is greater than 50 tonnes, an additional
specimen shall be taken from each subsequent 50 tonnes or fraction thereof.
Additional test specimens shall be taken for every variation of 10 mm in the thickness or diameter
of products from the same batch.
3.11.2 Number of Impact Test Specimens (except E, EH32, EH36, EH40, FH32, FH36
and FH40 steel grades)
Detailed information on the batch size of the materials for the impact tests is provided in Table 3.11.2-1
and Table 3.11.2-2.
Except where otherwise agreed with PRS, for each batch presented, at least one set of three Charpy
V-notch test specimens shall be made from one piece unless the weight of finished material is greater than 50 t.
Where steel plates – except for Grade A steel over 50 mm in thickness – are supplied in the as controlled
rolled (CR) condition, the frequency of the impact test specimens shall be such that the test specimens shall
be made from each subsequent batch of the weight not exceeding 25 tonnes or fraction thereof.
For steel plates of Grades AH40 and DH40 with thickness over 50 mm in normalized or TM condition,
one set of impact test specimens shall be made from each batch of 50 tonnes or fraction thereof. For those
in QT condition, one set of impact test specimens shall be made from each length as heat treated.
When, subject to PRS consent in each particular case, the material is supplied in the as rolled condition,
the frequency of impact tests shall be increased to one set from each batch of 25 tonnes or fraction thereof.
In the case of Grade A steel over 50 mm in thickness (supplied in the as rolled condition), a set of impact
test specimens shall be made from each subsequent batch of the weight not exceeding 50 tonnes
or a fraction thereof.
3.11.3 Number of Impact Test Specimens (E, EH32, EH36, EH40, FH32, FH36
and FH40 steel grades)
For steel plates supplied in the as normalized (N) or thermo-mechanically rolled (TM) condition, a set
of impact test specimens shall be taken from each plate. For quenched and tempered steel plates, a set of
impact test specimens shall be taken from each plate as heat treated.
For sections, a set of impact test specimens shall be taken from each batch with a weight not exceeding
25 tonnes or fraction thereof.
Where, subject to PRS consent in each particular case, sections (except Grades EH40 and FH40) are
supplied in the as rolled or controlled rolling (CR) condition, a set of impact test specimens shall be taken from
each batch with a weight not exceeding 15 tonnes or fraction thereof.
3.12 Retest Procedures
3.12.1 Where the tensile test for the first piece selected in accordance with sub-chapter 3.9 fails to fulfil
the requirements specified in of the Part IX, re-test requirements for tensile tests shall be as specified in
paragraph 2.3.1.2 of Part IX.
3.12.2 Re-test requirements for Charpy impact test are specified in paragraph 2.3.1 of Part IX.
Table 3.11.2-1
Required supply condition and number of impact tests for normal strength steels
Supply condition (batch for impact tests) 1) 2)
Grade Deoxidation practice Products Thickness [mm]
10 12.5 20 25 30 35 40 50 100
Rimmed sections any (–) not applicable
For t < 50 mm – any plates any (–) N (–)
method except for TM (–) 3)
A
rimmed. CR (50)
For t > 50 mm – killed. AR* (50)
sections any (–) not applicable
For t < 50 mm – any plates any (-) any (50) N (50)
method except for TM (50)
B rimmed. CR (25)
For t > 50 mm – killed. AR* (25)
sections any (–) any (50) not applicable
plates,
Killed any (50) not applicable
sections
N (50) N (50)
plates any (50) CR (50) CR (25)
D TM (50) TM (50)
Killed and fine grain
treated N (50)
TM (50)
sections any (50) not applicable
CR (50)
AR* (25)
Killed and fine grain plates N (each piece), TM (each piece)
E
treated sections N (25), TM (25), CR* (15), AR* (15) not applicable
1) Supply condition; N – Normalised, CR – Controlled Rolled, TM – Thermo-Mechanical rolling, AR* – As Rolled subject to
special approval by PRS, CR* – Controlled Rolled subject to special approval by PRS.
2) (–) – The numbers in parentheses refer to batch weight in tonnes or fraction thereof.
3) See Note 5) to Table 3.6.2-1.
Table 3.11.2-2
Required supply condition and number of impact tests for higher strength steels
Grain Supply condition (batch for impact tests) 1) 2)
Deoxidation
Grade refining Products Thickness [mm]
practice
elements 10 12.5 20 25 30 35 40 50 100
AH32 3) Killed and Nb and/or plates any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50) N (50), CR (25), TM (50)
AH36 3) fine grain V sections any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50) not applicable
treated Al alone *
AR (25)
plates any (50)
or with Ti N (50), CR (50), TM (50) N (50), CR (25), TM (50)
sections any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50), AR* (25) not applicable
AH40 Killed and fine plates any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50) N (50), TM (50), QT (each length as heat treated)
grain treated any
sections any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50) not applicable
DH32 Killed and Nb and/or plates any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50) N (50), CR (25), TM (50)
DH36 fine grain V sections any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50), AR* (25) not applicable
treated plates A (50) AR* (25) not applicable
Al alone N (50), CR (50), TM (50) N (50), CR (25), TM (50)
or with Ti sections any (50) N (50), CR (50), TM (50), not applicable
AR* (25)
DH40 Killed and fine plates N (50), CR (50), TM (50) N (50), TM (50), QT (each length as heat treated)
any
grain treated sections N (50), CR (50), TM (50) not applicable
EH32 Killed and fine any plates N (each piece), TM (each piece)
EH36 grain treated sections N (25), TM (25), AR* (15), CR* (15) not applicable
EH40 Killed and any plates N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each length as heat treated) N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each length
fine grain as heat treated)
treated sections N (25), TM (25), QT (25) not applicable
FH32 Killed and fine any plates N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each length as heat treated) not applicable
FH36 grain treated sections N (25), TM (25), QT (25), CR* (15) not applicable
FH40 Killed and any plates N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each length as heat treated) N (each piece), TM (each piece), QT (each length
fine grain as heat treated)
treated sections N (25), TM (25), QT (25) not applicable
1) Supply condition; N – Normalised, CR – Controlled Rolled, TM – Thermo-Mechanical Rolling, QT – Quenched and Tempered, AR* – As Rolled subject to special approval by PRS,
CR* – Controlled Rolled subject to special approval by PRS.
2) (-) – The numbers in parentheses refer to batch weight in tonnes or fraction thereof.
3) See Note 3) to Table 3.6.2-2.
3.13 Marking
Every finished piece shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9
of Part IX. Additionally, the marking shall include the following particulars:
– steels which have been specially approved by PRS shall have letter "S" after the above identification
mark in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 3.1.4 (e.g. AH36S, ES),
– where required by PRS, the material supplied in thermo-mechanically controlled process condition,
shall have letters "TM" added after the identification mark (e.g. EH35TM).
Inspection Certificate shall include the particulars as required in sub-chapter 1.8 of Part IX, and for
grade A steel sections of a thickness not exceeding 12.5 mm – additional information on the deoxidation
practice applied.
3.15 Additional Requirements for Corrosion Resistant Steel Used as the Alternative Means
of Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks
3.15.1 The requirements of this sub-chapter apply to steel plates, sections and bars of all grades and
thickness up to 50 mm used as specified in IMO Resolution MSC.289(87). Corrosion resistant steels are
steels whose corrosion resistance performance in the bottom or top of the internal cargo oil tank is tested
and approved to satisfy the requirements in MSC.289(87) in addition to other relevant requirements for
hull structural steels. It is not intended that such steels be used for corrosion resistant applications in other
areas of a vessel that are outside of those specified in MSC.289(87).Where not specified otherwise, the
requirements of sub-chapters 3.2 ÷ 3.14 apply.
3.15.2 These requirements do not apply to corrosion resistant steels used in applications that are outside
of those specified in IMO Resolution MSC.289(87). The requirements for stainless steels are specified in
chapter 8.
3.15.3 Corrosion tests shall be performed in accordance with Appendix C. Approval can be given for
application in one of the following areas of a cargo oil tank:
– lower surface of strength deck and surrounding structures,
– upper surface of inner bottom plating and surrounding structures,
– for both strength deck and inner bottom plating.
3.15.4 The manufacturer shall establish a relationship of all the chemical elements which affect the
corrosion resistance. The chemical elements added to archieve this shall be specifically verified for
acceptance. Verification shall be based on the ladle analysis of the steel.
3.15.5 Marking of the material shall meet the requirements of 1.9 and 3.13. Products complying with
the requirements of this sub-chapter shall be marked with a designation by adding a corrosion designation
mark for the grade of steel, e.g. AH36 RCB. The following designations of corrosion resistance shall be
used, according to the area of application of steel:
− lower surface of strength deck and surrounding structures – RCU,
− upper surface of inner bottom plating and surrounding structures – RCB,
− for both strength deck and inner bottom plating – RCW.
3.15.6 When material is supplied in the thermo mechanically controlled process condition, the marking
shall have the letters TM added before the corrosion designation, e.g. EH36 TM RCU Z35.
3.16 Additional Requirements for YP47 Steels and Brittle Crack Arrest Steels
This sub-chapter specifies the requirements on YP47 steels and brittle crack arrest steels intended for
application on container carriers according to the requirements of Part II. Where not specified otherwise,
the requirements of sub-chapters 3.2 ÷ 3.14 apply.
3.16.1 YP47 Steels
3.16.1.1 Steels designated as YP47 refer to steels with a specified minimum yield point of 460 MPa.
3.16.1.2 The YP47 steels can be applied to longitudinal structural members in the upper deck region of
container carriers (such as hatch side coaming, hatch coaming top and the attached longitudinals, etc.).
Special consideration is to be given to the appplication of YP47 steels for other hull structures.
3.16.1.3 This sub-chapter gives the requirements for YP47 steels in thickness greater than 50 mm and
not greater than 100 mm indended for the upper deck region of container carriers. For YP47 steels outside
scope of the said thickness range, special consideration shall be given by PRS.
3.16.2 Brittle Crack Arrest Steels
3.16.2.1 The brittle crack designation can be assigned to YP36, YP40 and YP47 steels which meet the
additional brittle crack arrest requirements and propertied defined in this sub-chapter.
3.16.2.2 The application of brittle crack arrest steels is to comply with the requirements of Part II, which
covers longitudinal structural members in the upper deck region of container carriers (such as hatch side
coaming, upper deck, hatch coaming top and the attached longitudinals, etc.).
3.16.2.3 The thickness range of brittle crack arrest steels is over 50 mm and not greater than 100 mm as
specified in Table 3.16.4.3-1.
3.16.3 Material Specifications for YP47 Steels
3.16.3.1 Material specifications for YP47 steels are specified in Tables 3.16.3.1-1 and 3.16.3.1-2.
Table 3.16.3.1-1
Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for YP47 steels
without specified brittle crack arrest properties
Steel grade 1) EH47
Chemical composition, [%] (ladle samples) 5), 6)
C max 0.18
Mn 0.90÷2.00
Si max 0.55
P max 0.020
S max 0.020
Al (acid soluble) min. 0.015 1), 2)
Nb 0.02÷0.05 2)  total
V 0.05÷0.10 2)  not more
Ti max 0.02  than 0.12%
Cu max 0.35
Cr max 0.25
Ni max 1.0
Mo max 0.08
Carbon equivalent CEV max 3) 0.49
Cold cracking susceptibility Pcm max 4) 0.22
Notes:
1) Total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid soluble content. In that case, the total aluminium content shall
not be less than 0.020%.
combination. When used singly, the steel shall contain the minimum content of the grain refining element, specified in the above
Table. When used in combination, the minimum content of the grain refining element, specified in the Table, is not applicable.
3) The carbon equivalent value CEV shall be calculated from the ladle analysis in accordance with formula 3.4.1-2.
4) Cold cracking susceptibility Pcm value shall be calculated in accordance with formula 3.4.3.
5) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice subject to approval by PRS, the
content shall be indicated in the Inspection Certificate.
6) Variations in the specified chemical compositions may be allowed subject to approval by PRS.
Table 3.16.3.1-2
Supply conditions, grade and mechanical properties for YP47 steels
without specified brittle crack arrest properties 1)
Tensile test Impact test
Supply Yield Average impact energy [J] min.

Grade Tensile Elongation Test
condition strength
[MPa]
strength [%] temperature 50 < t ≤ 70 70 < t ≤ 85 85 < t ≤ 100
[MPa] min. [°C]
min.
L L L
TCMP 2) EH47 460 570 ÷ 720 17 –40 53 64 75
t [mm] – thickness
Notes:
1) The additional requirements for YP47 steel with brittle crack arrest properties are specified in 3.16.4.
2) Other supply conditions are subject to separate consideration by PRS.
3.16.4 Material Specifications for Brittle Crack Arrest Steels

3.16.4.1 Brittle crack arrest steels are defined as steel plate with the specified brittle crack arrest
properties measured by either the brittle crack arrest toughness Kca or Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT).
3.16.4.2 In addition to the required mechanical properties for EH36, EH40 and EH47 grades, brittle
crack arrest steels shall comply with the requirements specified in Tables 3.16.4.3-1 and 3.16.4.3-2.
3.16.4.3 The brittle crack arrest properties specified in Table 3.16.4.3-1 are to be evaluated for the
products in accordance with the procedure approved by PRS. Test specimens shall be taken from each
product unless otherwise agreed by PRS.
Table 3.16.4.3-1
Requirements of brittle crack arrest properties for brittle crack arrest steels
Brittle crack arrest properties 2) 6)
Thickness t Brittle Crack Arrest Toughness Crack Arrest Temperature CAT
Grade 1)
[mm] Kca at –10 °C [°C] 4)
[N/mm3/2] 3)
BCA1 50 < t ≤ 100 min. 6000 –10 or below
BCA2 80 < t ≤ 100 7) min. 8000 5)
Notes:
1) Suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” is to be affixed to the steel grade designation (e.g. EH40-BCA1, EH47-BCA1,H47-BCA2, etc.).
2) Brittle crack arrest properties for brittle crack arrest steels shall be verified by either the brittle crack arrest toughness Kca or
Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT).
3) Kca value shall be obtained by the test method specified in Appendix 3 to UR W 31, rev 2, Dec. 2019.
4) CAT shall be obtained by the test method specified in Appendix 4 to UR W 31, rev 2, Dec. 2019.
5) Criterion of CAT for brittle crack arrest steels corresponding to Kca=8000 N/mm3/2 shall be approved by PRS.
6) Where small-scale alternative tests are used for product testing (batch release testing), these methods shall be approved by
PRS.
7) Lower thicknesses may be approved at the discretion of PRS.
Table 3.16.4.3-2
Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for brittle crack arrest steels
EH36-BCA1 EH40-BCA1 EH47-BCA1
Steel grade EH47-BCA2
EH36-BCA2 EH40-BCA2
Chemical composition, [%] (ladle
samples) 1), 6), 7)
C max 0.18 0.18
Mn 0.90÷2.002) 0.90÷2.00
Si max 0.50 0.55
P max 0.020 0.020
S max 0.020 0.020
Al (acid soluble) min. 0.015 2), 3) 0.015 2), 3)
0.02÷0.05 3)  total 0,02÷0.05 3)
Nb
0.05÷0.10 3)  not more
 total
V 0.05÷0.10 3)
 not more
Ti max 0.02  than 0.12% 0.02
 than 0.12%
Cu max 0.50 0.50
Cr max 0.25 0.50
Ni max 2.0 2.0
Mo max 0.08 0.08
Carbon equivalent CEV max 4) 0.47 0.49 0.55
Cold cracking susceptibility Pcm max 5) – 0.24
Notes:
1) Chemical composition of brittle crack arrest steels shall comply with the Table, regardless of chemical composition specified
in Tables 3.4.1-2 and 3.16.3.1-1.
2) Total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid soluble content. In such cases the total aluminium content
shall not be less than 0.020%.
combination. When used singly, the steel shall contain the minimum content of the grain refining element, specified in the
above Table. When used in combination, the minimum content of the grain refining element, specified in the Table, is not
applicable.
4) The carbon equivalent value CEV shall be calculated from the ladle analysis in accordance with formula 3.4.1-2.
5) Cold cracking susceptibility Pcm value shall be calculated in accordance with formula 3.4.3.
6) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice subject to approval by PRS, the
content shall be indicated in the Inspection Certificate.
7) Variations in the specified chemical compositions may be allowed subject to approval by PRS.
High Strength Steels 51
4 HIGH STRENGTH STEELS

4.1 Application
4.1.1 The requirements specified in this Chapter apply to plates, wide flats, sections, bars and seamless
tubes of hot-rolled, fine-grain, weldable high strength structural steels, intended for use in marine and
offshore structural applications. These requirements do not apply to steels intended for hull structure
of commercial ships whose requirements are specified in Chapter 3.
4.1.2 Steels covered by the scope of these requirements are specified into the following eight yield stress Re
levels: 420, 460, 500, 550, 620, 690, 890 and 960 MPa. For each yield stress level, four forms of toughness:
A, D, E and F are specified based on the impact test temperature, except for yield stress level of 890 and
960 MPa for which grade F is not applicable. List of grades is specified in Table 4.1.2.
Table 4.1.2
A420 D420 E420 F420
A460 D460 E460 F460
A500 D500 E500 F500
A550 D550 E550 F550
A620 D620 E620 F620
A690 D690 E690 F690
A890 D890 E890
A960 D960 E960
4.1.3 Steels covered by the scope of this Chapter shall be supplied in normalized (N)/normalized rolled (NR),
thermo-mechanical controlled rolled (TM) or quenched and tempered (QT) condition.
4.1.4 Steels with a thickness above the maximum thicknesses given in Table 4.5.4 are subject to PRS
approval in each particular case.
4.1.5 Steels differing in chemical composition, deoxidation practice, supply condition or mechanical
properties are subject to PRS approval in each particular case. Such steels are to be given a special designation.
4.2 Approval
4.2.1 High strength steels shall be manufactured by the works approved by PRS for the type and grade
of steel which is being supplied. The procedure for approval is shown in Appendix E
4.2.2 It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to ensure that effective quality, process and production
controls during manufacturing are adhered to within the manufacturing specifications. The manufacturing
specification shall be submitted to PRS.
4.2.3 Where during control imperfection inducing possible inferior quality of product occurs, the
manufacturer shall identify the cause and establish a countermeasure to prevent its recurrence. Also the
complete investigation report shall be submitted to PRS. PRS may require that the frequency of testing for
subsequent products offered shall be increased to gain confidence in the quality.
4.2.4 When semi-finished product is not produced at the approved manufacturer of the finish rolled and
heat treated products, the manufacturer of the semi-finished product shall also be subject to approval by PRS.
4.3 Manufacturing Methods
4.3.1 Steel shall be manufactured by the basic oxygen, electric furnace or by other processes specially
approved by PRS.
4.3.2 Vacuum degassing shall be used for the following steels:
− all steels with enhanced through-thickness properties,
− steels of grades A690÷A960, D690÷D960, E690÷E960 and F690.
4.3.3 Steel shall be fully killed.

4.3.4 Steel shall be fine grain treated and shall have a fine grain structure (equivalent index ≥ 6
determined by micrographic examination in accordance with ISO 643 standard or alternative test method).
The fine grain practice shall be as detailed in the manufacturing specification.
4.3.5 Steel shall contain nitrogen binding elements as detailed in the manufacturing specification.

4.4.1 The chemical composition shall be determined by the steelmaker in an adequately equipped and
competently staffed laboratory. The method of sampling is to follow that carried out for the initial approval
tests, either from the ladle, the tundish or the mould in the case of continuous casting. The aim analysis
shall fulfil the manufacturing specification as well as the requirements specified in Table 4.4.1. All the
elements listed in Table 4.4.1 are to be reported.
Table 4.4.1
Chemical Composition of High Strength Steels
Supply
N/NR TM QT
condition
E420÷E890 A420÷A960 E420÷E960
A420÷A460 A420÷A890
Steel grade E420÷E460 F420÷F690 D420÷D690 F420÷F690
D420÷D460 D420÷D690
D890 D890÷D960
C
0.20 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.18
max
Mn 1.00÷1.70 1.00÷1.70 max. 1.70
P
0.030 0.025 0.025 0.020 0.025 0.020
max 1)
S
0.025 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.015 0.010
max 1)
Al total
0.020 0.020 0.018
min. 2)
Nb
0.05 0.05 0.06
max 3)
V
0.20 0.12 0.12
max 3)
Ti
0.05 0.05 0.05
max 3)
Ni
0.80 2.00 4) 2.00 4)
max 4)
Cu
0.55 0.55 0.50
max
Mo
0.10 0.50 0.70
max 3)
N
0.025 0.025 0.015
max
O
– – 50 ppm – 30 ppm
max 5)
1) For sections the P and S content can be 0.005% higher than the value specified in the table.
2) The total Al/N ratio shal be a minimum of 2:1. When other nitrogen binding elements are used, the minimum Al content and
Al/N ratio do not apply.
3) Total Nb+V+Ti ≤ 0.26% and Mo+Cr ≤ 0.65%, not applicable for steels in QT condition.
4) Higher Ni content subject to PRS approval.
5) The requirements on maximum O content is only applicable to D890, E890, D960 and E960 grades.
4.4.2 Elements used for alloying, nitrogen binding, and fine grain treatment, and as well as the residual
elements are to be as detailed in the manufacturing specification, e.g. when boron is deliberately added for
enhancement of hardenability, the maximum content of boron shall not be higher than 0.005% and the
analysis result shall be reported.
4.4.3 The carbon equivalent value shall be calculated from the ladle analysis. Maximum values are
specified in Table 4.4.3.
The carbon equivalent value shall be calculated using following formulas:
a) for all steel grades:
CEV = C + + + [%]
6 5 15
b) for steel grades A460, D460, E460, F460 and higher, CET value may be used instead of CEV at the
discretion of the manufacturer:
( Mn + Mo) Cr + Cu Ni
CET = C + + + [%]
10 20 40
c) for steels in TM and QT condition with carbon content not more than 0.12%, the cold cracking
susceptibility Pcm may be used instead of CEV:
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Pcm = C + + + + + + + + 5 B [%]
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
Table 4.4.3
Maximum Values of CEV, CET and Pcm
CEV, [%]
Plates Sections Bars Tubes
Steel Supply CET Pcm
grade condition t ≤ 250 mm [%] [%]
50 < t ≤ 100 < t ≤ t ≤ 50 t ≤ 65
t ≤ 50 mm or
100 mm 250 mm mm mm
d ≤ 250 mm
N/NR 0.46 0.48 0.52 0.47 0.53 0.47
AH420÷
TM 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.44 NA NA NA NA
FH420
QT 0.45 0.47 0.49 NA NA 0.46
N/NR 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.51 0.55 0.51 0.25 NA
AH460÷
TM 0.45 0.47 0.48 0.46 NA NA 0.30 0.23
FH460
QT 0.47 0.48 0.50 NA NA 0.48 0.32 0.24
AH500÷ TM 0.46 0.48 0.50 NA 0.32 0.24
NA NA
FH500 QT 0.48 0.50 0.54 0.50 0.34 0.25
AH550÷ TM 0.48 0.50 0.54 NA 0.34 0.25
NA NA
FH550 QT 0.56 0.60 0.64 0.56 0.36 0.28
AH620÷ TM 0.50 0.52 NA NA 0.34 0.26
NA NA
FH620 QT 0.56 0.60 0.64 0.58 0.38 0.30
AH690÷ TM 0.56 NA NA NA 0.36 0.30
NA NA
FH690 QT 0.64 0.66 0.70 0.68 0.40 0.33
AH890÷ TM 0.60 NA 0.38 0.28
NA NA NA NA
EH890 QT 0.68 0.75 0.40 NA
AH960÷
QT 0.75 NA NA NA NA NA 0.40 NA
EH960
4.5.1 High strength steel products shall be supplied in accordance with the processes approved by PRS.
These processes include:
– Normalized (N)/Normalized rolled (NR),
– Thermo-mechanical controlled rolled (TM)/with accelerated cooling (TM+AcC)/with direct quenching
followed by tempering (TM+DQ), or
– Quenched and Tempered condition (QT).
Note: Direct quenching after hot-rolling followed by tempering is considered equivalent to conventional quenching and tempering.
4.5.2 The rolling reduction ratio of slab, billet, bloom or ingot shall not be less than 3:1.
4.5.3 The maximum thickness of slab, billet or bloom for the continuous casting process shall be at the
manufacturer’s discretion.
4.5.4 Maximum thickness of plates, sections, bars and tubulars over which a specific supply condition
is applicable are shown in Table 4.5.4.
Table 4.5.4
Maximum Thickness Limits
Maximum thickness [mm]
Supply condition
Plates Sections Bars Tubes
N 2502) 50 250 65
1)
NR 150
TM 150 50 NA NA
QT 1502) 50 NA 50
1)
The maximum thickness limits of sections, bars and tubulars manufactured by normalized rolling (NR) are less
than those supplied in normalized (N) condition and shall be agreed with PRS.
2)
Approval for steels supplied in normalized (N) condition with thickness larger than 250 mm and quenched and
tempered (QT) steels with thickness larger than 150 mm is subject to the special consideration by PRS.

4.6.1 Tensile Test
Test specimens shall be cut with their longitudinal axes transverse to the final direction of rolling, except
in the case of sections, bars, tubulars and rolled flats with a finished width of 600 m or less, where the
tensile specimens may be taken in either the longitudinal or transverse direction subject to PRS acceptance
in each particular case. Full thickness flat tensile test specimens shall be so prepared as to maintain the
rolling scale at least at one side. When the capacity of the test machines is exceeded by the use of a full
thickness specimen, sub-sized flat tensile specimens representing either the full thickness or half of the
product thickness retaining one rolled surface are to be used. Alternatively, machined round test specimens
may be used. In that case, the axis of the specimen shall be located at a position lying at a distance of t/4
from the surface and additionally at t/2 for thickness above 100 mm or as near as possible to this position.
The test results shall fulfil the relevant requirements specified in Table 4.6.1-1.
Table 4.6.1-1
Mechanical properties for high strength steels
Tensile properties Charpy V-notch impact test
Yield stress Re or Rp0.2 1) Tensile strength Rm
Grade [MPa] min. [MPa] Elongation A 2) Test Average energy KV
of steel [%] min. temperature [J] min.
Nominal thickness, t 4) [mm]
[°C]
≥3≤50 >50≤100 >100≤250 ≥3≤100 >100≤250 T L 3) T L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
AH420 0
DH420 –20
420 390 365 520÷680 470÷650 19 21 28 42
EH420 –40
FH420 –60
AH460 0
DH460 –20
460 430 390 540÷720 500÷710 17 19 31 46
EH460 –40
FH460 –60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
AH500 0
DH500 –20
500 480 440 590÷770 540÷720 17 19 33 50
EH500 –40
FH500 –60
AH550 0
DH550 –20
550 530 490 640÷820 590÷770 16 18 37 55
EH550 –40
FH550 –60
AH620 0
DH620 –20
620 580 560 700÷890 650÷830 15 17 41 62
EH620 –40
FH620 –60
AH690 0
DH690 –20
690 650 630 770÷940 710÷900 14 16 46 69
EH690 –40
FH690 –60
AH890 0
DH890 890 830 NA 940÷1100 NA 11 13 –20 46 69
EH890 –40
AH960 0
DH960 960 NA NA 980÷1150 NA 10 12 –20 46 69
EH960 –40
L – longitudinal specimen, T – transverse specimen, NA – not applicable
Notes:
1. For tensile test either the upper yield strength (ReH) or where ReH cannot be determined, the 0.2% proof strength (Rp0.2) is to be
determined and the material is considered to comply with the requirement if either value meets or exceeds the specified
minimum value of yield strength.
2. For full thickness non-proportional flat specimens with the following dimensions: a = t, b = 25 mm, Lo = 200 mm, the
elongation shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 4.6.1-2.
3. In the case that tensile specimen is parallel to the final rolling direction, the test result shall comply with the requirement of
elongation for longitudinal (L) direction.
4. For plates and sections for applications, such as racks in offshore platforms, etc., where the design requires that tensile
properties are maintained through the thickness, a decrease in the minimum specified tensile properties is not permitted with
an increase in the thickness.
For product forms other than plates and wide flats for which tests on longitudinal specimens are accepted,
the elongation value shall be greater by 2% than those specified in Table 4.6.1-1 and Table 4.6.1-2.
Table 4.6.1-2
Elongation A200 mm minimum values for non-proportional flat specimens 1)
Thickness t [mm]
Strength level ≤ 10 10 < t ≤ 15 15 < t ≤ 20 20 < t ≤ 25 25 < t ≤ 40 40 < t ≤ 50 50 < t ≤ 70
Elongation A200 mm [%], min.
420 11 13 14 15 16 17 18
460 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
500 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
550 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
620 9 11 12 12 13 14 15
690 9 2) 10 2) 11 2) 11 12 13 14
Notes:
1. The tabulated elongation minimum values are the requirements for testing specimen in transverse direction. Specimens for
strength levels 890 and 960 MPa and specimens which are not included in this table shall be proportional specimens with
a gauge length of L0 = 5.65 S0 .
2. For steel plates with strength level 690 MPa with thickness not higher than 20 mm, round specimen in accordance with Chapter
2 may be used instead of the flat tensile specimen. The minimum elongation for testing specimen in transverse (T) direction
is 14%.
4.6.2 Impact Test

From each piece as heat treated at least one set of impact test specimens shall be taken and tested in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.6 of this Part.
Unless otherwise accepted by PRS, the V-notch impact test specimens for plates and wide flats over
600 mm in width shall be taken with their axes transverse to the main rolling direction (see Fig. 2.6.1 in
this Part). For flats with the width not exceeding 600 mm and other product forms, the impact tests shall
be performed on longitudinal specimens.
The test results shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 4.6.1-1.
Normally sub-surface test specimens shall be taken in such a way that one side is not further away than
2 mm from a rolled surface, however, for material with a thickness in excess of 50 mm, impact tests shall
be taken at (or as near as practicable) the quarter thickness (t/4) and mid-thickness (t/2) locations.
Impact test for a nominal thickness less than 6 mm are normally not required.
4.6.3 Number of Test Samples
4.6.3.1 Number of Tensile Test Samples

Tensile test sample is to be randomly selected from each batch, that is to be less than or equal 25 tonnes,
and to be from the same cast, in the same supply condition and of the same thickness.
4.6.3.2 Number of Impact Test Samples
For steel plates in N/NR or TM condition test sample is to be taken from each piece. For steels in QT
condition test sample is to be taken from each individually heat treated part thereof. For sections, bars and
tubulars, test sample is to be taken from each batch of 25 tonnes or fraction thereof. For continuous heat-
treated plates, the scope of tests as well as the number and location of test specimens are subject to PRS
4.6.4 Traceability
Traceability of test material, specimen sampling and test procedures including test equipment with
respect to mechanical properties testing, is to be in accordance with Chapter 3 of this Part.
4.6.5 Re-test Procedures
Unless the tensile and impact test results fulfil the requirements specified in this Part of the Rules, re-
test procedures in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.3 of this Part apply.
4.6.6 Through Thickness Tensile Test
For steels designated with improved through thickness properties or if required by PRS, through
thickness tensile tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 5 of this
Part. Unless otherwise agreed with PRS, through thickness tensile strength shall be not less than 80%
of the specified minimum tensile strength.
4.7 Tolerances
Unless otherwise agreed with PRS or specially required, the thickness tolerances specified in sub-
chapter 3.8 of this Part apply.
4.8 Surface and Work Quality

Surface inspection and verification of internal soundness is the responsibility of the manufacturer. The
acceptance by PRS Surveyor of material later found defective shall not absolve the manufacturer of this
responsibility.
All materials shall be free from cracks, injurious surface flaws, injurious laminations and similar
defects.
The surface quality inspection method shall be in accordance with recognised national or international
standards agreed by purchaser and manufacturer.
Welding repair procedures and the method for reporting repairs shall be agreed with PRS in each
particular case.
Where repair by grinding is performed, then the remaining plate thickness below the ground are shall
be within the allowable under thickness tolerance in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 3.8.1
of this Part.
Surface finish requirements shall be in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 3.7 of this Part.
If required by PRS, the manufacturer shall perform ultrasonic testing in accordance with standard
PN-EN 10160, Level S1/E1 or standard ASTM A578, Level C.
4.9 Stress-relieving Heat Treatment and Other Heat Treatments
Steels approved by the procedures given in Appendix E. with respect to heat treatment are suitable for
stress-relieving heat treatment such as post-weld heat treatment and stress-relieving heat treatment after
cold forming for the purpose of reducing the risk of brittle fracture, increasing the fatigue lifetime and
dimensional stability for machining.
4.10 Facilities for Inspection
The manufacturer is to afford the PRS Surveyor all necessary facilities and access to all relevant parts
of the steel works to enable him to verify the approved process is adhered to, for the selection of test
materials, and the witnessing of tests, also for verifying the accuracy of the testing, calibration of inspection
equipment and traceability of materials.
4.11 Material Identification
4.11.1 Steelmaker shall furnish PRS Surveyor the information to enable determining the material origin.
4.11.2 Steelmaker shall adopt a system for identification of ingots, slabs, billet or bloom and finished
products which will enable the material to be traced to its original cast.
4.12 Marking
Each finished piece shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9
of this Part. Marking shall include following particulars:
− grade of steel,
− manufacturer mark or initials
− cast/heat number, plate number or equivalent identification mark,
− supply condition,
− PRS stamp.
The entire markings are to be encircled with paint or otherwise marked so as to be easily recognised.
Steels which have been specially approved by PRS and which differ from requirements of this Chapter shall
have the letter “S” after the identification mark (e.g. EH620S).
The PRS Surveyor shall be supplied with two copies of the test certificates or shipping statements of all
accepted materials. In addition to the description, dimensions, etc., of the material, the following particulars
shall be included:
− purchaser’s order No.,
− identification of the cast and piece,

− manufacturer’s identification,
− grade of steel,
− chemical analysis, CEV, CET or Pcm value,
− supply condition with heat treatment particulars,
− mechanical properties test results, including traceable test identification,
− surface quality and inspection results,
− ultrasonic test result, where applicable.
The manufacturer is required to provide a written declaration stating that the material has been made
by an approved process, and that it has been subjected to and has withstood satisfactory the required tests
in the presence of the PRS Surveyor. The following form of declaration will be accepted if stamped
or printed on each test certificate with the name of the manufacturer and signed by an authorised
representative of the manufacturer:
“We hereby certify that the material has been made by an approved process and has
been satisfactorily tested in accordance with the PRS Rules”.
Inspection Certificate shall include the particulars as required in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part, and
additional information on the supply condition and heat treatment temperature applied.
Steel with Specified Through Thickness Properties (Steel “Z”) 59
5 STEEL WITH SPECIFIED THROUGH THICKNESS PROPERTIES (STEEL “Z”)

5.1.1 The requirements of Chapter 5 supplement those set forth in Chapters 3 and 4 of this Part for thick
and universal plates (wide flats) with thickness greater than or equal to 15 mm which are intended to have
a specified minimum ductility in the through thickness direction (i.e. ”Z” direction, see Fig. 5.1.1).
Products with a thickness less than 15 mm may be included at the discretion of PRS.
The use of such material, known as "Z" quality steel, is recommended for structural details subject to
strains in the through thickness direction to minimise the possibility of lamellar tearing during fabrication.
Two ”Z” quality steels are specified:
– Z25 for normal ship applications,
– Z35 for more severe applications.
Through thickness properties are characterised by specified values for reduction of area in a through
thickness tensile test.
Through thickness direction “Z”
Principal rolling (longitudinal) direction “L”
Transverse direction “T”
Fig. 5.1.1
5.1.2 „Z” quality steels shall be manufactured at works approved by PRS. The approval shall follow the
procedure specified in Annex A to this Part and shall also take into account the improved steelmaking
techniques such as calcium treatment, vacuum degassing and argon stirring as well as control of centre-
line segregation during continuous casting.
5.1.3 Chemical composition shall fulfil the requirements specified in Chapters 3 and 4 of this Part,
taking into account that the maximum sulphur content shall be 0.008% determined by the ladle analysis.
5.2 Reduction of Area
The minimum average value for reduction of area ”Z” of at least 3 tensile test specimens taken in
through thickness direction of the products shall be as shown for the appropriate grade given in Table 5.2.
Only one individual value may be below the minimum average value, but no less than minimum value
shown for the particular grade (see Fig. 5.3.4). A value less than the minimum individual value is a cause
for rejection.
Table 5.2
Reduction of area allowable values for steels with specified through thickness properties
Grade Z25 Z35
Minimum average ≥ 25% ≥ 35%
Minimum individual ≥ 15% ≥ 25%
Reduction of area shall be calculated in accordance with the formula below:

So − S
=Z ⋅ 100 [%] (5.2)
So
where:
So – cross-section area of the specimen before breakage, [mm2],
S – cross-section area of the specimen at the point of fracture, [mm2].
5.3 Testing
5.3.1 In addition to the requirements of the appropriate steel specification as per Chapters 3 or 4,
preparation of specimens and testing procedures shall be as specified below.
5.3.2 For plates and wide flats, one test sample shall be taken close to the longitudinal centreline of one
end of each rolled piece representing the batch (see Table 5.3.2 and Fig. 5.3.2).
Table 5.3.2
Batch size dependent on product and sulphur content
Product S > 0.005% S ≤ 0.005%
Plates Each piece
Universal plates with thickness ≤ 25 mm Maximum 10 t of the products of the same Maximum 50 t of the products of the
cast, thickness and supply condition. same cast, thickness and supply
Universal plates with thickness > 25 mm Maximum 20 t of the products of the same condition
cast, thickness and supply condition.
The test sample shall be taken close to the longitudinal centreline as shown in Fig. 5.3.2, preferably
from the top part of the ingot.
kierunek
rolling odcinek
walcowania test
próbny
direction sample
próbki
test specimens
pasmo
rolled length
arkusz
steel blachy
sheet
Fig. 5.3.2
The test sample shall be large enough to allow for preparation of 6 specimens.
5.3.3 Three specimens shall be prepared for the tensile test while the rest of the sample remains for
possible retest.
The test specimens shall be machined up to the dimensions given in Fig. 5.3.3-1 or in Fig. 5.3.3-2,
depending on the thickness t of the tested plate.
The parallel (cylindrical) length Lc of the specimen shall not be less than 2d.
Where the product thickness does not allow to prepare specimens of sufficient length suitable for the
gripping jaws of the testing machine, the ends of the specimens may be extended by padding – as indicated
with a hatched area in Fig. 5.3.3-2 – or by welding on an appropriate piece of material having the strength
not less than that of the tested material.
Fig. 5.3.3-1
Round specimens, including those of the padding-extended type, shall be prepared in accordance with
standard PN-EN 10164.
Steel with Specified Through Thickness Properties (Steel “Z”) 61
1)
or Where thickness t > 25 mm, specimens
of diameter d = 10 mm shall be taken.
Fig. 5.3.3-2
5.3.4 The test is considered invalid and further test is required if:
– the specimen has been damaged during machining,
– the weld has been made improperly,
– fracture occurs in the weld or heat-affected zone,
– improper operation of the testing machine or improper grip in its jaws has been found.
Figure 5.3.4 shows the three cases where a retest is permitted. In these instances three more tensile tests
shall be taken from the remaining sample. The average of all six tensile tests shall be greater than the
required minimum average with no more than two results below the minimum average.
Acceptable Result when retest is permitted Acceptable
result retest
Minimum
average
Minimum
individual
= Individual result = Average result
Fig. 5.3.4. Diagram showing acceptance/rejection criteria
5.3.5 In the case of failure after retest, either the batch represented by the piece is rejected or each piece
within the batch is required to be tested.
5.3.6 Unless otherwise agreed, all plates of ”Z” quality steels shall be ultrasonic tested. The acceptance
standards shall be approved by PRS. Neither edge cracks nor delaminations are permitted. Ultrasonic testing is
required and it shall be performed – in accordance with either PN-EN 10160 Level S1/E1 or ASTM A 578
Level C – on each piece in the final supply conditions and with a probe frequency of 4 MHz.
5.4 Marking
Each rolled length shall be marked with a sign to be added to hull and high strength steel plates
designation, e.g. E-Z25, EH36-Z25, etc.
The following information is required to be included in Inspection Certificate in addition to the
appropriate steel requirements given in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part:
.1 through thickness reduction in area [%],
.2 steel grade with Z25 or Z35 notation.
6 STEEL FOR BOILERS AND PRESSURE VESSELS

6.1.1 Application
6.1.1.1 The requirements specified in this Chapter apply to unalloyed and alloy steel plates intended for
boilers, pressure vessels and heat exchangers for service at elevated temperatures which are subject to PRS
survey. Mechanical properties of the plates at elevated temperatures are also specified.
6.1.1.2 Chemical composition and mechanical properties of rolled steels intended for pressure vessels
operating at low temperatures are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
6.1.2 Method of Manufacture
6.1.2.1 Steel shall be manufactured by the open hearth, basic oxygen processes, electric furnace or by
other processes approved by PRS.
6.1.2.2 Steel shall be in the killed condition.

6.1.2.3 The reduction ratio of thickness from continuously cast slab to plate shall not be less than 5:1.
Other values of the reduction are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
6.2 Steel Grades

The requirements specified in this Chapter apply to unalloyed quality steel plates (e.g. P235GH) as well
as special alloy steel plates (e.g. 16Mo3) of thicknesses and supply conditions as specified in sub-chapters
6.4 and 6.5.
6.3.1 Chemical composition of unalloyed quality steels and special alloy steels intended for service at
elevated temperatures shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 6.3.1.
6.3.2 Permissible deviations in the chemical analysis shall fulfil the requirements specified in standard
PN-EN 10028-2.
6.3.3 For unalloyed quality steels, carbon equivalent value CEV shall be calculated in accordance with
the formula below:
CEV =C + + + [%] (6.3.3)
6 5 15
Steel for Boilers and Pressure Vessels 63
Table 6.3.1
Chemical composition (ladle analysis) 1)
[%] mass
Steel grade
C Si Mn P max. S max. Al total N Cr Cu 2) Mo Nb Ni Ti max. V Other
P235GH ≤0.18 ≤0.35 0.60÷1.20 0.025 0.015 ≥0.020 ≤0.0124) ≤0.30 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.020 ≤0.30 0.03 ≤0.02
P265GH ≤0.20 ≤0.40 0.80÷1.40 0.025 0.015 ≥0.020 ≤0.0124) ≤0.30 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.020 ≤0.30 0.03 ≤0.02 Cr+Cu+
Mo+Ni
P295GH 0.08÷0.20 ≤0.40 0.90÷1.50 0.025 0.015 ≥0.020 ≤0.0124) ≤0.30 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.020 ≤0.30 0.03 ≤0.02
≤0.70
P355GH 0.10÷0.22 ≤0.60 1.10÷1.70 0.025 0.015 ≥0.020 ≤0.0124) ≤0.30 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.020 ≤0.30 0.03 ≤0.02
16Mo3 0.12÷0.20 ≤0.35 0.40÷0.90 0.025 0.010 5) ≤0.012 ≤0.30 ≤0.30 0.25÷0.35 – ≤0,30 – – –
18MnMo4-5 ≤0.20 ≤0.40 0.90÷1.50 0.015 0.005 5) ≤0.012 ≤0.30 ≤0.30 0.45÷0.60 – ≤0.30 – – –
20MnMoNi4-5 0.15÷0.23 ≤0.40 1.00÷1.50 0.020 0.010 5) ≤0.012 ≤0.20 ≤0.20 0.45÷0.60 – 0.40÷0.80 – ≤0.02 –
15NiCuMoNb ≤0.17 0.25÷ 0.80÷1.20 0.025 0.010 ≥0.015 ≤0.020 ≤0.30 0.50÷ 0.25÷0.50 0.015÷ 1.00÷1.30 – – –
5-6-4 0.50 0.80 0.045
13CrMo4-5 0.08÷0.18 ≤0.35 0.40÷1.00 0.025 0.010 5) ≤0.012 0.70÷1.15 ≤0.30 0.40÷0.60 – – – – –
13CrMoSi5-5 ≤0.17 0.50÷0.80 0.40÷0.65 0.015 0.005 5) ≤0.012 1.00÷1.50 ≤0.30 0.45÷0.65 – ≤0.30 – – –
10CrMo9-10 0.08÷0.147) ≤0.50 0.40÷0.80 0.020 0.010 5) ≤0.012 2.00÷2.50 ≤0.30 0.90÷1.10 – – – – –
12CrMo9-10 0.10÷0.15 ≤0.30 0.30÷0.80 0.015 0.010 0.01÷0.04 ≤0.012 2.00÷2.50 ≤0.25 0.90÷1.10 – ≤0.30 – – –
X12CrMo5 0.10÷0.15 ≤0.50 0.30÷0.60 0.020 0.005 5) ≤0.012 4.00÷6.00 ≤0.30 0.45÷0.65 – ≤0.30 – – –
13CrMoV9-10 0.11÷0.15 ≤0.10 0.30÷0.60 0.015 0.005 5) ≤0.012 2.00÷2.50 ≤0.20 0.90÷1.10 ≤0.07 ≤0.25 0.03 0.25÷0.35 ≤0.002B
≤0.015Ca
12CrMoV12- 0.10÷0.15 ≤0.15 0.30÷0.60 0.015 0.005 5) ≤0.012 2.75÷3.25 ≤0.25 0.90÷1.10 ≤0.078) ≤0.25 0.038) 0.20÷0.30 ≤0.002B 8)
10 ≤0.015Ca 8)
X10CrMoVNb 0.08÷0.12 ≤0.50 0.30÷0.60 0.020 0.005 ≤0.04 0.03÷ 8.00÷ ≤0.30 0.85÷1.05 0.06÷ ≤0.30 – 0,18÷0.25 –
9-1 0.07 9.50 0.10
1) Elements not indicated in this table shall not be intentionally added to the steel without the orderer’s consent except for the elements used for the cast finishing. Reasonable countermeasures shall
be taken against introduction – from scrap or other components used for the steel cast – of such elements which may have adverse effect on mechanical properties or usefulness of the steel.
2) Lower than maximum content of copper and/or maximum total content of copper and tin, e.g. Cu+6 Sn ≤ 0.33%, may be accepted at the offer enquiry, e.g. due to deformability at elevated temperatures,
for those steel grades for which the maximum content of copper is specified only.
3) For product thicknesses < 6 mm, manganese content less than 0.20% is permitted.
4) The condition that Al/N ≥2 shall be fulfilled.
5) Al content in the cast shall be determined and indicated in the Inspection Certificate.
6) If the material resistance to hydrogen embrittlement is of significant importance, then the minimum chromium content of 0.80% may be accepted at the offer enquiry and order.
7) For product thicknesses > 150 mm, the maximum carbon content of 0.17% may be accepted at the offer enquiry and order.
8) This grade may be manufactured with the addition of either Ti + B or Nb + Ca. The following minimum content values are permitted: ≥ 0.015 % Ti and ≥ 0.001 % B where Ti + B; ≥ 0.015 % Nb
and ≥ 0.0005 % Ca where Nb + Ca.

Mechanical properties at room temperature and the yield stress at elevated temperature of steel for
boilers and pressure vessels, determined on transverse specimens, shall fulfil the requirements specified in
Table 6.4-1 and Table 6.4-2.
Mechanical properties of rolled steels exceeding 60 mm in thickness as well as 1% creep limit and creep
strength shall fulfil the requirements specified in standard PN-EN 10028-2.
Table 6.4-1
Mechanical properties (transverse specimens) 1)
Impact energy KV [J] min.
Regular Product Tensile test at ambient temperature
at temperature
Steel grade supply thickness
condition 2) t [mm] Re [MPa] A 0
Rm [MPa] –20 [oC] +20 [oC]
min. [%] [oC]
≤ 16 235
P235GH N 3) 16 < t ≤ 40 225 360÷480 24 27 34 40
40 < t≤ 60 215
≤ 16 265
P265GH N 3) 16 < t ≤ 40 255 410÷530 22 27 34 40
40 < t ≤ 60 245
≤ 16 295
P295GH N 3) 16 < t ≤ 40 290 460÷580 21 27 34 40
40 < t ≤ 60 285
≤ 16 355
P355GH N 3) 16 < t ≤ 40 345 510÷650 20 27 34 40
40 < t ≤ 60 335
≤ 16 275
16Mo3 N 4) 16 < t ≤ 40 270 440÷490 22 5) 5) 31
40 < t ≤ 60 260
18MnMo4-5 NT ≤ 60 345 510÷650 20 27 34 40
20MnMoNi4-5 QT ≤ 40 470 590÷750
18 27 40 50
40 < t ≤ 60 460 590÷730
15NiCuMoNb5-6-4 NT ≤ 60 460
610÷780 16 27 34 40
40 < t ≤ 60 440
13CrMo4-5 NT ≤ 16 300 5) 5)
610÷780 19 31
16 < t ≤ 60 290
13CrMoSi5-5 NT ≤ 60 310 510÷690 20 5) 27 34
QT ≤ 60 400 510÷690 27 34 40
10CrMo9-10 NT ≤ 16 310 480÷630 18 5) 5) 31
16 < t ≤ 40 300
40 < t ≤ 60 290
12CrMo9-10 NT lub
≤ 250 355 540÷690 18 27 40 70
QT
X12CrMo5 NT ≤ 60 320 510÷690 20 27 34 40
13CrMoV9-10 NT ≤ 60 455 600÷780 18 27 34 40
12CrMoV12-10 NT ≤ 60 455 600÷780 18 27 34 40
X10CrMoVNb9-1 NT ≤ 60 445 580÷760 18 27 34 40
1) For product thicknesses > 60 mm (except for grade 12CrMo9-10) the property values are subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case.
2) For product thicknesses for which regular supply condition is NT, tensile strength and impact energy values may be higher for
QT supply condition subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
3) See paragraph 6.5.2.
4) At the manufacturer’s discretion, this steel may be supplied also in NT supply condition.
5) This value may be agreed at the offer enquiry and ordering.
Table 6.4-2
Minimum values of proof stress Rp0.2 at elevated temperatures
for product thicknesses up to 60 mm 1)
Product Rp0.2 [MPa] min. at temperature [oC]
Steel grade thickness 2, 3)
t [mm] 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
≤ 16 227 214 198 182 167 153 142 133 – –
P235GH 16 < t ≤ 40 218 205 190 174 160 147 136 128 –- –
40 < t ≤ 60 208 196 181 167 153 140 130 122 – –
≤ 16 256 241 223 205 188 173 160 150 – –
P265GH 16 < t ≤ 40 247 232 215 197 181 166 154 145 – –
40 < t ≤ 60 237 223 206 190 174 160 148 139 – –
≤ 16 285 268 249 228 209 192 178 167 – –
P295GH 16 < t ≤ 40 280 264 244 225 206 189 175 165 – –
40 < t ≤ 60 276 259 240 221 202 186 172 162 – –
≤ 16 343 323 299 275 252 232 214 202 – –
P355GH 16 <t ≤ 40 334 314 291 267 245 225 208 196 – –
40 < t ≤ 60 324 305 282 259 238 219 202 190 – –
≤ 16 273 264 250 233 213 194 175 159 147 141
16 Mo3 16 < t ≤ 40 268 259 245 228 209 190 172 156 145 139
40 < t ≤ 60 258 250 236 220 202 183 165 150 139 134
18MnMo4-5 ≤ 60 330 320 315 310 295 285 265 235 215 –
≤ 40 460 448 439 432 424 415 402 384 – –
20MnMoNi4-5
40 < t ≤ 60 450 438 430 423 415 406 394 375 – –
15NiCuMoNb5- ≤ 40 447 429 415 403 391 380 366 351 331 –
6-4 40 < t ≤ 60 427 410 397 385 374 363 350 335 317 –
≤ 16 294 285 269 252 234 216 200 186 175 164
13CrMo4-5
16 < t ≤ 60 285 275 260 243 226 209 194 180 169 159
13CrMoSi5-5 ≤ 60 299 283 268 255 244 233 223 218 206 –
(NT)
≤ 16 288 266 254 248 243 236 225 212 197 185
10CrMo9-10 16 < t ≤ 40 279 257 246 240 235 228 218 205 191 179
40 < t ≤ 60 270 249 238 232 227 221 211 198 185 173
12CrMo9-10 ≤ 60 341 323 311 303 298 295 292 287 279 –
X12CrMo5 ≤ 60 310 299 295 294 293 291 285 273 253 222
13CrMoV9-10 ≤ 60 410 395 380 375 370 365 362 360 350 –
12CrMoV12- ≤ 60 410 395 380 375 370 365 362 360 350 –
10
X10CrMoVNb9- ≤ 60 432 415 401 392 385 379 373 364 349 324
1
1) The data correspond to the lower region of the particular curve belt determined in accordance with standard EN 10314 within
the confidence interval around 98% (2s).
2) For product thicknesses exceeding the specified maximum values, the values of Rp0.2 at elevated temperatures are subject to
PRS acceptance in each particular case.
3) Supply condition is specified in Table 6.4-1 (see also Note 3 to Table 6.4-1).

6.5.1 Supply condition of rolled steel for product thicknesses not exceeding 60 mm shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 6.5.1 and shall be stated in the Inspection Certificate. Supply condition of
rolled steel for product thicknesses exceeding 60 mm are specified in standard PN-EN 10028-2.
6.5.2 For unalloyed quality steels, normalising rolling may be substituted for normalising.
6.5.3 Unalloyed quality steel products may be supplied also in AR supply condition subject to PRS
6.5.4 Critical time temperature parameter Pcri and possible combinations of stress relieving temperature
and holding time shall be determined in accordance with standard PN-EN 10028-2.
Table 6.5.1
Supply condition for steels for boilers and pressure vessels
Category of steels Steel grade Regular supply condition
P235GH
P265GH
Unalloyed quality steels N 1)
P295GH
P355GH
16Mo3 N 2)
18MnMo4-5 NT
20MnMoNi4-5 QT
15NiCuMoNb5-6-4 NT
13CrMo4-5 NT
13CrMoSi5-5 NT, QT
Special purpose alloy steels
10CrMo9-10 NT, QT
12CrMo9-10 NT, QT
X12CrMo4 NT
13CrMoV9-10 NT
12CrMoV12-10 NT
X10CrMoVNb9-1 NT
See paragraph 6.5.2.

2) At the manufacturer’s discretion, the steel may be supplied also in NT supply condition.
6.6 Testing
Each single plate shall be subjected to testing.
Unless provided otherwise, samples shall be taken in accordance with the requirements specified in
sub-chapter 3.9 of this Part.
Tensile and impact tests specimens shall be so cut that their axes be perpendicular to the final direction
of rolling (transverse specimens).
6.6.2 Mandatory Testing
The following tests shall be performed:
– tensile test at temperature +20ºC,
– impact test,
– dimensions’ check,
– surface condition visual examination.
6.6.3 Additional Testing
The following tests may be performed subject to order specification:
– tensile test at elevated temperature to determine Rtp0.2,
– chemical analysis,
– through thickness tensile test (see Chapter 5 of this Part),
– ultrasonic testing.
6.6.4 Tensile Test at Ambient Temperature

For unalloyed steel plates with thickness not exceeding 50 mm, one sample shall be taken from each
rolled length.
For unalloyed steel plates with more than 50 mm in thickness, one sample shall be taken from one end
when the rolled length does not exceed 15 m or test specimens shall be taken from both ends when the
rolled length exceeds 15 m.
For alloyed steel plates, one specimen shall be taken from one end if the rolled length does not exceed
7 m or test specimens shall be taken from both ends if the rolled length exceeds 7 m.
The test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.5 of this
Part.
6.6.5 Tensile Test at Elevated Temperature
Proof stress shall be determined in accordance with standard PN-EN ISO 6892-2.
Proof stress shall be determined on one specimen taken from each cast, at the temperature specified in the
order. Where the temperature has not been specified, the test shall be performed at the temperature of 300°C.
6.6.6 Impact Test
Impact test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.6
of this Part.
Rolled products with a thickness of 5 mm and above shall be subjected to an impact test at temperature
specified in Table 6.4-1. A set of Charpy V-notch specimens (3 specimens) shall be taken as specified in sub-
chapter 6.6.1 for tensile test.
6.6.7 Other Tests
Where ultrasonic testing has been agreed for plates with a thickness of 6 mm and above to check the
product internal quality, the requirements specified in standard PN-EN 10160 apply.
Other testing (e.g. material resistance to hydrogen embrittlement, brittleness testing of steel CrMo) shall
be performed in accordance with standard PN-EN 10028-2.
6.7.1 Surface inspection and verification of dimensions are the responsibility of the steelmaker, and
acceptance by PRS Surveyor of material later found to be defective shall not absolve the steelmaker of this
responsibility.
6.7.2 The surface of the plates shall be smooth and clean, free from cracks, pulls, laminations, scales,
inclusions.
6.7.3 Plate surface defects due to the method of manufacture are permitted, provided their depth does
not exceed the thickness tolerances specified in the applicable standard (e.g. PN-EN 10029).
6.7.4 Repair of defects by welding is permitted subject to PRS consent in each particular case.
6.7.5 All products shall be submitted to PRS Surveyor for final inspection and check.
6.8 Marking
Material marking shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9
of this Part.

For all approved steels, PRS issues Inspection Certificate in accordance with the requirements specified
in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part.
7 STEEL FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICE

7.1 Steel for Hull Structures
Steels intended for hull structures exposed to low temperatures shall fulfil the requirements specified
in Chapter 3 of Part IX.
The principles of steel selection for particular hull elements are specified in Part II – Hull.
7.2 Steels for Construction of Liquefied Gas Tankers

Steel plates, sections, tubes, forgings, castings and welded structures used in the construction of cargo
tanks, pressure vessels, processing tanks, cargo and processing pipelines, secondary barriers and the
adjacent structures intended for the carriage of liquefied gases shall fulfil the requirements specified in
Publication 48/P – Requirements Concerning Gas Tankers.
High manganese austenitic steel used for construction of cargo and fuel tanks of LNG carriers and
LNG-fuelled ships shall fulfil the requirements specified in the Interim Guidelines on the Application
of High Manganese Austenitic Steel for Cryogenic Service (IMO MSC.1/Circ. 1599).
7.3 Steels for Other Structures
Steels intended for low temperature service structures, other than those specified in 7.1 and 7.2, are
subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Stainless Steel 69
8 STAINLESS STEELS
The requirements specified in the present Chapter apply to weldable austenitic and duplex stainless
steel plates, flats, bars and sections with a thickness of up to 50 mm, intended for construction of hull
structures and tanks for the carriage of chemicals.
In respect of chemical composition, these requirements are also applicable to the clad steels (see
Chapter 9 of this Part).
Application of steel, the chemical composition and mechanical properties of which do not fulfil the
present requirements, as well as the use of other stainless steels complying with the relevant standards are
Austenitic steels may be used for applications where the design temperature is not less than –165°C.

The chemical composition of austenitic and duplex stainless steels in ladle analysis shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 8.2.

Mechanical properties of austenitic and duplex stainless steels shall fulfil the requirements specified in
Table 8.3. For austenitic steels, the impact test is required where the design temperature is lower than
–105°C.
For duplex steels, the impact test is required where the design temperature is lower than –20°C.
Unless otherwise specified in the order, the products from austenitic and duplex stainless steels shall be
supplied in the as solution treatment condition, and their surface shall be etched.
8.5 Testing
Each plate (length) shall be subjected to testing after heat treatment in accordance with the requirements
specified in Chapter 2 of this Part. Chemical analysis and tensile test shall be performed. If specified in the
order, testing specified in sub-chapters 8.5.3 ÷ 8.5.5 shall be performed.
Testing mentioned in sub-chapters 8.5.1 and 8.5.2 are mandatory, while those mentioned in sub-chapters
8.5.3, 8.5.4 and 8.5.5 are mandatory only where they have been agreed in the order specifications.
8.5.1 Chemical Analysis
Chemical composition shall be determined on the basis of the ladle analysis of specimens taken from
each cast. PRS Surveyor may require that the results of the analysis should be checked.
8.5.2 Tensile Test
From each batch subjected to testing, at least one tensile test specimen shall be taken. A batch consists of:
– for plates with a thickness over 10 mm: each piece;
– for plates supplied in rolls: each roll, the specimens being taken from both ends of the roll;
– other products: the products made from one cast, of the same shape and dimensions, the same supply
condition and the same surface finishing – in the amount not exceeding 10 tonnes.
In the case of plates or wide flats with a thickness over 600 mm, the specimens shall be cut with their
axes transverse to the direction of rolling. For other products, the specimens, at the manufacturer’s
discretion, may be taken in transverse or longitudinal direction.
8.5.3 Impact Test
Impact test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 8.3 and
where specially requested by the purchaser. Impact test shall be performed on three Charpy V-notch
specimens.
Table 8.2
Chemical composition of austenitic and duplex stainless steels
Steel grade Chemical composition [%]
C Si Mn P S
designation1) acc. to AISI Cr Ni Mo Others
max max max max max
Austenitic steels
X2CrNi19-11 304L 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 18÷20 10÷12 N ≤ 0.11
X2CrNiMo17-12-2 316L 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 16.5÷18.5 10÷13 2.0÷2.5 N ≤ 0.11
X2CrNiMo17-13-3 316LN 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 16.5÷18.5 11÷14 2.5÷3.0 0.12 ≤ N ≤ 0.22
X2CrNiMo18-15-4 317L 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 17.5÷19.5 13÷16 3.0÷4.0 N ≤ 0.11
– 317LN 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 18÷20 12.5÷15.0 3.0÷4.0 0.14 ≤ N ≤ 0.22
X6CrNiTi18-10 321 0.08 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 17÷19 9÷12 – 5xC ≤ Ti ≤ 0.70
X6CrNiNb18-10 347 0.08 1.0 2.0 0.045 0.015 17÷19 9÷12 – 10xC ≤ Nb ≤ 1.0
Duplex steels
X2CrNiMoN22-5-3 S31803 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.035 0.015 21÷23 4.5÷6.5 2.5÷3.5 0.10 ≤ N ≤ 0.22
X2CrNiMoN25-7-4 S32750 0.030 1.0 2.0 0.035 0.015 24÷26 6÷8 3.0÷4.5 0.24 ≤ N ≤ 0.35
1) According to PN-EN 10088-1.

Stainless Steels 71
Table 8.3
Mechanical properties of austenitic and duplex stainless steels in solution treatment condition
Tensile test Impact test for thicknesses
Steel grade Thickness
Product Rm A t ≥ 10 mm
max. Rp0.2 Rp1.0
form 1) min. min. KVL2) KVT2)
Designation acc to AISI [mm] min. [MPa] min. [MPa] t[oC]
[MPa] [%] [J] min. [J] min.
Austenitic steels
C 8 220 250 520÷700 – –
X2CrNi19-11 304L H 13,5 200 240 45 100 60
P 75 200 240 500÷ 700
C 8 240 270 530÷ 680 40 – –
X2CrNiMo17-12-2 316L H 13.5 220 260 100 60
P 75 220 260 520÷ 670 45
C 8 300 330 35 –196 – –
X2CrNiMo17-13-3 316LN H 13.5 280 320 580÷ 780 100 60
P 75 280 320 40
C 8 240 270 550÷ 700 35 – –
X2CrNiMo18-15-4 317L H 13.5 220 260 100 60
P 75 220 260 520÷ 720 40
– 317LN P 50 300 340 520÷ 720 40 41 27
C 8 220 250 520÷ 720 – –
X6CrNiTi18-10 321 H 13.5 200 240 40 100 60
P 75 200 240 500÷ 700
C 8 220 250 520÷ 720
H 13.5 200 240
P 75 200 240 500÷ 700
Duplex steels
C 8 500 – 700÷ 950 20 – –
X2CrNiMoN22-5-3 S31803 H 13.5 460 – 25 100 60
P 75 460 – 640÷ 840 25 +20
C 8 550 – 750÷ 1000 – –
X2CrNiMoN25-7-4 S32750 H 13.5 530 – 20 100 60
P 75 530 – 730÷ 930
Notes:
1) C – cold rolled strips, H – hot rolled strips, P – hot rolled plates.
2) KVL – impact energy value for longitudinal specimen, KVT – impact energy value for transverse specimen.
8.5.4 Intergranular Corrosion Resistance Test

This test shall be performed on at least two specimens, taken from two different products of each cast.
Laboratory tests of intergranular corrosion resistance of stainless steel shall be performed on the basis
of the relevant standards (e.g. ASTM A262-02, PN-EN ISO 3651-1, PN-EN ISO 3651-2).
Specimens taken from Ti stabilized steels and steels with the content of C ≤ 0.03% shall be tested after
heat treatment (annealed at the temperature of 700°C for 30 minutes and quenched in water).
Specimens from other steels shall be tested in the as supplied condition.
8.5.5 Other Tests
If specified in the order, other tests shall be performed, e.g. tensile test at elevated temperature, hardness
test, etc.
8.5.5.1 Test of corrosion resistance of steel on simulated upper deck conditions
The test is performed to confirm corrosion resistance of steel used as an alternative means of corrosion
protection for cargo oil tanks of crude oil tankers according to the IMO Resolution MSC.289(87).
8.5.5.1.1 Test conditions
Tests of corrosion resistance on simulated upper deck conditions in cargo oil tank shall satisfy each of the
following conditions:
.1 Corrosion resistant steel and conventional steel shall be tested at the same time.
.2 The chemical composition of conventional steel shall comply with the requirements of table
8.5.5.1.1. The mechanical properties of the test specimen shall be representative of steel used in its
intended shipboard application.
Table 8.5.5.1.1
Al
Nb V Ti Cu Cr Ni Mo
C Mn Si P S (acid soluble) others
max max max max max max max
min.
0.13÷ 1.00÷ 0.15÷ 0.010÷ 0.002÷ 0.015 0.02 0.10 0.02 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.02 each
0.17 1.20 0.35 0.020 0.006 max
combined
0.02
max 0.12
.3 The tests of corrosion resistant steel shall be performed for 21, 49, 77 and 98 days. The tests for
conventional steel shall be performed for 98 days. The tests of welded joints shall be performed
for 98 days.
.4 There shall be five test pieces for each test period.
.5 The size of each test piece is 25±1 mm × 60±1 mm × 5±0.5 mm. The surface of the test piece shall
be polished with an emery paper #600. The size of the test piece for a welded joint is 25±1 mm ×
60±1 mm × 5±0.5 mm, including 15±5 mm width of the weld metal part, according to fig. 8.5.5.1.1-1.
Fig. 8.5.5.1.1-1. Dimensions of test pieces for the test of corrosion resistance of steel on simulated upper deck conditions
.6 The surface of the test piece, except for the tested surface, shall be protected from corrosive
environment in order not to affect the test results.
.7 The test apparatus consists of a double chamber, and the temperature of the outer chamber shall be
controlled. The sketch of apparatus is presented in fig. 8.5.5.1.1-2.
Stainless Steels 73
Fig. 8.5.5.1.1-2. Sketch of apparatus for the test of corrosion resistance of steel on simulated upper deck conditions
.8 Simulating the condition of the actual upper deck, the test cycle runs with distilled water and
simulated crude oil tank gas (4±1% O2, 13±2% CO2, 100±10 ppm SO2, 500±50 ppm H2S,
83±2% N2). A sufficient distance between the surface of the test piece and the distilled water shall
be kept to avoid splashing of distilled water. The minimum gas flow rate is 100 cm3/min for the
first 24 h and 20 cm3/min after 24 h.
.9 The test pieces shall be heated for 19±2 h at 50±2°C and 3±2 h at 25±2°C and the transition time
shall be at least 1 h. The time for 1 cycle is 24 h. The temperature of the distilled water shall be
kept at not higher than 36°C, while the temperature of the test pieces is 50°C.
8.5.5.1.2 Test results
Prior the testing, the following measured data shall be reported:
.1 size and weight of the test piece prior to the testing,
After the testing, the following measured data shall be reported:
.2 weight loss (difference between initial weight and weight after testing) of conventional steel (WC) and
corrosion resistant steel (W21, W49, W77 and W98),
.3 corrosion loss of conventional steel (CLC) and corrosion resistant steel (CL21, CL49, CL77 and CL98),
calculated by the following formulae:
10 ⋅ WC
CLC = [mm] (8.5.5.1.2.3-1)
S⋅D
10 ⋅ W21
CL21 = [mm] (8.5.5.1.2.3-2)
S⋅D
10 ⋅ W49
CL49 = [mm] (8.5.5.1.2.3-3)
S⋅D
10 ⋅ W77
CL77 = [mm] (8.5.5.1.2.3-4)
S⋅D
10 ⋅ W98
CL98 = [mm] (8.5.5.1.2.3-5)
S⋅D
where:
WC [g] – weight loss of conventional steel (average of five test pieces),
W21 [g] – weight loss of corrosion resistant steel after 21 days (average of five test pieces),
S [cm2] – test surface area,
D [g/cm3] – density.
The test is considered to be performed appropriately if CLC is between 0.05 and 0.11 (corrosion
rate is between 0.2 and 0.4 mm/year). The concentration of H2S in simulated crude oil tank gas may
be increased for adjusting CLC.
.4 coefficients A and B of corrosion resistant steel, calculated from the test results for 21, 49, 77 and
98 days by least square method.
Corrosion loss of corrosion resistant steel is described as follows:

CL = A tB [mm] (8.5.5.1.2.4)
A, B – coefficients, [mm]
t – test period [days].
.5 estimated corrosion loss after 25 years (ECL) calculated by the following formula:
ECL = A ∙ (25 ∙ 365)B [mm]
8.5.5.1.3 Test results of welded joint
The surface boundary between base metal and weld metal shall be photographed by microscope at 1,000
times magnification.
8.5.5.1.4 Acceptance criteria
The test results shall satisfy the following criteria:
.1 for base metal – ECL ≤ 2 mm,
.2 for welded joint – no discontinuous surface (e.g. step) between the base metal and weld metal.
8.5.5.1.5 Test report
The test report shall include the following information:
.1 name of the manufacturer,
.2 date of tests,
.3 chemical composition and corrosion resistant process of steel,
.4 test results according to 8.5.5.1.2 and 8.5.5.1.3,
.5 judgement according to 8.5.5.1.4.
8.5.5.2 Test of corrosion resistance of steel on simulated inner bottom conditions
The test is performed to confirm corrosion resistance of steel used as an alternative means of corrosion
protection for cargo oil tanks of crude oil tankers according to the IMO Resolution MSC.289(87).
8.5.5.2.1 Test conditions
Tests of corrosion resistance on simulated inner bottom conditions in cargo oil tanks shall satisfy each
of the following conditions:
.1 The test shall be performed for 72 h for base metal, and 168 h for welded joint.
.2 There shall be at least five test pieces of corrosion resistant steel for base metal and welded joint,
respectively. For comparison, at least five test pieces of base metal of conventional steel should be
tested in the same conditions.
.3 The size of each test piece is 25±1 mm x 60±1 mm x 5±0.5 mm for a specimen with base metal
only, and is 25±1 mm x 60±1 mm x 5±0.5 mm for a specimen with welded joint, including
15±5 mm width of weld metal part, as shown in Fig. 8.5.5.2.1-1. The surface of the test piece shall
be polished with an emery paper #600, except a hole for hanging.
Fig. 8.5.5.2.1-1. Test piece sizes for the test of corrosion resistance of steel on simulated inner bottom conditions
Stainless Steels 75
.4 The samples shall be hung in a solution from a fishing line (0.3-0.4 mm in diameter) made of nylon.
A sketch of a corrosion test configuration is shown in Fig. 8.5.5.2.1-2.
Fig. 8.5.5.2.1-2. Sketch of apparatus for the test of corrosion resistance of steel on simulated inner bottom conditions
.5 The test solution contains 10% NaCl and its pH is 0.85 adjusted by HCl solution. The test solution
should be changed to a new one every 24 h to minimize pH change of the test solution. The volume
of the solution is more than 20 cm3 per cm2 of surface area of test piece. The temperature of the
test solution shall be kept at 30±2°C.
8.5.5.2.2 Test results

Prior to the testing, the following data shall be measured and reported:
.1 size and weight of the test piece prior to the testing,
After the testing, the following measured data shall be reported:
.2 weight loss (difference between initial weight and weight after testing),
.3 corrosion rate (CR) calculated by the following formula:
365 ⋅ 24 ⋅ W ⋅ 10
CR = [mm/year],
S ⋅ 72 ⋅ D
where:
W [g] – weight loss,
S [cm2] – surface area,
D [g/cm3] – density.
.4 To identify specimens which hold crevice and/or localized corrosion, the CR shall be plotted on
a normal distribution statistic chart (Fig. 8.5.5.2.2). CR values which deviate from the normal
statistical distribution shall be eliminated from the test results.
.5 Calculation of average value of CR – CRave.
Fig. 8.5.5.2.2. Example of a CR value chart on a normal distribution statistic chart.

The value marked with ● shall be abandoned and eliminated.
8.5.5.2.3 Test results of welded joint

The surface boundary between base metal and weld metal shall be photographed by microscope
at 1,000 times magnification.
8.5.5.2.4 Acceptance criteria
The test results shall satisfy the following criteria:
.1 for base metal – CRave ≤ 1.0 mm/year,
.2 for welded joint – no discontinuous surface (e.g. step) between the base metal and weld metal.
8.5.5.2.5 Test report
The test report shall include the following information:
.1 name of the manufacturer,
.2 date of test,
.3 chemical composition and corrosion resistant process of steel,
.4 test results according to 8.5.5.2.2 and 8.5.5.2.3,
.5 judgement according to 8.5.5.2.4.

Surface inspection, verification of dimensions of the finished products, as well as internal defects are
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
Final tests performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor do not absolve the manufacturer from this
responsibility.
Both sides of plates and other products shall be subjected to 100% visual inspection by the manufacturer.
Under thickness tolerances are not permitted. Dimension tolerances of sections shall fulfil the
requirements specified in the relevant standards.
Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding. The plate thickness after grinding, however, shall
not be less than the nominal thickness.
Repair of major defects is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case. PRS may require that the
product quality should be checked by non-destructive method, e.g. ultrasonic testing.
8.7 Marking
Products shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9 of this Part.
Inspection Certificate, in addition to the particulars required in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part, shall contain
the following information:
.1 for austenitic steels: the values of both Rp0.2 and Rp1.0,
.2 results of all the tests specified in the order.
Clad Steels 77
9 CLAD STEELS
The requirements specified in the present Chapter apply to clad steel plates used for construction of hull
and tanks intended for the carriage of chemicals.
Clad plate consists of a base material and a thinner layer (cladding material) on one or both sides,
continuously and integrally bonded. Joining shall be done by roll cladding, explosive bonding
or a combination of both.
The minimum thickness of the cladding metal shall be 1.5 mm, however it is subject to PRS acceptance
in each particular case.
Permissible dimension tolerances, the plate straightness, as well as permissible thickness tolerances
of the cladding metal shall fulfil the requirements specified in the relevant standards or in the accepted
order specifications.
Chemical composition of a base material intended for hull structural parts shall fulfil the requirements
for hull structural steels.
Chemical composition of a base material intended for tanks not forming structural part of hull is subject
to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Unless agreed otherwise, austenitic stainless steel complying with the requirements specified in Chapter
8 of this Part shall be used as the cladding metal.
PRS Surveyor may require that check analysis of chemical composition of both the base and cladding
materials should be performed.
Mechanical properties of clad plates tested on specimens taken from plates in the supply condition shall
fulfil the requirements for the base material.
Unless otherwise agreed, clad plates of austenitic stainless steel shall be supplied in normalized
condition.
9.5 Testing
9.5.1 Testing Conditions
If the base material is a hull structural steel, every fifth plate shall be tested and the following conditions
shall be fulfilled:
– base material shall be from the same heat,
– cladding material shall be of the same grade,
– nominal thickness of the plates shall be the same,
– plates shall be in the same condition of supply.
Where these conditions cannot be met or where the base material is the steel of Grade E, EH32, EH36
or EH40 or the steel intended for boilers – each strip of plate shall be tested prior to cutting it into sheets.
Location of test specimens shall be in accordance with the general provisions specified in the present Part
of the Rules for the base material.
The distance of the specimen from the flame or shear cut edge shall in no case be less than 25 mm.
9.5.2 Tensile Test
Tensile test shall be performed on a flat proportional specimen cut out from the hull thickness plate.
Tensile strength shall be specified in accordance with the formula below:
Rm1 ⋅ t1 + Rm2 ⋅ t2
Rm = [MPa] (9.5.2)
t1 + t2
where:
Rm1 – minimum tensile strength of base material, [MPa];
Rm2 – minimum tensile strength of cladding metal, [MPa];
t1 – thickness of base material, [mm];
t2 – thickness of cladding, [mm].
9.5.3 Shear Test

Shear test (checking the shear strength between the base and cladding materials) shall be performed on
one transverse specimen.
The testing procedure, as well as the specimen dimensions are shown in Fig. 9.5.3. Unless otherwise
agreed, the minimum shear strength shall be 140 MPa.
base material
cladding
Fig. 9.5.3
9.5.4 Bend Test

Bending test shall be performed on two transverse specimens.
The specimens shall be bent 180° around a former having the diameter:
D = 2 t for Rm ≤ 490 MPa,
D = 3 t for Rm > 490 MPa,
where: Rm – strength of base material.
One specimen shall be bent with base metal in tension; the other specimen – with the cladding in
tension.
9.5.5 Intergranular Corrosion Resistance Test
Unless otherwise agreed, intergranular corrosion resistance test shall be performed on a specimen taken
from each heat in accordance with the requirements of standard ASTM A 262 Practice E or other equivalent
standard, e.g. PN-EN ISO 3651-1, PN-EN ISO 3651-2.
9.5.6 Impact Test
If impact tests are required, a set consisting of three specimens shall be taken from the base material in
accordance with the requirements for base material specified in the present Part of the Rules.
9.5.7 Non-destructive Testing
To check the bonding, ultrasonic testing of each plate shall be made performed.
The area adjacent to the edges of each plate shall be checked 100% for a width of 50 mm. Further tests
shall be conducted at points equally distributed on the surface with max. intervals of 150 mm.
Approval criteria for clad plates are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Clad Steels 79

Both surfaces of the clad plates shall be even and clean, free from scabs, laps, scales, pitting, cracks,
skin holes, chamotting and visible traces of corrosion.
Small indentations after the scale dropping off, scratches, pitting and machining traces may be
permitted, provided their depth does not exceed the following:
– 0.2 mm: for the cladding surface,
– negative tolerance on the plate thickness – for base material surface.
Bonding defects 1) may be accepted without repair, provided that:
– any single bonding defect does not exceed 0.5 dm2,
– total area of bonding defects does not exceed 2% of the plate surface,
– defects do not impair the tank structural strength.
Bonding defects in the area adjacent to the edges of the plate for a width of 50 mm are not, in general,
permissible. However, if such defects occur, they may be repaired by welding. Details of the repair are
9.7 Marking
The material shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9 of this
Part.

In addition to the data required in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part, the following information shall be
included in the Inspection Certificate:
.1 cast number for both base material and cladding metal,
.2 product designation (e.g. CLAD PLATE 10x1250x3000 DH32 X6CrNiTi18-10),
.3 results of all tests agreed in the order.
1) According to standard PN-H-92140:1979, the term “bonding defects” means areas that are not bonded.
10 STEEL TUBES
The requirements specified in the present Chapter apply to hot-rolled steel tubes, cold-drawn or cold-
rolled steel tubes, as well as to the welded pipes intended for the manufacture of boilers, pressure vessels,
heat exchangers and the ship’s piping systems which are subject to PRS survey. Due to their application,
these may be either line pipes intended for service at elevated temperatures or structural tubes. Mechanical
properties at elevated temperatures have also been specified. The requirements for steels not mentioned in
the Rules are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
10.2 Manufacturing Techniques

Manufacturers of tubes shall be approved by PRS.
Steel tubes shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards or material specifications accepted
by PRS.
Seam tubes may be manufactured by welding or they may be electrically welded (induction or resistance
welding).

Chemical composition of steel intended for tubes determined on the basis of the ladle analysis shall
fulfil the requirements specified in Table 10.3. Steel for tubes shall be killed. The use of the semi-killed
steel is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Mechanical properties of steel tubes at the temperature of +20ºC and the yield point at elevated
temperatures determined on longitudinal specimens shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 10.4-1
and Table 10.4-2.
Mechanical properties of steel tubes with a wall thickness greater than specified in Table 10.4-2 and
the data concerning the creep limit and creep strength shall fulfil the requirements of standard PN-EN
10216-2.
Steel Tubes 81
Table 10.3
Chemical composition (ladle analysis) of steel for tubes as mass percentage
V
Steel grade 1) C Si Mn P max S max Cr Mo Ni Al total Cu Nb Ti max Others
max
Line pipes
P195TR1 ≤0.13 ≤0.35 ≤0.70 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.30 – ≤0.30 ≤0.01 0.04 0.02 –
P235TR1 ≤0.16 ≤0.35 ≤1.20 0.025 0.02 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.30 – ≤0.30 ≤0.01 0.04 0.02 –
P265TR1 ≤0.20 ≤0.40 ≤1.40 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.30 – ≤0.30 ≤0.01 0.04 0.02 –
Pipes for service at elevated temperatures
P195GH ≤0.13 ≤0.35 ≤0.70 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.30 ≤0.02 ≤0.30 ≤0.01 0.04 0.02 –
P235GH ≤0.16 ≤0.35 ≤1.20 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.30 ≤0.02 ≤0.30 ≤0.01 0.04 0.02 –
P265GH ≤0.20 ≤0.040 ≤1.40 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 ≤0.08 ≤0.30 ≤0.02 ≤0.30 ≤0.01 0.04 0.02 –
20MnNb6 ≤0.22 0.15÷0.35 1.00÷1.50 0.025 0.020 – – – ≤0.06 ≤0.30 0.015÷0.10 – – –
16Mo3 0.12÷0.20 ≤0.35 0.40÷0.90 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 0.25÷0.35 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
8MoB5-4 0.06÷0.10 0.10÷0.35 0.60÷0.80 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 0.40÷0.50 – ≤0.06 ≤0.30 – 0.06 – B = 0.002
÷0.006
14MoV6-3 0.10÷0.15 0.15÷0.35 0.40÷0.70 0.025 0.020 0.30÷0.60 0.50÷0.70 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – 0.22÷0.28 –
10CrMo5-5 ≤0.15 0.50÷1.00 0.30÷0.60 0.025 0.020 1.00÷1.50 0.45÷0.65 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
13CrMo4-5 0.10÷0.17 ≤0.35 0.40÷0.70 0.025 0.020 0.70÷1.15 0.40÷0.60 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
10CrMo9-10 0.08÷0.14 ≤0.50 0.30÷0.70 0.025 0.020 2.00÷2.50 0.90÷1.10 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
11CrMo9-10 0.08÷0.15 ≤0.50 0.40÷0.80 0.025 0.020 2.00÷2.50 0.90÷1.10 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
25CrMo4 0.22÷0.29 ≤0.40 0.60÷0.90 0.025 0.020 0.90÷1.20 0.15÷0.30 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
20CrMoV13-5-5 0.17÷0.23 0.15÷0.35 0.30÷0.50 0.025 0.020 3.00÷3.30 0.50÷0.60 ≤0.30 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – 0.45÷0.55 –
15NiCuMoNb5-6-4 ≤0.17 0.25÷0.50 0.80÷1.20 0.025 0.020 ≤0.30 0.25÷0.50 1.00÷1.30 ≤0.05 0.50÷0.80 0.015÷0.045 – – –
X11CrMo5 0.08÷0.15 0.15÷0.50 0.30÷0.60 0.025 0.020 4.00÷6.00 0.45÷0.65 – ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
X11CrMo9-1 0.08÷0.15 0.25÷1.00 0.30÷0.60 0.025 0.020 8.0÷10.0 0.90÷1.10 – ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – – –
X10CrMoVNb9-1 0.08÷0.12 0.20÷0.50 0.30÷0.60 0.020 0.010 8.0÷9.50 0.80÷1.05 ≤0.40 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 0.06÷0.10 – 0.18÷0.25 N=0.03÷
0.07
X20CrMoV11-1 0.17÷0.23 0.15÷0.50 ≤1.00 0.025 0.050 10.0÷12.5 0.80÷1.20 0.30÷0.80 ≤0.04 ≤0.30 – – 0.25÷0.35 –
Structural tubes
Hull steels See Chapter 3 of this Part
Table 10.4-1
Mechanical properties of steel tubes
Tensile test at ambient temperature Impact test
Re or Rp0.2 for wall thicknesses A min.
Impact energy KV [J] min. at temperature ºC
Steel grade 1) t min. [MPa] Rm [%]
[MPa] L T
t ≤ 16 16 < t ≤ 40 40 < t ≤ 60 L T
20 0 –10 20 0
Line pipes
P195TR1 195 185 175 320÷440 27 25 – – – – –
P235TR1 235 225 215 360÷500 25 23 – – – – –
P265TR1 265 255 245 410÷570 21 19 – – – – –
Pipes for service at elevated temperatures
P195GH 195 – – 320÷440 27 25 – 40 28 – 27
P235GH 235 225 215 360÷500 25 23 – 40 28 – 27
P265GH 265 255 245 410÷570 23 21 – 40 28 – 27
20MnNb6 355 345 335 500÷650 22 20 – 40 – – 27
16Mo3 280 270 260 450÷600 22 20 40 – – 27 –
8MoB5-4 400 – – 540÷690 19 17 40 – – 27 –
14MoV6-3 320 320 310 460÷610 20 18 40 – – 27 –
10CrMo5-5 275 275 265 410÷560 22 20 40 – – 27 –
13CrMo4-5 290 290 280 440÷590 22 20 40 – – 27 –
10CrMo9-10 280 280 270 480÷630 22 20 40 – – 27 –
11CrMo9-10 355 355 355 540÷680 20 18 40 – – 27 –
25CrMo4 345 345 345 540÷690 18 15 40 – – 27 –
20CrMoV13-5-5 590 590 590 740÷880 16 14 40 – – 27 –
15NiCuMoNb5-6-4 440 440 440 610÷780 19 17 40 – – 27 –
X11CrMo5+I 175 175 175 430÷580 22 20 40 – – 27 –
X11CrMo5+NT1 280 280 280 480÷640 20 18 40 – – 27 –
X11CrMo5+NT2 390 390 390 570÷740 18 16 40 – – 27 –
X11CrMo9-1+I 210 210 210 460÷640 20 18 40 – – 27 –
X11CrMo9-1+NT 390 390 390 590 ÷740 18 16 40 – – 27 –
X10CrMoVNb9-1 450 450 450 630÷830 19 17 40 – – 27 –
X20CrMoN11-1 490 490 490 690÷840 17 14 40 – – 27 –
Structural tubes
Hull steels See Chapter 3 of this Part
Steel Tubes 83
Table 10.4-2
Minimum proof stress Rp0.2 at elevated temperature
Wall thickness Minimum proof stress Rp0.2 [MPa] at temperature ºC

Steel grade
[mm] 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
P195GH ≤16 175 165 150 130 113 102 94 – – – –
P235GH ≤60 198 187 170 150 132 120 112 108 – – –
P265GH ≤60 226 213 192 171 154 141 134 128 – – –
20MnNb6 ≤60 312 292 264 241 219 200 186 174 – – –
16Mo3 ≤60 243 237 224 205 173 159 156 150 146 – –
8MoB5-4 ≤16 368 368 368 368 368 368 368 – – – –
14MoV6-3 ≤60 282 276 267 241 225 216 209 203 200 197 –
10CrMo5-5 ≤60 240 228 219 208 165 156 148 144 143 – –
13CrMo4-5 ≤60 264 253 245 236 192 182 174 168 166 – –
10CrMo9-10 ≤60 249 241 234 224 219 212 207 193 180 – –
11CrMo9-10 ≤60 323 312 304 296 289 280 275 257 239 – –
25CrMo4 ≤60 – 315 305 295 285 265 225 185 – – –
20CrMoV13-5-5 ≤60 – 575 570 560 550 510 470 420 370 – –
15NiCuMoNb5-6-4 ≤80 422 412 402 392 382 373 343 304 – – –
X11CrMo5+I ≤100 156 150 148 147 145 142 137 129 116 – –
X11CrMo5+NT1 ≤100 245 237 230 223 216 206 196 181 167 – –
X11CrMo5+NT2 ≤100 366 350 334 332 309 299 289 280 265 – –
X11CrMo9-1+I ≤60 187 186 178 177 175 171 164 153 142 120 –
X11CrMo9-1+NT ≤60 363 348 334 330 326 322 316 311 290 235 –
X10CrMoVNb9-1 ≤100 410 395 380 370 360 350 340 320 300 270 215
X20CrMoV11-1 ≤100 – – 430 415 390 380 360 330 290 250 –
Steel Tubes 81

Tubes shall be heat treated if required by other Parts of the Rules, standards or documentation approved
by PRS. Cold-rolled tubes or cold-drawn tubes, as well as tubes electrically welded shall be submitted to
normalising, normalising and tempering or quenching and tempering. Supply condition shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 10.5. The heat treatment details are established by the manufacturer,
reported to PRS and entered in the Inspection Certificate.
Table 10.5
Supply condition for tube steels
Steel grade Supply condition
P195TR1, P235TR1, P265TR1 AR
P195TR1, P235TR1, P265TR1, P195GH, P235GH, P265GH, 20MnNb6, 16Mo3, 8MoB5-4 N
14MoV6-3, 10CrMo5-5, 13CrMo4-5, 10CrMo9-10, 15NiCuMoNb5-6-4, X11CrMo5+NT1, NT
X11CrMo5+NT2, X11CrMo9-1+NT, X10CrMoVNb9-1, X20CrMoV11-1
X11CrMo5+I, X11CrMo9-1+I I
11CrMo9-10, 25CrMo4, 20CrMoV13-5-5 QT
10.6 Testing
10.6.1 Tubes shall be tested in batches. Tubes of the same external diameter and the same wall thickness,
of the same cast and submitted to the same heat treatment are regarded as a batch.
10.6.2 The number of tubes in a batch shall not exceed:
– 400 pieces – with the diameter not greater than 76 mm,
– 200 pieces – with the diameter greater than 76 mm.
When the number of the remaining tubes is less than the half of the amount given above, they shall be
considered as the same batch. When the number is greater than the half of the given amount, the tubes shall
be considered as a separate batch.
10.6.3 Each batch of tube shall be submitted to the following tests:
– tensile test (to determine Re, Rm and A – in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter
2.5 of this Part),
– tensile test at elevated temperature (to determine Ret ),
– impact test (in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.6 of this Part),
– flattening test (in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.11.1 of this Part) or ring
tensile test (in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.11.3 of this Part),
– drift expanding test (in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.11.2 of this Part).
10.6.4 To perform the required tests, the following test specimens shall be cut from each sample:
– one specimen for the tensile test,
– three specimens for the impact test (for wall thicknesses t ≥ 12 mm),
– one specimen for the flattening test or ring tensile test (two specimens in the case of welded tubes; the
weld of one of the specimens shall be in the zone of bending during testing),
– one specimen for the drift expanding test.
Unless provided otherwise, samples shall be cut from one end of at least two tubes taken from a batch.
10.6.5 Tensile test at elevated temperature, impact test, flattening test, ring tensile test or drift expanding
test shall be performed if provided by the relevant standards or material specifications – subject to PRS
acceptance in each particular case – according to which evaluation of the performed tests results is done.
10.6.6 All tubes shall to be tested for tightness by hydraulic test. The value of the test pressure shall be
assumed in accordance with the standards or the documentation approved by PRS.
Subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case, hydraulic test need not be performed, provided all
tubes are submitted to ultrasonic or other non-destructive testing.
All joints of welded pipes shall be submitted to ultrasonic testing.

Surface inspection and verification of dimensions is the responsibility of the tube manufacturer. The
issue, by PRS, of the Inspection Certificate does not absolve the manufacturer from this responsibility.
Tubes are subject to visual examination and dimensional control for compliance with the relevant
standards.
Each tube shall be subjected to visual examination. The surface of the pipes and tubes shall be free from
such defects as cracks, pulls and laps.
Single minor cuts, indentations, scratches, thin film of scale and shallow flakes are acceptable, provided they
are within the specified dimension tolerances of a product.
10.8 Marking
Steel pipes and tubes shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9
of this Part.
In addition to the data required in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part, the following information shall be
included in the Inspection Certificate:
.1 toughness test results,
.2 hydraulic test results,
.3 non-destructive test results (if applicable),
.4 results of other tests agreed in the order,
.5 heat treatment parameters (if applicable).
Rolled Steels for Anchor Chain Cables 83
11 ROLLED STEELS FOR ANCHOR CHAIN CABLES

The requirements of the present Chapter apply to rolled steel used for the manufacture of anchor chain
cables and accessories which are subject to PRS survey. Grade 2 and Grade 3 materials are subject to PRS
survey.
11.2 Manufacturing Procedures
11.2.1 Materials used for the manufacture of anchor chain cables and accessories shall be supplied by
the manufacturers approved by PRS. PRS approval is not required for Grade 1 steel bars. PRS may require
mechanical testing of the rolled bars at the steel mill in a heat treatment condition equivalent to that of the
finished chain cable. In such cases the properties shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 20.3.5 of
this Part.
11.2.2 Materials suppliers or chain cable manufacturers shall submit specification for Grade 3 steel bars.
These specifications shall contain all the necessary details, such as manufacturing procedure, deoxidation
practice, specified chemical composition, heat treatment, and mechanical properties for each batch of bars
and shall be indicated in the Inspection Certificate.

Unless otherwise specified, rolled steel bars for chain cables may be supplied in as rolled condition.
Chemical composition, determined on the basis of the ladle analysis, shall fulfil the requirements
specified in Table 11.4. The steel shall be cast in killed condition.
Table 11.4
Chemical composition of rolled steel bars
Grade C P S Al total1)
Si Mn
max max max min.
1 0.20 0.15÷0.35 min. 0.40 0.040 0.040 –
22) 0.24 0.15÷0.55 max 1.60 0.035 0.035 0.020
33) Subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case
Notes:
1) Aluminium may be replaced partly or fully by other grain refining elements.
2) Other alloying elements may be added subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
3) Killed fine grain steel.
11.5 Mechanical Tests

11.5.1 Mechanical properties representing steel bars for chain cables and accessories shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 11.5.1. The test coupons shall be in a heat treatment condition equivalent
to that of the finished chain cable and accessories (see paragraph 20.3.5 of this Part).
Table 11.5.1
Mechanical properties of steel for chains
Tensile test Impact test
Grade Re [MPa] Rm A [%] Z [%] Test temperature KV 1) [J]
min. [MPa] min. min. [°C] min.
1 – 370÷490 25 – – –
2 295 490÷690 22 – 0 272)
3 410 min. 690 17 40 03) 60
–203) 35
Notes:
1) Average value from 3 test specimens. One individual value only may be below the specified average value provided it is
not less than 70% of that value.

2) The impact test of Grade 2 may be waived, if the chain cable is supplied in heat treated condition as per Table 20.3.5
of This Part.
3) Testing shall be normally performed at 0°C.
11.5.2 For performance of the mechanical tests, the steel bars shall be sorted according to heats and
diameters – not varying by more than 4 mm – into test units not exceeding 50 tonnes each. Tensile test
specimens and Charpy V-notch impact test specimens (if applicable) shall be taken from the test sample.
Details of the heat treatment shall be indicated by the chain cable manufacturer.
11.5.3 Tensile and Charpy V-notch impact test specimens shall be taken from the test sample in the
longitudinal direction at a distance of 1/6 diameter from the surface or as close as possible to this position,
as shown in Fig. 11.5.3.
impact test specimen
tensile test specimen
Fig. 11.5.3. Sampling locations for tensile and impact tests
11.5.4 Mechanical tests and retests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in
Chapter 2 of this Part.
Unless agreed otherwise, the diameter and roundness shall be within the tolerances specified in Table
11.6. The diameter tolerances of bar stock may be positive only.
Table 11.6
Dimension tolerances of bar stock
Roundness tolerances (dmax – dmin)
Nominal diameter [mm] Diameter tolerances [mm]
[mm]
less than 25 mm +1.0 0.6
25÷35 +1.2 0.8
36÷50 +1.6 1.1
51÷80 +2.0 1.5
81÷100 +2.6 1.95
101÷120 +3.0 2.25
121÷160 +4.0 3.0
11.7 Freedom from Defects

The materials shall be free from internal and surface defects that might impair proper workability and
use.
Minor surface defects may be repaired by grinding, provided the admissible tolerances are not
exceeded.
Rolled Steels for Anchor Chain Cables 85
11.8 Marking
The minimum markings required for the steel bars are the manufacturers' brandmark, the steel grade
and an abbreviated symbol of the heat.
Steel bars for chain cables shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter
1.9 of this Part.
For bar material for Grade 2 or Grade 3, PRS issues the Inspection Certificate in accordance with the
requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part.
12 STEEL FORGINGS
12.1.1 Steel forgings which are subject to PRS survey in compliance with the requirements specified in
the relevant Parts of the Rules shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the following
requirements.
12.1.2 The requirements specified in this Chapter apply to steel forgings intended for hull and machinery
applications where the design and acceptance tests are related to mechanical properties at the temperature
of +20ºC.
12.1.3 These requirements also apply to billets, blooms and rolled bars of the diameter not exceeding
250 mm as substitutes for forgings used for the manufacture, by machining, of shafts, bolts, etc., and other
components of simple shape.
12.1.4 The requirements for forgings intended for service at low or elevated temperatures and for special
steel forgings (stainless, acid-resistant, heat-resistant, etc.) are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular
case.
12.1.5 Where small and identical forgings are produced in large runs, the manufacturer may adopt
alternative procedures for testing and inspection subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
12.2 Manufacturing Procedure
12.2.1 Forgings shall be made at a manufacturer approved by PRS.
12.2.2 Steel used in the manufacture of forgings shall be made by a process approved by PRS.
12.2.3 Adequate top and bottom discards shall be made to ensure freedom from piping and harmful
segregations in the finished forgings.
12.2.4 The reduction ratio of the forgings shall be such as to ensure soundness, uniformity of structure
and satisfactory mechanical properties after heat treatment, and shall not be less than that specified in Table
12.2.4.
Table 12.2.4
Method of manufacture Total reduction ratio
3 : 1 where L > D
Made directly from ingots or from forged blooms, or billets
1.5 : 1 where L ≤ D
4 : 1 where L > D
Made from rolled products
2 : 1 where L ≤ D
Notes:
1. L, D – forging length and diameter, respectively.
2. The reduction ratio shall be calculated with reference to the average cross-sectional area of the ingot. Where an ingot is initially
upset, this reference area may be taken as the average cross-sectional area after this operation.
3. For rolled bars used as substitutes for forgings, the reduction ratio shall be at least 6 : l.
4. For forgings made by upsetting, the length after upsetting shall not be more than one-third of the length before upsetting or –
in the case of an initial forging reduction of at least 1.5 : 1 – no more than one-half of the length before upsetting.
Where disc type forgings (e.g. gear wheels) are made by upsetting, the thickness of any part of the disc
shall not be greater than one half of the length of the billet from which it was formed, provided this billet
has received an initial forging reduction of not less than 1.5:1.
Where the piece used has been cut directly from an ingot or where the billet has received an initial
reduction of less than 1.5:1, the thickness of any part of the disc shall not be greater than one third of the
length of the original piece.
Rings and other types of hollow forgings shall be made from pieces cut from ingots or billets and which
have been suitably punched. Alternatively, pieces from hollow cast ingots may be used. The wall thickness
Steel Forgings 87
of the forging shall not be greater than one half of the thickness of the prepared hollow piece from which
it was formed. In other cases, the forging procedure shall be such as to ensure that adequate work is given
to the piece prior to punching. This may be either longitudinal or upset working of not less than 2:1 of the
reduction ratio.
12.2.5 For certain components, where grain flow is required in the most favourable direction having
regard to the mode of stressing in service, the proposed method of manufacture shall be approved by PRS
and tests may be required to demonstrate that a satisfactory structure and grain flow are obtained.
12.2.6 Unless agreed otherwise, shaping of forgings or rolled slabs and billets by flame cutting, scarfing
or arc-air gouging shall be performed before the final heat treatment. Pre-heating may be required by PRS
when necessitated by the chemical composition and thickness of the forging.
12.2.7 Where two or more forgings are joined by welding to form a composite component, details of the
proposed procedure are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case. In that case, PRS may require
that appropriate weldability tests should be performed.
12.3 Quality of Forgings
Each forging shall be free from surface or internal defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
application in service.
12.4.1 Forgings shall be made from killed steel and the chemical composition shall be appropriate for
the type of steel, dimensions and required mechanical properties of the forgings being manufactured.
12.4.2 Chemical composition of each heat shall be determined by the manufacturer on a sample taken
preferably during the pouring of the heat. When multiple heats are tapped into a common ladle, the ladle
analysis shall apply.
12.4.3 Chemical composition determined by ladle analysis shall comply with the overall limits specified
in Table 12.4.3-1 and Table 12.4.3-2. At the option of the manufacturer, suitable grain refining elements
such as aluminium, niobium or vanadium may be added. The content of each of such elements shall be
included in the Inspection Certificate.
12.4.4 Elements designated as residual elements in the individual specifications shall not be
intentionally added to steel. The content of such elements shall be included in the Inspection Certificate.
Table 12.4.3-1
Chemical composition limits 1) for hull steel forgings 6)
Steel Total
type C Si P S Cr Mo Ni Cu 4)
Mn residuals
max. max. max. max. max. max. max. max.
max.
Unalloyed 0.232),3) 0.45 0.30÷1.50 0.035 0.035 0.304) 0.154) 0.404) 0.30 0.85
5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
Alloy 0.45 0.035 0.035 0.30 –
1) Composition in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range.
2) Carbon content may be increased above this level provided that the carbon equivalent CEV is not more than 0.41% calculated
in accordance with the following formula:
CEV = C+ + + [%]
6 5 15
3) Carbon content for unalloyed steel forgings not intended for welded construction may be 0.65% maximum.
4) Elements are considered as residual elements.
5) Specification is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
6) Rudder stocks and pintles shall be of weldable quality.
Table 12.4.3-2
Chemical composition limits1) for machinery steel forgings
Steel type Total
C Si P S Cu 3)
Mn Cr Mo Ni residuals
max. max. max. max. max.
max.
max. max. max.
Unalloyed 0.652) 0.45 0.30÷1.50 0.035 0.035 0.30 0.85
0.303) 0.153) 0.403)
min min min
Alloy4) 0.45 0.45 0.30÷1.00 0.035 0.035 0.30 –
0.405) 0.155) 0.405)
2)
Carbon content for unalloyed steel forgings intended for welded construction shall be 0.23% maximum. Carbon content may
be increased above this level, provided that the carbon equivalent CEV is not more than 0.41%.
3)
Elements are considered as residual elements unless shown as a minimum.
4) Where alloy steel forgings are intended for welded constructions, the proposed chemical composition is subject to PRS
5) One or more of the elements shall fulfil the minimum content requirement.

12.5.1 Forgings shall be suitably heat treated to refine the grain structure and to obtain the required
mechanical properties. The heat treatment may be as follows:
– full annealing,
– normalising,
– normalising and tempering,
– quenching and tempering.
Alloy steel forgings shall be delivered in the as quenched and tempered condition. For all types of steel
(except for case-carburising steels) the tempering temperature shall not be less than 550°C. Where forgings
for gearing are not intended for surface hardening, lower tempering temperature may be allowed.
12.5.2 Where alloy steel forgings are supplied in the as normalised and tempered condition, mechanical
properties are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
12.5.3 Heat treatment shall be performed in properly constructed furnaces which have adequate means
for control and recording of temperature. The furnace dimensions shall be such as to allow the whole
furnace charge to be uniformly heated to the necessary temperature. In the case of very large forgings,
alternative methods of heat treatment are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
12.5.4 Heat treatment conditions shall be determined by the manufacturer having regard to chemical
composition of steel, purpose and size of the forging, taking into account the following conditions:
– adequate number of thermocouples shall be included in the furnace charge for measurement and
recording of the temperature distribution and its evenness,
– if a forging is subsequently heated for further hot working, it shall be re-heat treated,
– where forgings shall be surface hardened, the details of the procedure shall be agreed with PRS. In that
case, PRS may require to demonstrate by test that the proposed procedure ensures a uniform surface
layer of the required hardness and depth,
– where induction hardening, nitriding or carburizing will be performed after machining, forgings shall
be heat treated at an appropriate stage (e.g. in the case of carburized products – full annealing
or normalizing and tempering) to a condition suitable for subsequent machining and hardening,
– if any straightening operation is performed after the final heat treatment, consideration shall be given
to a subsequent stress relieving heat treatment to avoid the possibility of harmful residual stresses,
– forging shop shall maintain records of heat treatment containing the data about the furnaces used, date,
temperature and hold time; the records shall be presented to the PRS surveyor on request.
Steel Forgings 89
12.6.1 Forgings shall be submitted for acceptance individually or as a batch.

12.6.2 Where a number of small forgings of about the same size and mass are made from one cast and
are heat treated in the same furnace charge, batch testing procedures may be adopted using one of the
forgings for the test purposes or alternatively using separately forged test samples. These test samples shall
have a reduction ratio similar to that used for the forgings which they represent. They shall be properly
identified and heat treated along with the forgings. In such cases, at least one set of specimens shall be
taken from each batch.
12.6.3 The size of a test sample shall be sufficient for the required tests and for possible re-tests. The
cross-section of the test sample shall not be less than that of the forging which it represents. Except for
special cases, the test samples shall be integral with forgings. Separately forged test material shall have
a reduction ratio similar to that used for the forgings represented.
12.6.4 The set of test specimens shall consist of one tensile and, subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case, three impact test specimens. Impact tests shall be performed where:
– it is stated in the order specifications,
– forging is intended for the propeller shaft with ice class notation (see Note 2 to Table 12.7.1-2 in this
Part).
12.6.5 Test specimens shall be cut with their axes either mainly parallel or mainly tangential to the
principal axial direction of each product. As far as possible, the specimens shall be so located that the
distance from the surface of the forging to the nearest surface of the specimen be not less than 10 per cent
of the diameter or thickness of the forging.
12.6.6 Unless otherwise agreed, the longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be positioned as
follows:
.1 for thickness or diameter up to 50 mm, the axis shall be at the mid-thickness or the centre of the
cross section,
.2 for thickness or diameter greater than 50 mm, the axis shall be at one quarter thickness (mid-radius)
or 80 mm, whichever is lesser, below any heat treated surface.
12.6.7 In sub-paragraphs .1 to .8 below, the examples of typical forgings, as well as the number and
position of the specimens for acceptance tests, are given; these requirements do not apply to the forgings
described in paragraph 12.6.12.
For the purpose of the present Chapter, transverse specimens, tangential specimens and radial
specimens are considered as transverse specimens.
.1 Forgings for shafts, rudderstocks, pins and connecting-rods, etc., of longitudinal shape
From each forging, one set of specimens shall be taken in a longitudinal direction, as shown in
Figures 12.6.7.1-1, 12.6.7.1-2 or 12.6.7.1-3 in A position. Subject to PRS Surveyor’s consent, a
set of specimens may be taken in a transverse direction, according to positions B, C or D, except
for the specimens taken as shown in Fig 12.6.7.1-2, position B, which shall be considered
longitudinal.
Note: Where the mass of the forging exceeds 4 tonnes and the length exceeds 3000 mm, one set of specimens shall be
taken from each end (the mass and the length of the forging in the as forged condition, excluding the test material).
A
B
Fig. 12.6.7.1-1
B(through hole pod

(przez otwór śrubę)
for bolt)
Fig. 12.6.7.1-2
B
C
Fig. 12.6.7.1-3
.2 Pinions
Where the finished machined diameter of the toothed portion exceeds 200 mm, one set
of specimens shall be taken from each forging in a transverse direction adjacent to the toothed
portion, in accordance with Fig. 12.6.7.2, test position B or test position C when the dimensions
of the forging do not permit the preparation of test from position B. From the pinions of a diameter
not exceeding 200 mm, one set of specimens shall be taken in a longitudinal direction, as shown
in Fig. 12.6.7.2 – position A.
Where the finished length of the toothed portion exceeds 1250 mm, one set of specimens shall
be taken from each end.
Fig. 12.6.7.2
.3 Gear wheels
One set of specimens shall be taken from each forging in a transverse direction, as shown in
Fig.12.6.7.3 – position A or B.
A
Fig. 12.6.7.3
.4 Gear wheel rims (made by expanding)

One set of specimens shall be taken in a longitudinal direction from each forging, as shown in
Fig. 12.6.7.4 – position A. Where the finished diameter exceeds 2500 mm or the mass of the
forging exceeds 3 tonnes (“as forged”, excluding test material), two set of specimens shall be taken
from diametrically opposite positions, as shown in Fig.12.6.7.4 – position A and B.
Steel Forgings 91
Fig. 12.6.7.4
.5 Pinion sleeves
One set of specimens shall be taken from each forging in a transverse direction, as shown in
Fig. 12.6.7.5 – position A or B. Where the finished length exceeds 1250 mm, one set of specimens
shall be taken from each end.
A B
Fig. 12.6.7.5
.6 Crankwebs
One set of specimens shall be taken from each forging in a transverse direction (the test position
is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case).
.7 Solid forged crankshafts
One set of specimens shall be taken in a longitudinal direction from the coupling end, as shown
in Fig. 12.6.7.7 – position A. Where the mass of the forging exceeds 3 tonnes (“as forged”,
excluding test material), specimens in a longitudinal direction shall be taken from each end
(positions A and B).
Where the crankthrows are formed by machining or flame cutting, the second set of specimens
shall be taken in a transverse direction from the material removed from the crankthrow (position C).
A B
C
Fig. 12.6.7.7
.8 Combined web and pin crankshaft forgings and other forgings

The number and position of specimens are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
12.6.8 For die forgings and crankshaft forgings where the method of manufacture has been specially
approved in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 12.2.7, the number and position of
test specimens shall be agreed with PRS, having regard to the method of manufacture employed.
12.6.9 Where a forging is subsequently divided into a number of components, all of which are heat
treated together in the same furnace charge, for the test purposes this may be regarded as one forging and
the number of tests required shall be related to the total length and mass of the original multiple forging.
12.6.10 Except for components which will be carburised or other components agreed with PRS, the test
material shall not be cut from a forging until all heat treatment has been complete.
12.6.11 Unless otherwise agreed with PRS, where forgings are intended to be carburised, sufficient
material shall be provided (at locations specified in paragraph 12.6.7) for both preliminary tests at the
forge and for final tests after completion of carburising. In that case, irrespective of the dimensions and
mass of the forging, test specimens are required from one position only.
This test material shall be machined to a diameter of D/4 or 60 mm, whichever is less, where D is the
finished diameter of the toothed portion.
At the orderer’s request, for preliminary tests at the forge, one set of test material shall be given a blank
carburizing and heat treatment cycle simulating that which subsequently will be applied to the forging.
For final acceptance tests, the second set of test material shall be blank carburized and heat treated along
with the forgings which they represent.
At the discretion of the forgemaster or gear manufacturer test samples of larger cross section may be
either carburized or blank carburized, but these shall be machined to the required diameter prior to the final
quenching and tempering heat treatment.
Alternative procedures for testing of forgings which will be carburized and position of test specimens
in the forgings not mentioned in paragraphs from 12.6.7.1 to 12.6.7.8 are subject to PRS acceptance in
each particular case.
12.6.12 Normalized forgings with mass up to 1000 kg each and quenched and tempered forgings with
mass up to 500 kg each may be batch tested. A batch shall consist of forgings of similar shape and
dimensions, made from the same heat of steel, heat treated in the same furnace charge and with a total
mass not exceeding 6 tonnes for normalized forgings and 3 tonnes for quenched and tempered forgings,
respectively.
12.6.13 A batch testing procedure may also be applied for hot rolled bars with a diameter not exceeding
250 mm used instead of forgings.
A batch consists of:
– material from the same rolled ingot or bloom, provided that where this is cut into individual lengths,
these are all heat treated in the same furnace charge, or
– bars of the same diameter and heat, heat treated in the same furnace charge and with a total mass not
exceeding 2.5 tonnes.
12.6.14 Preparation of test specimens and the procedures used for mechanical testing shall fulfil the
relevant requirements specified in Chapter 2 of this Part. Unless otherwise agreed, all tests shall be
performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor.
12.7.1 The minimum requirements for yield stress, elongation, reduction of area and impact energy values
of alloy steel and unalloyed steel forgings are specified in Table 12.7.1-1 and Table 12.7.1-2. Where a steel
with a specified minimum tensile strength intermediate to those given is intended to be used, the
corresponding minimum values for other properties may be obtained by interpolation. Mechanical properties
shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 12.7.1-1 and Table 12.7.1-2 appropriate to the specified
minimum tensile strength or, where applicable, the requirements of the approved specification.
Table 12.7.1-1
Mechanical properties of hull steel forgings
Steel Rm min 1) Re min A min [%] Z min [%]
grade [MPa] [MPa] L T L T
400 200 26 19 50 35
440 220 24 18 50 35
480 240 22 16 45 30
Unalloyed
520 260 21 15 45 30
560 280 20 14 40 27
600 300 18 13 40 27
550 350 20 14 50 35
Alloy 600 400 18 13 50 35
650 450 17 12 50 35
Steel Forgings 93
1) The following ranges for tensile strength may be additionally specified:

specified minimum tensile strength: < 600 MPa ≥ 600 MPa
tensile strength range: 120 MPa 150 MPa
Table 12.7.1-2
Mechanical properties of machinery steel forgings 2)
Steel Rm min 1) Re min A min [%] Z min [%] Hardness 3)
grade [MPa] [MPa] L T L T (Brinell)
400 200 26 19 50 35 110-150
440 220 24 18 50 35 125-160
480 240 22 16 45 30 135-175
520 260 21 15 45 30 150-185
560 280 20 14 40 27 160-200
Unalloyed
600 300 18 13 40 27 175-215
640 320 17 12 40 27 185-230
680 340 16 12 35 24 200-240
720 360 15 11 35 24 210-250
760 380 14 10 35 24 225-265
600 360 18 14 50 35 175-215
700 420 16 12 45 30 205-245
800 480 14 10 40 27 235-275
Alloy
900 630 13 9 40 27 260-320
1000 700 12 8 35 24 290-365
1100 770 11 7 35 24 320-385
1) The following ranges for tensile strength values may be additionally specified:
specified minimum tensile strength: < 900 MPa ≥ 900 MPa
tensile strength range: 150 MPa 200 MPa.
2) For propeller shafts intended for ships with ice class notation, except the lowest one, Charpy V-notch impact testing shall be
performed for all steel types at –10oC, and the average energy value shall be minimum 27 J (longitudinal test). One individual
value may be less than the required average value provided that it is not less than 70% of this average value.
3) The hardness values are typical and are given for information purposes only.
12.7.2 PRS requires that hardness tests be performed for forgings in accordance with the following:
– for gear forgings: after completion of heat treatment and prior to gear teeth machining, hardness shall
be determined at four positions equally spaced around the circumference of the surface where the teeth
will be subsequently cut; where the finished diameter of the toothed portion exceeds 2500 mm, the
above number of test positions shall be increased to eight; where the width of a gear wheel rim forging
exceeds 1250 mm, hardness shall be determined at eight positions at each end of the forging;
– for small crankshaft and gear forgings which have been batch-tested, at least one hardness test shall be
performed on each forging;
– for forgings which have been induction hardened, nitrided or carburised: the results of hardness tests
shall fulfil the requirements of the approved specifications.
12.7.3 Where the tensile test results fail to fulfil the requirements of the Rules, re-tests shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.3 of this Part.
12.7.4 The additional tests mentioned in paragraph 12.7.3 shall be performed on specimens taken,
preferably, from the material adjacent to the original specimens, but from another test position or sample
representative of the forging or batch of forgings.
12.7.5 At the option of the manufacturer, where a forging or a batch of forgings has failed to meet the
test requirements of the Rules, it may be reheat treated and re-submitted for acceptance tests.

12.8.1 Before acceptance, all forgings shall be presented to PRS Surveyor for visual examination.
Where applicable, this shall include the examination of internal surfaces and bores. Unless otherwise
agreed, the verification of dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
12.8.2 Where required by the Rules or by an approved procedure for welded composite components (see
paragraph 12.2.7), appropriate non-destructive testing shall also be performed before acceptance and the
results shall be reported by the manufacturer. The principles and requirements for non-destructive testing are
specified in Publication 70/P – Non-destructive Testing of Hull and Machinery Steel Forgings.
12.8.3 The extent of testing and acceptance criteria are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular
case.
12.8.4 When required by the conditions of approval for surface hardened forgings, additional test
samples shall be processed at the same time as the forgings which they represent. These test samples shall
be subsequently sectioned in order to determine the hardness, shape and depth of the locally hardened zone
which shall fulfil the requirements of the approved specification.
12.8.5 In the event of any forging proving defective during subsequent machining or testing, it shall be
rejected notwithstanding any previous certification.
12.9 Rectification of Defective Forgings
12.9.1 Surface imperfections may be accepted, provided they are within the limits of machining
allowance. Slight surface imperfections found during visual inspections or non-destructive tests may be
removed by grinding or by chipping and grinding. Complete elimination of the defective material shall be
verified by magnetic particle testing or liquid penetrant testing.
12.9.2 Basically, repair welding of forgings with only minor defects may be permitted in areas of low
working stresses. The repair procedure and the method of testing are subject to prior acceptance of PRS in
each particular case. The areas to be repaired and the testing results shall be indicated in a drawing or sketch
of the forging.
12.9.3 Defects may be removed provided the component dimensions are acceptable. The resulting
grooves shall have a bottom radius of approximately three times the groove depth and shall be blended
into the surrounding surface so as to avoid any sharp contours.
12.9.4 The forging manufacturer shall maintain records of repairs and subsequent inspections traceable
to each forging repaired. The records shall be presented to PRS Surveyor on request.
12.10 Identification of Forgings
The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification which will enable all finished forgings to be
traced to the original cast and the Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing the forgings when
required.
Where small forgings are manufactured in large numbers, modified arrangements for identification are
12.11 Marking
Marking of steel forgings shall fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9 of this Part.
For steel forgings, PRS issues an Inspection Certificate in accordance with the requirements specified
in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part. In addition to the particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part, the
following information shall be included in the Inspection Certificate:
.1 results of non-destructive tests, where applicable,
.2 details of heat treatment, including temperature and holding times.
Steel Castings 95
13 STEEL CASTINGS
13.1 Carbon Steel Castings for Hull and Machinery Components
13.1.1.1 Steel castings of essential parts which are subject to PRS survey in accordance with the
provisions of the relevant Parts of the Rules, shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the
requirements specified below.
13.1.1.2 The requirements specified in this Chapter apply to carbon steel castings intended for the hull
and machinery components, where the design and acceptance tests are related to mechanical properties at
ambient temperature.
13.1.1.3 The requirements for castings intended for service at low or elevated temperatures and castings
from alloy cast steel (stainless, acid-resistant, heat-resistant, etc.) are subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case.
13.1.2 Manufacture
13.1.2.1 Castings shall be made at manufacturers approved by PRS and using processes approved by
PRS.
13.1.2.2 All flame cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging to remove surplus metal shall be undertaken in
accordance with recognized good practice and shall be performed before the final heat treatment.
Preheating shall be employed when necessitated by the chemical composition and/or thickness of the
castings. If necessary, the affected areas shall be either machined or ground smooth.
13.1.2.3 For essential components including steel castings subjected to surface hardening process, the
proposed method of manufacture requires PRS acceptance in each particular case.
13.1.2.4 When two or more castings are joined by welding to form a composite component, the proposed
welding procedure shall be submitted for approval. In that case, PRS may require welding procedure
qualification tests.
13.1.3 Quality of Castings
Each casting shall be free from surface or internal defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
application in service. The surface finish shall be in accordance with good practice and any specific
requirements of the approved plan.
13.1.4 Chemical Composition
13.1.4.1 Steel castings shall be made from killed steel and the chemical composition shall be appropriate
for the type of steel, dimensions and mechanical properties specified for the castings.
13.1.4.2 Chemical composition of each heat shall be determined by the manufacturer on a sample taken
preferably during the pouring of the heat. When multiple heats are tapped into a common ladle, the ladle
analysis shall apply.
13.1.4.3 For carbon steel castings, chemical composition shall fulfil the requirements for the overall
limits specified in Table 13.1.4.3.
Table 13.1.4.3
Chemical composition limits for hull and machinery steel castings [%]
Residual elements, max. Total
Steel C Si S P
Applications Mn residuals
type max. max. max. max. Cu Cr Ni Mo max.
Castings for
non-welded 0.40 0.60 0.50÷1.60 0.04 0.04 0.30 0.30 0.40 0.15 0.80
Carbon construction
steel Castings for
welded 0.23 0.60 1.60 max. 0.04 0.04 0.30 0.30 0.40 0.15 0.80
construction
13.1.4.4 Unless agreed otherwise, suitable grain refining elements may be used at the discretion of the
manufacturer. The content of such elements shall be included in the Inspection Certificate.
13.1.5 Supply Condition
13.1.5.1 Steel castings shall be properly heat treated to refine the grain structure and to obtain the
required mechanical properties. The heat treatment may be as follows:
– full annealing,
– normalising,
– normalising and tempering, or
– quenching and tempering.
The tempering temperature shall not be less than 550°C.
13.1.5.2 Castings for such components as crankshafts, engine bed plates, etc., where dimensional stability
and freedom from internal stresses are important shall be given stress relief heat treatment. This shall be
performed at a temperature of not less than 550°C followed by furnace cooling to 300°C or lower.
13.1.5.3 Heat treatment shall be performed in properly constructed furnaces which are efficiently
maintained and have adequate means for control and recording of temperature. The furnace dimensions
shall be such as to allow the whole casting to be uniformly heated to the necessary temperature. In the case
of very large castings, alternative methods for heat treatment are subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case. Sufficient number of thermocouples shall be connected to the furnace charge to measure
and record that its temperature is adequately uniform.
13.1.5.4 If a casting is locally reheated or any straightening operation is performed after the final heat
treatment, PRS may require subsequent stress relieving heat treatment in order to avoid the possibility
of harmful residual stresses.
13.1.5.5 The foundry shall maintain records of heat treatment identifying the furnace used, furnace
charge, date, temperature and time at temperature. The records shall be presented to PRS Surveyor on
request.
13.1.6 Mechanical Tests
13.1.6.1 Test material, sufficient for the required tests and for possible retest purposes shall be provided
for each casting or batch of castings.
13.1.6.2 Where castings of similar size and form are made from one cast and heat-treated in the same
furnace charge, a batch testing procedure may be adopted using separately cast test samples of suitable
dimensions or the test samples shall be taken directly from a casting of the same batch.
13.1.6.3 At least one test sample shall be provided for each casting. These test samples shall be either
integrally cast or gated to the castings and shall have a thickness of not less than 30 mm.
Steel Castings 97
Test specimens cast separately are permitted, but their dimensions shall depend on the casting
dimensions. The test specimens shall be cast in moulds made from the same type of material as was used
for the casting.
13.1.6.4 Where the casting is of complex design or where the finished mass exceeds 10 tonnes, at least
two sets of test specimens shall be taken. Where castings are made from two or more casts, which are not
mixed in a ladle prior to pouring, two or more sets of test specimens shall be provided corresponding to
the number of casts involved. These shall be integrally cast at locations as widely separated as possible.
13.1.6.5 For castings to which the requirements specified in paragraph 13.1.2.3 are applicable, the
number and position of tests samples shall be agreed with PRS having regard to the method of manufacture
employed.
13.1.6.6 Where a number of small castings of about the same size, each of which is under 1000 kg in
mass, are made from one cast and heat treated in the same furnace charge, a batch testing procedure may
be adopted using separately cast test samples of suitable dimensions as specified in paragraph 13.1.6.3.
13.1.6.7 Test samples shall not be detached from the casting until the specified heat treatment has been
complete and they have been properly identified.
13.1.6.8 At least one tensile test specimen shall be taken from each test sample.
13.1.6.9 Preparation of test specimens and the procedures used for mechanical testing shall fulfil the
relevant requirements specified in Chapter 2 of this Part. Unless otherwise agreed, all tests shall be
performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor.
13.1.7 Mechanical Properties
13.1.7.1 Depending on the minimum requirements for tensile strength, the yield stress, elongation and
reduction of area of carbon steel castings shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 13.1.7.1. Where
it is proposed to use steel with a specified minimum tensile strength intermediate to those indicated, the
corresponding minimum values for other properties may be obtained by interpolation.
Table 13.1.7.1
Mechanical properties for hull and machinery steel castings (minimum limits)
Steel grade Rm 1) [MPa] Re [MPa] A [%] Z [%]
200-400 400 200 25 40
220-440 440 220 22 30
240-480 480 240 20 27
260-520 520 260 18 25
280-560 560 280 15 20
300-600 600 300 13 20
1) PRS may require that a minimum value of tensile strength not be exceeded by more than 150 MPa.
13.1.7.2 Mechanical properties shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 13.1.7.1 appropriate to
the minimum tensile strength or, where applicable, the requirements of the approved specification.
13.1.7.3 Where the results of tensile tests fail to meet the relevant requirements specified in the Rules,
retests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 2.3 of this Part.
13.1.7.4 The additional tests mentioned in paragraph 13.1.7.3 shall be made on specimens taken
preferably from the same, but alternatively from another, test sample representative of the casting or batch
of castings.
13.1.7.5 At the option of the manufacturer, where a casting or batch of castings has failed to meet the
test requirements specified in the Rules, it may be reheat-treated and resubmitted for acceptance tests.
13.1.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality

13.1.8.1 All castings shall be cleaned and adequately prepared for examination; suitable methods include
pickling, caustic cleaning, wire brushing, local grinding, shot or sand blasting. The surfaces shall not be
hammered, peened or treated in any way which may obscure defects.
13.1.8.2 Before acceptance, all castings shall be presented to PRS Surveyor for visual examination.
Where applicable, this shall include the examination of internal surfaces. Unless otherwise agreed,
the verification of dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
13.1.8.3 Where required by the relevant Rules, or by the approved procedure for welded composite
elements (see paragraph 13.1.2.4), appropriate non-destructive testing shall also be performed before
acceptance and the results shall be reported by the manufacturer. Testing requirements and acceptance criteria
for non-destructive testing of steel castings for hull components are specified in Publication 71/P – Non-
destructive Testing of Hull Marine Steel Castings.
13.1.8.4 Where required in the relevant chapters of the Rules, castings shall be pressure tested before
final acceptance. These tests shall be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor.
13.1.8.5 In the event of any casting proving to be defective during subsequent machining or testing,
it shall be rejected notwithstanding any previous certification.
13.1.9 Rectification of Defective Castings
13.1.9.1 The procedure of rectification of the defective castings is subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case. The procedure of defect removal by weld repair may be employed subject to PRS acceptance
in each particular case. In that case, the requirements specified in Chapter 23 of this Part shall apply. Where
the defective area is to be repaired by welding, the excavations shall be suitably shaped to allow good access
for welding. The resulting grooves shall be subsequently ground smooth and complete elimination of the
defective material shall be verified by magnetic particle testing or penetrant testing.
13.1.9.2 The procedure of defect removal and weld repair shall be checked by the manufacturer to
demonstrate that after the heat treatment mentioned in paragraph 13.1.5, the required mechanical properties
will be achieved.
13.1.9.3 The manufacturer shall maintain full records detailing the extent and location of repairs made
to each casting and details of weld procedures and heat treatment applied for repairs as well as details
of the subsequent non-destructive testing. These records shall be presented to PRS Surveyor on request.
13.1.10 Marking
13.1.10.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification which will enable all finished castings
to be traced to the original cast and PRS Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing the castings
when required.
13.1.10.2 Marking of steel castings shall fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapter 1.9 of This
Part.
13.1.10.3 Where small castings are manufactured in large numbers, modified arrangements for
identification are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
13.1.11 Inspection Certificate
For steel castings, PRS issues an Inspection Certificate in accordance with the requirements specified
in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part. In addition to the particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part,
the following information shall be included in the Inspection Certificate:
.1 results of non-destructive tests, where applicable,
.2 details of heat treatment, including temperature and holding times.
.3 pressure test results, where applicable.
Steel Castings 99
13.2 Cast Stainless Steel Propellers

13.2.1.1 The present requirements apply to the manufacture of cast steel propellers, blades and bosses.
13.2.1.2 Alloys whose chemical composition, mechanical properties and heat treatment do not fulfil the
requirements specified in sub-chapter 13.2 are subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
13.2.1.3 These requirements also apply to the repair of propellers damaged in service, which may be
performed subject to prior acceptance by PRS in each particular case.
13.2.1.4 Each casting shall have a workmanlike finish and shall be free from imperfections and defects
which would be prejudicial to their proper application in service.
Minor casting defects which may still be visible after machining such as small sand and slag inclusions,
small cold shuts and scabs shall be trimmed off by the manufacturer in accordance with 13.2.9.
13.2.1.5 Casting defects which may impair the serviceability of the castings, e.g. major non-metallic
inclusions, shrinkage cavities, blow holes and cracks, are not permitted. They may be removed by one of
the methods described in 13.2.9 and repaired within the limits and restrictions for the severity zones. Full
description and documentation must be available for the surveyor.
13.2.2 Foundry Approval
13.2.2.1 Propellers and their components shall be manufactured by foundries approved by PRS. The
castings are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of this sub-chapter.
13.2.2.2 Application for approval
It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to assure that effective quality, process and production controls
during manufacturing are adhered to within the manufacturing specification. The manufacturing
specification shall be submitted to PRS at the time of initial approval, and shall at least include the
following particulars: description of the foundry facilities, steel material specification, runner and feeder
arrangements, manufacturing procedures, non-destructive testing and repair procedures.
13.2.2.3 Scope of the approval test
The scope of the approval test is to be agreed with PRS. This should include the presentation of cast
test coupons of the propeller materials in question for approval testing in order to verify that the chemical
composition and the mechanical properties of these materials comply with these rules.
13.2.2.4 Inspection facilities
The foundry shall have an adequately equipped laboratory, manned by experienced personnel, for the
testing of moulding materials, chemical analyses, mechanical testing, microstructural testing of metallic
materials and non-destructive testing. Where testing activities are assigned to other companies or other
laboratory, additional information required by PRS shall be included.
13.2.3.1 Typical cast steel propeller alloys are grouped into four types depending on their chemical
composition as given in Table 13.2.3.1. Cast steel whose chemical composition deviate from the typical
values of Table 13.2.3.1 shall be specially approved by PRS.
Table 13.2.3.1
Typical chemical composition for stainless steel propeller castings
Alloy type C [%] Mn [%] Mo1) [%]
Cr [%] Ni [%]
(designation) max max max
Martensitic (12Cr1Ni) 0.15 2.0 11.5÷17.0 0.5 max 2.0
Martensitic (13Cr4Ni) 0.06 2.0 11.5÷17.0 1.0 3.5÷5.0
Martensitic (16Cr5Ni) 0.06 2.0 15.0÷17.5 1.5 3.5÷6.0
Austenitic (19Cr11Ni) 0.12 1.6 16.0÷21.0 4.0 8.0÷13.0
1) The minimum values shall be in accordance with the recognised national or international standards.
13.2.3.2 The manufacturer shall maintain records of the chemical analyses of the production casts, which
shall be made available to the Surveyor so that he can satisfy himself that the chemical composition of
each casting is within the specified limits.
13.2.4 Heat Treatment
Martensitic castings shall be austenitised and tempered. Austenitic castings shall be solution treated.
Heat treatment particulars are determined by the manufacturer taking account of the chemical
composition, shape, size and required mechanical properties of the casting.
13.2.5.1 The mechanical properties are to comply with values given in Table 13.2.5.1.
Table 13.2.5.1
Mechanical properties for typical stainless steel propeller castings
Alloy type Rp0.2 [MPa] Rm [MPa] A [%] Z [%] KV 1) [J]
(designation) min. min. min. min. min.
12Cr1Ni 440 590 15 30 20
13Cr4Ni 550 750 15 35 30
16Cr5Ni 540 760 15 35 30
19Cr11Ni 1802) 440 30 40 –
1) Not required for general service and the lowest ice class notations (i.e. L3 or L4).
For other ice class notations, tests shall be performed at temperature of –10 °C.
2) R1.0 min. = 205 MPa.
13.2.5.2 Mechanical properties shall be determined on test specimens machined from integrally cast test
bars attached to the hub or on the blade. The thickness of test bar is to be in accordance with a recognized
standard. Where possible, the test bars attached on blades shall be located in an area between 0.5 and 0.6R
(where R is the propeller radius). The test bars shall not be detached from the casting until the final heat
treatment has been performed. Removal shall be by non-thermal procedures.
13.2.5.3 In justified cases, separately cast test bars may be used subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case. The test bars shall be cast from the same heat as the castings represented and heat treated
with the castings represented.
13.2.5.4 At least one set of mechanical test specimens (one tensile test specimen and three impact test
specimens, except for austenitic steel castings, for which impact tests are not required) shall be made on
material representing each casting. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
specified in Chapter 2 of this Part.
13.2.5.5 Where a number of small propellers of about the same size and less than 1 m in diameter are made
from one cast and heat treated in the same furnace charge, a batch testing procedure may be adopted using
separately cast test samples of the shape and dimensions in accordance with Fig. 17.3.6.1 in this Part. At least
one set of mechanical test specimens shall be taken for each multiple of five castings in the batch.
Steel Castings 101

13.2.6.1 Finished castings shall be 100% visually inspected by PRS Surveyor who may require some
areas to be etched for the purpose of investigating weld repairs.
13.2.6.2 Castings shall be free from cracks, hot tears or other imperfections which, due to their nature,
degree or extent, will interfere with the use of castings.
13.2.6.3 The verification of dimensions, the dimensional and geometrical tolerances is the responsibility
of the manufacturer. The report on the relevant examinations is to be submitted to PRS Surveyor, who may
require checks to be made in his presence.
13.2.6.4 Static balancing shall be performed on all propellers in accordance with the approved drawing.
Dynamic balancing is necessary for propellers running above 500 rpm.
13.2.7 Non-destructive Testing
13.2.7.1 Definiton of skew, severity zones
In order to relate the degree of non-destructive testing to the criticality of imperfections, propeller blades
are divided into three severity zones designated A, B and C. Further, a distinction is made between low
skew and high skew propellers in Publication 7/P – Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers.
13.2.7.2 Qualification of personnel involved in NDT
Personnel shall be certified according to the requirements of Publication No. 51/P – Procedural
Requirements for Service Suppliers.
13.2.7.3 Visual testing
All finished castings shall be 100% visually inspected by the manufacturer. Castings shall be free from
cracks, hot tears or other imperfections which, due to their nature, degree or extent, will interfere with the
use of castings. A general visual examination shall be carried out by PRS surveyor.
13.2.7.4 Liquid penetrant testing
Liquid penetrant testing procedure shall be submitted to PRS and is to be in accordance with ISO
3452-1:2013 or a recognized standard. The acceptance criteria are specified in 13.2.8.
For all propellers, separately cast blades and hubs, the surfaces covered by severity zones A, B and C
shall be liquid penetrant tested. Testing of zone A shall be undertaken in the presence of the Surveyor,
whilst testing of zone B and C may be witnessed by the Surveyor upon his request.
If repairs have been made either by grinding or by welding, the repaired areas are additionally to be
subjected to the liquid penetrant testing independent of their location and/or severity zone. Weld repairs
shall, independent of their location, always be assessed according to zone A.
13.2.7.5 Magnetic particle testing
Magnetic particle testing may be used in lieu of liquid penetrant testing for examination of martensitic
stainless steels castings.
Magnetic particle testing procedure shall be submitted to PRS and shall be in accordance with ISO
9934-1:2016 or a recognized standard.
13.2.7.6 Radiographic and ultrasonic testing
When required by PRS or when deemed necessary by the manufacturer, further non-destructive testing
(e.g. radiographic and/or ultrasonic testing) shall be carried out. The acceptance criteria or applied quality
levels shall then be agreed between the manufacturer and PRS in accordance with a recognized standard.
Note: due to the attenuating effect of ultrasound within austenitic steel castings, ultrasonic testing may not be practical in some
cases, depending on the shape/type/thickness, and grain-growth direction of the casting.
13.2.8 Acceptance criteria for liquid penetrant testing and magnetic particle testing
13.2.8.1 Definitions of liquid penetrant indications
Indication: In the liquid penetrant testing an indication is the presence of detectable bleed-out of
the penetrant liquid from the material discontinuities appearing at least 10 minutes after the developer has
been applied.
Relevant indication: only indications which have any dimension greater than 1.5 mm shall be
considered relevant for the categorization of indications.
Non-linear indication: an indication with a largest dimension less than three times its smallest
dimension (i.e. l < 3 w).
Linear indication: an indication with a largest dimension three or more times its smallest dimension
(i.e. l ≥ 3 w).
Aligned indications:
a) Non-linear indications form an alignment when the distance between indications is less than 2mm and
at least three indications are aligned. An alignment of indications is considered to be a unique indication
and its length is equal to the overall length of the alignment.
b) Linear indications form an alignment when the distance between two indications is smaller than the
length of the longest indication.
Illustration of liquid penetrant indications is given in Fig. 13.2.8.1.
Fig.13.2.8.1 Shape of indications

Steel Castings 103
13.2.8.2 Acceptance standard

The surface to be inspected shall be divided into reference areas of 100 cm2. Each reference area may
be square or rectangular with the major dimension not exceeding 250 mm.
The area shall be taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indication being evaluated.
The relevant indications detected shall with respect to their size and number, not exceed the values
given in the Table 13.2.8.2.
Areas which are prepared for welding are independent of their location shall always be assessed
according to zone A. The same applies to the welded areas after being finished machined and/or grinded.
Table 13.2.8.2
Allowable number and size of relevant indications in reference areas of 100 cm2
depending on severity zones
Severity Maximum total number Indication Maximum number Maximum dimension l 3)
zone of indications type for each type 1), 2) [mm]
non-linear 5 4
A 7 linear 2 3
aligned 2 3
non-linear 10 6
B 14 linear 4 6
aligned 4 6
non-linear 14 8
C 20 linear 6 6
aligned 6 6
1) Single non-linear indications less than 2 mm in Zone A and less than 3 mm for the other zones are not considered relevant.
2) The total number of non-linear indications may be increased to the maximum total number, or part thereof, represented by
the absence of linear or aligned indications.
3) l – dimension of non-linear indication main axis or length of non-linear indication.
13.2.9 Repair of defects

13.2.9.1 Defective castings shall be repaired in accordance with the requirements specified in Publication
7/P – Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers and in sub-chapter 23.9 of this Part, where applicable.
13.2.9.2 Martensitic steels shall be furnace re-tempered after weld repair. Local stress relieving may,
however, be considered for minor repairs subject to prior acceptance by PRS in each particular case.
13.2.9.3 The foundry shall maintain records of welding, subsequent heat treatment and inspections,
traceable to each casting repaired. These records shall be reviewed by PRS Surveyor.
13.2.10 Marking
13.2.10.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system for the identification of all castings, which enable the
material to be traced to its original cast. PRS Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing the castings
when required.
Each finished casting propeller shall be marked by the manufacturer at least with the following
particulars:
a) Heat number or other marking which will enable the full history of the casting to be traced;
b) Grade of cast material or corresponding abbreviated designation
c) PRS certificate number;
d) Ice class symbol, where applicable;
e) Skew angle for high skew propellers,
f) Date of final inspection.
13.2.10.2 The Society s stamp is to be put on when the casting has been accepted.

For propellers, PRS issues Inspection Certificate in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-
chapter 1.8 of this Part. In addition to the particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8 of this Part, the following
information shall be included in the Inspection Certificate:
.1 purchaser’s name and order number,
.2 vessel identification, where known,
.3 description of the casting with drawing number,
.4 diameter, number of blades, pitch, direction of turning,
.5 skew angle for high skew propellers (for propellers with a skew angle exceeding 25°),
.6 final weight,
.7 casting identification number,
.8 details of time and temperature of heat treatment,
.9 statement regarding non-destructive testing and details of the test procedure, if necessary,
.10 records of weld repairs in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 13.2.9.3.
Grey Iron Castings 105
14 GREY IRON CASTINGS

14.1.1 Important grey iron castings intended for hull structural members and ship machinery, subject to
PRS survey specified in the relevant Parts of the Rules, shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
with the requirements of the present Chapter.
14.1.2 Subject to PRS consent, series-manufactured grey iron castings may be tested and accepted in
accordance with individual procedures.
14.1.3 Depending on the specified minimum tensile strength, grey iron is subdivided into grades.
14.2 Manufacture
14.2.1 Important grey iron castings shall be made at foundries approved by PRS and according to
manufacturing process agreed with PRS.
14.2.2 Suitable mechanical methods shall be employed for the removal of surplus material from
castings. Thermal cutting processes are not acceptable, except as a preliminary operation to mechanical
methods.
14.2.3 Where castings of the same type are regularly produced in quantity, the manufacturer shall
perform any tests necessary to prove the quality of the prototype castings and shall also carry out periodical
examinations to verify the continued efficiency of the manufacturing technique. PRS Surveyor shall be
given the opportunity to witness these tests.
14.3 Quality of Castings
Castings shall be free from surface or internal defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
application in service. The surface finish shall be in accordance with good practice and requirements
specified in the approved quality control plan.
The chemical composition of grey iron castings is left to the discretion of the manufacturer, who shall
ensure that it is suitable for the required mechanical properties of the castings.
PRS may require that the chemical composition, according to the ladle analysis, should be stated in
14.5.1 Except as required by paragraph 14.5.2, castings may be supplied in either the as cast or heat
treated condition.
14.5.2 For some applications, such as high temperature service or where dimensional stability is
important, castings may require to be given a suitable tempering or stress relieving heat treatment. Stress
relief annealing shall be performed prior to heat treatment procedure for refining the structure and
improvement of mechanical properties.
14.6.1 Test sample sufficient for the required tests and for possible re-tests shall be provided for each
casting or a batch of castings.
14.6.2 Unless agreed otherwise between the manufacturer and the purchaser, test sample shall be in the
form of cylindrical bar of suitable length and 30 mm in diameter according to PN-EN 1561 (Fig. 14.6.2).
Length L shall be determined depending on the length of tensile test specimen and the testing machine
grips.
Fig. 14.6.2. Test sample mould
It shall be cast vertically in a mould made from the same type of material as used for the casting and
shall be removed from the mould at the temperature not exceeding 500°C.
When two or more test samples are cast simultaneously in a single mould, the bars shall be at least
50 mm apart.
14.6.3 Integrally cast samples may be used if the thickness of the casting wall exceeds 20 mm and the
castings mass exceeds 200 kg, subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Types of integrally cast samples and strength properties of specimens made from integrally cast
samples, recommended by PN-EN 1561 are given in Fig. 14.6.3. Type 1 test sample shall be used for
castings with the wall thickness up to 80 mm. Type 2 test sample shall be used for castings with the wall
thickness exceeding 80 mm.
Type 1 Type 2
Fig. 14.6.3. Integrally cast samples
14.6.4 Except as required by paragraph 14.6.7, at least one test sample shall be cast with each batch.
14.6.5 Except as required by paragraph 14.6.6, a batch consists of the castings poured from a single
ladle of metal, provided they are all of similar type and dimensions. A batch should not normally exceed
2000 kg of fettled castings. A single casting will constitute a batch if its mass is 2000 kg or more.
14.6.6 For continuous melting of the same grade of cast iron, the castings manufactured within 2 hours
may, upon PRS consent, constitute one batch.
Grey Iron Castings 107
14.6.7 If one grade of cast iron is melted in large quantities and its manufacture is monitored by systematic
checking the melting process, such as chill testing, chemical analysis or thermal analysis, test samples may
be taken at longer intervals.
14.6.8 All test samples shall be suitably marked to identify them with the castings which they represent.
14.6.9 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated condition, the test samples shall be heat treated
together with the castings which they represent. For integrally cast samples, the sample shall not to be cut
off from the casting until heat treatment has been completed.
14.6.10 At least one tensile test specimen shall be prepared from each test sample. The dimensions
of tensile test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 2, this Part. Test samples
of other dimensions may be permitted, subject to the prior agreement with PRS.
14.6.11 All tensile tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 2, this Part.
Unless agreed otherwise, all tests shall be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor.
14.7.1 The basis of acceptance of grey cast iron is the tensile strength determined from the tests on
a specimen with the dimensions according to the requirements of 2.5.4, this Part. The specified minimum
tensile strength shall be given in the documentation subject to PRS approval, but it shall be not less than
200 MPa.
In Table 14.7.1, the values of Rm, determined on specimens taken from separately cast test samples, are
given.
The mechanical properties of specimens, cut out directly from the castings, shall be specially agreed
with PRS.
Table 14.7.1
Tensile strength of grey cast iron
Rm [MPa] Grey cast iron designation acc. to PN-EN1561
Grey cast iron grade
min.
200 200 EN-GJL-200
250 250 EN-GJL-250
300 300 EN-GJL-300
350 350 EN-GJL-350
14.7.2 The mechanical properties of specimens cut out from integrally cast samples (Fig. 14.6.3) are
given in Table 14.7.2.
Table 14.7.2
Tensile strength of specimens made of integrally cast samples depending on the casting wall thickness
Tensile strength Rm [MPa]
Casting wall thickness, t min.
[mm] Integrally cast specimen Specimen cut from the casting
(for information only)
20 < t ≤ 40 170 155
40 < t ≤ 80 150 130
200
80 < t ≤ 150 140 115
150 < t ≤ 300 130 –
20 < t ≤ 40 210 195
40 < t ≤ 80 190 170
250
80 < t ≤ 150 170 155
150 < t ≤ 300 160 –
20 < t ≤ 40 250 240
40 < t ≤ 80 220 210
300
80 < t ≤ 150 210 195
150 < t ≤ 300 190 –
Tensile strength Rm [MPa]

Casting wall thickness, t min.
[mm] Integrally cast specimen Specimen cut from the casting
(for information only)
20 < t ≤ 40 290 280
40 < t ≤ 80 260 250
350 80 < t ≤ 150 230 225
150 < t ≤ 300 210 –
14.7.3 The fractured surfaces of all tensile test specimens shall be granular and grey in appearance.
14.7.4 Re-test requirements for mechanical tests are given in 2.3.1, this Part.
14.8.1 All castings shall be cleaned and adequately prepared for examination. The surfaces shall not be
14.8.2 Before acceptance, all castings shall be visually examined, including, where applicable, the
examination of internal surfaces. Unless otherwise agreed, the verification of dimensions is the responsibility
of the manufacturer.
14.8.3 Where there is any doubt as to the soundness of the casting, supplementary examination by
suitable non-destructive test is required.
14.8.4 Where required by the relevant Chapters of the Rules, castings shall be pressure tested before the
final acceptance.
14.8.5 In the event of any casting proving defective during subsequent machining or testing, it shall be
rejected notwithstanding the preceding acceptance procedure.
14.9 Rectification of Defective Castings
14.9.1 Subject to agreement with PRS Surveyor, small surface blemishes may be removed by local grinding.
14.9.2 Subject to agreement with PRS Surveyor, castings containing local porosity may be rectified by
impregnation with a suitable plastic filler, provided that the extent of the porosity is such that it does not
adversely affect the strength of the casting.
14.9.3 Repairs by welding are not permitted.
14.10 Marking
14.10.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification, which will enable all finished castings
to be traced back to the original ladle of metal. PRS Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing
the castings when required.
14.10.2 Grey iron castings shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this
Part. Additionally, the marking shall contain pressure test results, including test pressure.
14.10.3 Where small castings are manufactured in large numbers, modified arrangements for identification
shall be specially agreed with PRS.
For accepted castings, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements
of sub-chapter 1.8, Part IX. In addition to particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8, Part IX, Inspection
Certificate shall contain the following information:
.1 general details of heat treatment, where applicable,
.2 pressure test results, where applicable,
.3 the chemical analysis of ladle samples, where applicable.
Nodular Iron Castings 109
15 NODULAR IRON CASTINGS

15.1.1 Important nodular graphite iron castings intended for hull structural members and ship
machinery, subject to the survey specified in the relevant Parts of the Rules, shall be manufactured and
tested in accordance with the requirements of the present Chapter.
15.1.2 The requirements of the present Chapter are applicable to nodular iron castings intended for hull
structural members and ship machinery where the design and acceptance test are related to mechanical
properties at ambient temperature. The requirements for nodular iron castings intended for service at low
or elevated temperatures shall be specially agreed with by PRS.
15.1.3 Subject to agreement with PRS, series-manufactured nodular iron castings may be inspected and
accepted in accordance with individual procedures.
15.1.4 Depending on the specified minimum tensile strength, nodular iron castings are subdivided into
grades (Table 15.7.1).
15.2 Manufacture
15.2.1 Important nodular iron castings shall be made at foundries approved by PRS and according to
manufacturing process agreed with PRS.
15.2.2 Suitable mechanical methods shall be employed for the removal of surplus material from
castings. Thermal cutting processes are not acceptable, except as a preliminary operation to mechanical
methods.
15.2.3 Where castings of the same type are regularly produced in series, the manufacturer shall perform
any tests necessary to prove the quality of the prototype castings and shall also carry out periodical
examinations to verify the continued efficiency of the manufacturing process. PRS Surveyor shall be given
the opportunity to witness these tests.
15.3 Quality of Castings
Castings shall be free from surface or internal defects which would be prejudicial to their proper application
in service. The surface finish shall be in accordance with good practice and the requirements specified in the
approved quality control plan.
Unless agreed otherwise, the chemical composition of nodular iron castings is left to the discretion of
the manufacturer, who shall ensure that it is suitable for the required mechanical properties of the castings.
PRS may require that the chemical composition, according to the ladle analysis, should be stated in
15.5.1 Except as required by 15.5.2, castings may be supplied in either the as cast or heat treated
condition. The type and method of heat treatment is left to the discretion of the manufacturer, depending
on the chemical composition, designation and shape of the casting.
15.5.2 For some applications, such as high temperature service or where dimensional stability is
important, it may be required that castings should be subjected to a suitable tempering or stress relieving
heat treatment. This shall be performed after any refining heat treatment and before machining. Grade
350-22 and 400-18 nodular iron castings shall undergo a ferritizing heat treatment.
15.5.3 Where it is proposed to locally harden the surface of a casting, details of the proposed procedure
shall be agreed with PRS.

15.6.1 Test sample sufficient for the required tests and for possible re-tests shall be provided for each
casting or a batch of castings.
15.6.2 The samples cast separately shall be of the dimensions as specified in Figs. 15.6.2-l, 15.6.2-2 and
15.6.2-3; the length L of a sample shall be according to the sample dimensions and the type of the testing
machine.
Fig. 15.6.2-1
Fig. 15.6.2-2
Fig. 15.6.2-3
15.6.3 At least one test sample shall be provided for each casting. Test samples may be either gated
to the casting or separately cast.
Subject to agreement with PRS, other types of test samples may be used, or – in the case of batch
of castings acceptance – the samples may be cut out directly from the casting constituting a batch.
15.6.4 For large castings where more than one ladle of treated metal is used, additional test samples
shall be provided so as to be representative of each ladle used.
15.6.5 As an alternative to the requirements of para. 15.6.3, a batch testing procedure may be adopted
for castings with a fettled mass of 1000 kg or less. All castings in a batch shall be of similar type and
dimensions, cast from the same ladle of treated metal. One separately cast test sample shall be provided
for each multiple of 2000 kg of fettled castings in the batch.
Nodular Iron Castings 111
15.6.6 Where separately cast test samples are used, they shall be cast in moulds made from the same
type of material as used for the castings. Test samples shall not be stripped from the moulds until the
temperature is below 500ºC.
15.6.7 All test samples shall be suitably marked to identify them with the castings which they represent.
15.6.8 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated condition, the test samples shall be heat treated
together with the castings which they represent.
15.6.9 One tensile test specimen shall be prepared from each test sample and shall be machined to the
dimensions given in Chapter 2.
15.6.10 All tensile tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 2, this Part.
Unless agreed otherwise, all tests shall be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor.
15.6.11 Impact tests may additionally be required. In such cases a set of three test specimens of agreed
type shall be prepared from each sample. Where Charpy V-notch test specimens are used, the dimensions
and testing procedures shall be in accordance with Chapter 2, this Part.
15.7.1 Depending on the specified minimum tensile strength, proof stress and elongation shall comply
with the requirements of Table 15.7.1. Typical Brinell hardness values, given in the Table, are intended
for information purposes only. The requirements given in the Table refer to test specimens prepared from
separately cast test samples.
Table 15.7.1
Mechanical properties of separately cast test samples
Tensile test
Impact test
Nodular cast iron Rm2) Rp0,2 A Hardness HB
KV 3) Structure 1)
grade [MPa] [MPa] [%] (approx. values) Test temp.
[J]
min. min. min. [°C]
min.
350-22 350 220 224) 110÷170 +20 17(14) F
400-18 400 250 184) 140÷200 +20 14(11) F
370-17 370 230 17 120÷180 – – F
400-12 400 250 12 140÷200 – – F
500-7 500 320 7 170÷240 – – F/P
600-3 600 370 3 190÷270 – – F/P
700-2 700 420 2 230÷300 – – P
800-2 800 480 2 250÷350 – – P or T
Notes:
1) Structure composition: F – ferrite, P – pearlite, T – tempered
2) For intermediate values of Rm, the values of Rp0.2 and A5 may be determined by linear interpolation.
3) Average values obtained from three results. The minimum value of the individual result is given in brackets.
4) For integrally cast samples, the value of A may be lower by 2 units.
15.7.2 Castings may be supplied to the specified minimum tensile strength other than that given in
Table 15.7.1. In such case they are subject to special requirements agreed with PRS.
15.7.3 Unless agreed otherwise, only the tensile strength and elongation need be determined. The
results of all tensile tests shall comply with the requirements of Table 15.7.1.
15.7.4 Re-test requirements for mechanical tests are given in 2.3.1, this Part.
15.7.5 The mechanical properties determined on specimens gated to or cut out directly from the casting

15.8.1 All castings shall be cleaned and adequately prepared for examination. The surfaces shall not be
15.8.2 Before acceptance, all castings shall be visually examined, including, where applicable, the
examination of internal surfaces. Unless agreed otherwise, the verification of dimensions is the
responsibility of the manufacturer.
15.8.3 Where there is any doubt as to the soundness of the casting, supplementary examination by
suitable non-destructive tests is required.
15.8.4 Where required by the relevant Chapters of the Rules, castings shall be pressure tested before the
final acceptance.
15.8.5 In the event of any casting proving defective during subsequent machining or testing, it shall be
15.9 Metallographic Examination
15.9.1 For crankshafts, the metallographic examination is mandatory.
15.9.2 From each test sample, at least one test specimen shall be taken for metallographic examination.
Specimens for metallographic examinations may be taken from the tensile strength specimens or from
separately cast samples, taken from the same ladle.
15.9.3 Examination of the samples shall show that at least 90% of the graphite is in a dispersed spheroidal
or nodular form. Details of the structure, given in Table 15.7.1, are intended for information purposes only.
15.10 Rectification of Defective Castings
15.10.1 Subject to agreement with PRS Surveyor, small surface imperfections may be removed by
grinding.
15.10.2 Subject to agreement with PRS Surveyor, castings containing local porosity may be rectified by
impregnation with a suitable plastic filler, provided that the extent of the porosity is such that it does not
adversely affect the strength of the casting.
15.10.3 Repairs by welding are not permitted.
15.11 Marking
15.11.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification, which will enable all finished castings
15.11.2 Castings shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this Part.
Additionally, the marking shall contain pressure test results, including test pressure.
of sub-chapter 1.8, this Part. In addition to particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8, this Part, Inspection
.1 general details of heat treatment, where applicable,
.3 the chemical analysis of ladle samples, where applicable.
Copper Alloys 113
16 MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS

The chemical composition, mechanical properties and scope of tests of malleable iron castings shall be
agreed with PRS.
17 COPPER ALLOYS
17.1 Copper and Copper Alloy Tubes
17.1.1.1 The requirements of sub-chapter 17.1 apply to copper and copper alloy tubes used in parts of
ship machinery and pipelines manufactured under PRS survey.
17.1.1.2 The requirements of sub-chapter 17.1 apply to phosphorous-deoxidised copper, aluminium

brass and copper-nickel alloys.
17.1.1.3 Tubes shall be in accordance with the relevant standards, e.g. PN-EN 12449, PN-EN 1057, PN-
EN 12451 and the requirements of the present Rules. Recogniton of other standards or material
specifications shall be specially agreed with PRS.
17.1.1.4 The use of material differing in chemical compositon, mechanical properties or supply
condition from the materials listed above shall be subject to special agreement with PRS.
17.1.2 Manufacture
17.1.2.1 Tubes for Class I and Class II ship’s piping systems shall be made at works approved by PRS.
17.1.2.2 Tubes for Class I and Class II ship’s piping systems shall be seamless drawn. Tubes for Class III
ship’s piping systems may be seamless drawn or welded.
17.1.3.1 The chemical composition of copper and copper alloy tubes shall comply with the requirements
of the relevant standards or material specifications agreed with PRS.
17.1.3.2 The chemical composition limits for principal elements in copper and copper alloy tubes shall
comply with the requirements given in Table 17.1.3.2.
Table 17.1.3.2
Chemical composition limits for principal elements in copper and copper alloy tubes1)
Designation Cu Al As Fe Mn Ni P Pb Zn
Cu-DPH copper 0.015÷
99.9 2) min. – – – – – – –
(CW024A) 0.040
CuZn20Al2As
0.07 0.10 0.10 0.01 0.02 The
aluminium brass 76÷79 1.8÷2.3 0.02÷0.06
max. max. max. max. max. remainder
(CW702R)
CuNi10Fe1Mn copper- The 0.02 0.02
– – 1.0÷2.0 0.5÷1.5 9÷11 0.5 max.
nickel alloy 3) (CW352H) remainder max. max.
CuNi30Mn1Fe copper- The 0.02 0.02
– – 0.4÷1.0 0.5÷1.5 30÷32 0.5 max.
nickel alloy3) (CW354H) remainder max. max.
1) Composition in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range or as a minimum.
2) Including Ag up to max. 0.015%.
3) When the product is intended for subsequent welding applications, as specified by the purchaser, the following maximum
limits shall apply: Zn ≤ 0.05%; P ≤ 0.02 %; S ≤ 0.02 %; C ≤ 0.05 %

Copper tubes shall be supplied in the annealed or half-hard condition.
Copper alloy tubes shall be supplied in the annealed condition.
17.1.5.1 The mechanical properties shall be determined by tensile test in accordance with recognized
standards on test specimens taken from test samples according to these standards.
17.1.5.2 The mechanical properties shall comply with the requirements of recognized standards and the
values given in Table 17.1.5.2.
Table 17.1.5.2
Mechanical properties of copper and copper alloy tubes
Designation Supply condition Rm [MPa] min. Rp0.2 MPa] min. A [%] min.
Cu-DPH copper (CW024A) annealed 200 100 40
half-hard 250 150 20
CuZn20Al2As aluminium brass (CW702R) annealed 330 120 35
CuNi10Fe1Mn copper-nickel alloy (CW352H) annealed 290 100 30
CuNi30Mn1Fe copper-nickel alloy (CW354H) annealed 360 120 30
17.1.6 Testing
Tubes shall be submitted for testing in batches. The size of the batch and the scope of the tests shall
comply with the requirements of recognized standards or material specifications agreed with PRS.
Surface inspection and verification of dimensions of the finished products are the responsibility of the
manufacturer. Acceptance of the tubes by PRS Surveyor does not absolve the manufacturer from this
responsibility. Tubes are subject to visual inspection and verification of dimensions for compliance with
the requirements of the relevant standards.
Each tube shall be subjected to eddy current testing or pressure testing in accordance with the
requirements of recognized standards.
17.1.8 Repair
Defects may be removed by grinding, provided that dimensional tolerances are not exceeded. Repair
by welding is not permitted.
17.1.9 Marking
Tubes shall be suitably marked for identification by the manufacturer. Tube marking shall be in
accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, Part IX. Hard stamping of tubes is not permitted.

For each accepted tube, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements
of sub-chapter 1.8, Part IX. In addition to particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8, Part IX, Inspection
.1 non-destructive tests results, where applicable,
.2 pressure tests results, where applicable,
.3 results of any other tests, specified in the order.
Copper Alloys 115
17.2 Copper Alloy Castings other than Castings for Propellers

17.2.1.1 The requirements of sub-chapter 17.2 are applicable to copper alloy castings subject to PRS
manufacture survey, intended for equipment, machinery and piping systems.
17.2.1.2 The requirements of sub-chapter 17.2 are not applicable to copper alloy castings for propellers.
17.2.1.3 The requirements of sub-chapter 17.2 apply to brasses, bronzes and copper-nickel alloys.
17.2.1.4 Copper alloy castings shall be in accordance with recognized standards, e.g. PN-EN 1982 and
the requirements of the present Rules. Recognition of other standards or material specifications shall be
specially considered by PRS.
17.2.1.5 The use of material differing in chemical composition, mechanical properties or supply condition
from those specified above is subject to special consideration by PRS, having regard to the purpose for which
the material is intended.
17.2.2 Manufacture
17.2.2.1 All castings shall be made at foundries approved by PRS.
17.2.2.2 The melting shall be by induction melting or by gas or oil fired furnaces with a crucible or any
other process agreed with PRS.
17.2.2.3 The mould cavity shall be filled with a laminar flow of metal. The gating, risering and moulding
shall be in accordance with good foundry practice.
17.2.3.1 The chemical composition of each ladle shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
standards or material specifications agreed with PRS.
17.2.3.2 Where castings are made from alloyed ingots, the chemical composition based on Inspection
Certificate can be adopted. If any foundry returns are added to the melt, additional chemical analysis may
be required by PRS Surveyor. For parts of machinery which are in direct contact with sea water, the
following copper alloys are recommended:
CUSN11P-C, CUSN11PB2-C, CUSN6ZN4PB2-C, CUSN5ZN5PB5-C, CUZN35MN2AL1FE1-C,
CUZN34MN3AL2FE1-C, CUZN16SI4-C, CUAL10NI3FE2-C, CUZN39PB1ALB-C, CUAL10FE2-C,
CUAL10FE5NI5-C, CUZN25AL5MN4FE3-C, CUNI10FE1MN1-C, CUNI30FE1MN1-C.
17.2.3.3 Elements designated as residual elements in specifications shall not to be intentionally added
to the melt. The content of such elements shall be reported in the chemical composition.
17.2.4.1 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated condition, the heat treatment shall be performed
in a properly constructed furnace which has adequate means for temperature control and is fitted with
recording-type pyrometers. The furnace dimensions shall be such as to allow the whole furnace charge to
be uniformly heated to the necessary temperature.
17.2.4.2 Sufficient thermocouples shall be connected to the furnace charge to measure and record the
temperature uniformity of the furnace.
17.2.4.3 The foundry shall maintain records of heat treatment. The records shall contain at least
identification of the furnace used, furnace charge, date, holding temperature and time. The records shall be
presented to PRS, on request.
17.2.4.4 If a casting is locally reheated or a straightening operation is performed, stress relieving heat
treatment may be required by PRS.
17.2.5 Mechanical Tests

17.2.5.1 Castings shall be submitted for testing in batches. The size of the batch and the scope of the
tests shall comply with the requirements of the relevant standards or material specifications agreed with
PRS. From the batch, at least one set of mechanical test specimens shall be taken.
17.2.5.2 In the case of multiple castings poured from the same ladle, at least one set of mechanical test
specimens, representing all castings from that ladle, shall be taken.
17.2.5.3 Where castings are made from two or more ladles, one set of mechanical test specimens shall
be poured from each ladle unless the metal in the ladle comes from the same heat.
17.2.5.4 Test samples, from which test specimens are taken, shall be cast separately into moulds with
gating systems that ensure laminar flow into the mould cavity. The test samples shall receive the same
casting practices as the castings they represent.
17.2.5.5 For centrifugal cast liners and bushes, the test material shall be taken from the ends of the
casting.
17.2.5.6 All test samples shall be suitably marked to identify them with the castings which they represent.
17.2.5.7 The preparation of test specimens and mechanical tests procedures shall be in accordance with
the requirements of Chapter 2, this Part.
17.2.6.1 The mechanical properties shall be determined by tensile test in accordance with Chapter 2, this
Part, on test specimens prepared from test samples taken in accordance with 17.2.5.
17.2.6.2 The mechanical properties shall comply with the requirements of the relevant standards
or material specifications agreed with PRS.
17.2.6.3 If the results of mechanical tests do not conform to the requirements of the relevant standards
or material specifications agreed with PRS, re-tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
of sub-chapter 2.3, this Part.
17.2.7.1 All finished castings shall be visually examined on accessible surfaces. The surfaces shall be
cleaned and adequately prepared for examination. The surfaces shall not be hammered, peened or treated in
any way which may obscure defects.
17.2.7.2 Before acceptance, castings shall be presented to PRS Surveyor for visual examination. PRS
Surveyor may require areas to be etched for the purpose of investigating weld areas.
17.2.7.3 When visually examined, castings shall be free from adhering sand, scale, cracks, hot tears
or other imperfections detrimental to their intended application.
17.2.7.4 Unless agreed otherwise between the purchaser and the manufacturer, the verification
of dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
17.2.7.5 Castings shall be subjected to non-destructive tests in accordance with the requirements
of Publication 80/P – Non-Destructive Tests.
17.2.7.6 Where penetrant tests are required, they shall be performed when the surface is in the final
condition. Penetrant tests shall be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor, in accordance with the
requirements of PN-EN ISO 3452-1or ASTM E165-02.
Copper Alloys 117
17.2.7.7 The foundry shall maintain records of examinations traceable to each casting. The records shall
be presented to PRS Surveyor, on request. The foundry shall provide the Surveyor with non-destructive
tests report confirming that the tests have been performed with satisfactory results.
17.2.8 Rectification of Defective Castings
17.2.8.1 Defects may be removed by chipping, milling or grinding. Chipping or milling shall be always
followed by grinding. The resulting grooves shall have a bottom radius of approximately three times the
groove depth and shall be blended into the surrounding surface so as to avoid any sharp contours. The
repaired area shall be subjected to penetrant tests.
17.2.8.2 Where repair by welding is agreed with PRS, the excavations shall be suitably shaped to allow
good access for welding.
17.2.8.3 All weld repairs shall be performed by the manufacturer approved by PRS, in accordance with
welding procedures agreed with PRS. Welding consumables shall be suitable for the parent materials used.
17.2.8.4 Weld repairs and adjacent material shall be ground smooth. All weld repairs shall be subjected
to non-destructive tests.
17.2.8.5 The manufacturer shall maintain records of welding and subsequent heat treatment for each
repaired casting. The records shall be presented to PRS Surveyor, on request.
17.2.9 Marking
17.2.9.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification, which will enable all finished castings
17.2.9.2 Castings shall be marked in accordance with sub-chapter 1.9, this Part. Additionally, the marking
shall contain pressure test results, including test pressure.
.1 casting identification number,
.2 details of heat treatment,, including temperatures and holding times,
.5 results of any supplementary tests, where applicable.
17.3 Cast Copper Alloys for Propellers
17.3.1.1 The requirements of sub-chapter 17.3 are applicable to the moulding, casting, inspection and
repair procedures of new cast copper alloy propellers, blades and bosses. Subject to a prior agreement with
PRS, these requirements may be also applied for the repair and inspection of propellers damaged during
service.
17.3.1.2 Propellers and propeller components shall be cast by foundries approved by PRS in accordance
with sub-chapter 1.5, this Part.
17.3.1.3 Definitions of propeller blade skew angle, severity zones, etc., as well as the requirements
concerning repair of propellers are given in Publication 7/P – Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers.
17.3.2 Moulding and Casting

17.3.2.1 Pouring
The pouring shall be performed into dried moulds using degassed liquid metal. The pouring shall be
controlled as to avoid turbulences of flow. Special devices and/or procedures shall be provided to prevent
slag and impurities flowing into the mould.
17.3.2.2 Stress Relieving
Subsequent stress relieving heat treatment may be performed to reduce the residual stresses. For this
purpose, a specification containing the details of the heat treatment shall be submitted by the manufacturer
to PRS for approval. Stress relieving temperatures and holding times are given in Publication 7/P – Repair
of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers.
17.3.3 General Characteristics of Castings
17.3.3.1 Freedom from Defects

Each casting shall have a workmanlike finish and shall be free from defects liable to impair its intended
use. Minor casting defects which may still be visible after machining such as small sand and slag
inclusions, small cold shuts and scabs shall be trimmed off by the manufacturer (see Publication 7/P –
Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers).
17.3.3.2 Rectification of Defective Castings
Casting defects which may impair the serviceability of the castings, e.g. major non-metallic inclusions,
shrinkage cavities, blow holes and cracks, are not permitted. They shall be removed by one of the methods
specified in Publication 7/P – Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers and repaired within the limits and
restrictions for the severity zones. Full description and documentation of the repairs made shall be
presented to PRS Surveyor, on request.
17.3.4 Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical Tolerances
17.3.4.1 The dimensions and the dimensional and geometrical tolerances are governed by the data
contained in the approved drawings or order documents. These shall be submitted to PRS Surveyor at the
time of the tests.
17.3.4.2 Unless agreed otherwise, the accuracy and verification of the dimensions are the responsebility
of the manufacturer.
17.3.4.3 Static balancing shall be performed on all propellers in accordance with the approved
documentation. Dynamic balancing is necessary for propellers runnig above 500 rpm.
17.3.5 Chemical Composition and Structure Characteristics
17.3.5.1 Chemical Composition
Typical copper propeller alloys are grouped into the four types: Cu1, Cu2, Cu3 and Cu4. The chemical
composition of typical copper propeller alloys is given in Table 17.3.5.1. Copper alloys, whose chemical
composition differs from the values given in Table 17.3.5.1, shall be specially approved by PRS.
Table 17.3.5.1
Chemical composition of typical cast copper alloys for propellers
Alloy grade
Cu Al Mn Zn Fe Ni Sn Pb max.
Cu1 (brass Mn) 52÷62 0.5÷3.0 0.5÷4.0 35÷40 0.5÷2.5 max. 1.0 0.1÷1.5 0.5
Cu2 (brass Mn-Ni) 50÷57 0.5÷2.0 1.0÷4.0 33÷38 0.5÷2.5 3.0÷8.0 max. 0.15 0.5
Cu3 (bronze Ni-Al) 77÷82 7.0÷11.0 0.5÷4.0 max. 1.0 2.0÷6.0 3.0÷6.0 max. 0.1 0.03
Cu4 (bronze Mn-Al) 70÷80 6.5÷9.0 8.0÷20.0 max. 6.0 2.0÷5.0 1.5÷3.0 max. 1.0 0.05
Copper Alloys 119
17.3.5.2 Metallurgical Characteristics

The proportion of alpha-phase in Cu1 and Cu2 alloys, determined by the manufacturer on test bars
as the average value of five counts, shall be not less than 25 per cent. To ensure adequate ductility and
corrosion fatigue resistance, the proportion of beta phase shall be kept low. For this purpose, the zinc
equivalent (CZn), determined by formula 17.3.5.2, shall not exceed 45 per cent:
100 ⋅ % Cu
= 100 −
CZn [%] (17.3.5.2)
100 + Α
where: A – the algebraic sum of the following values:
1 · % Sn,
5 · % Al,
–0.5 · % Mn,
–2.3 · % Ni,
–0.1 · % Fe.
Note: The negative sign in front of the elements Mn, Ni and Fe signifies that these elements tend to reduce the proportion of beta-
phase.
The main constituents of the microstructure in the copper-based alloys categories Cu1 and Cu2 are alpha and beta phase.
Important properties such as ductility and resistance to corrosion fatigue are strongly influenced by the relative proportion of beta
phase (too high a percentage of beta phase has a negative effect on these properties). To ensure adequate ductility and corrosion
fatigue resistance, the proportion of beta phase shall be kept low. The concept of the zinc equivalent should be used as control
since it summarizes the effect of the tendency of various chemical elements to produce beta phase in the structure.

17.3.6.1 Typical Alloys
The mechanical properties of typical cast copper alloys for propellers, determined on test specimens
taken from separately cast samples in accordance with Fig. 17.3.6.1, are specified in Table 17.3.6.1.
Note: These properties are a measure of the mechanical quality of the metal in each heat, and they are, in generally, not
representative of the mechanical properties of the propeller casting itself, which may be up to 30% lower than those of a separately
cast test sample.
For integrally cast samples, the mechanical properties shall be subject to special agreement with PRS.
Table 17.3.6.1
Mechanical properties of typical cast copper alloys for propellers
determined on separately cast test samples
Rp0.2 Rm A
Alloy grade [MPa] [MPa] [%]
min. min. min.
Cu1 (brass Mn) 175 440 20
Cu2 (brass Mn-Ni) 175 440 20
Cu3 (bronze Ni-Al) 245 590 16
Cu4 (bronze Mn-Al) 275 630 18
Fig. 17.3.6.1
17.3.6.2 Other Alloys

The use of alloys with mechanical properties not meeting the requirements given in Table 17.3.6.1 shall
be subject to special agreement with PRS.
17.3.7 Testing and Inspection
For cast copper alloys for propellers, the following tests shall be performed. Test specimen dimensions
and testing procedures are given in Chapter 2, this Part.
17.3.7.1 Chemical Composition
The manufacturer is obliged to carry out the chemical analysis of each heat.
17.3.7.2 Tensile Test
During tensile test, the tensile strength, 0.2% proof stress and elongation shall be determined. For this
purpose, at least one tensile test specimen shall be taken from each test sample.
Generally, test specimens shall be taken from separately cast test samples (see 17.3.6.1). The test sample
shall be cast separately in moulds made of the same material as the mould for the propeller and shall be
cooled down under the same conditions as the propeller.
If propellers are subjected to heat treatment, the test samples shall be heat treated together with the
castings they represent.
Where integrally cast samples are to be used for testing, this will be specially agreed with PRS. Where
possible, the test samples shall be taken from the propeller blades in an area lying between 0.5 to 0.6R
(where R is the radius of the propeller). The removal of the test sample from the casting shall be performed
by non-thermal procedures.
17.3.7.3 Micrographic Examination
The microstructure of alloy types Cu1 and Cu2 shall be verified by determining the proportion of alpha
phase. For this purpose, at least one test specimen shall be taken from each heat. The proportion of alpha
phase shall be determined as the average value of 5 counts.
17.3.7.4 Surface Quality and Dimensions
Propeller castings shall be visually examined at all stages of manufacture and the whole surface shall
be subjected to a comprehensive visual examination in the finished condition by PRS Surveyor. This shall
include the bore.
The dimensions shall be checked by the manufacturer and the report on the dimensional inspection shall
be handed over to PRS Surveyor. The checks shall be made in the presence of PRS Surveyor.
PRS Surveyor may require areas to be etched (e.g. by iron chloride) for the purpose of investigating
weld repairs.
17.3.8 Non-Destructive Tests
17.3.8.1 Penetrant Tests
Blade and boss surfaces of the severity zones A shall be subjected to penetrant tests in the presence
of PRS Surveyor. The zone location requirements, inspection and acceptance standards are given in
Publication 7/P – Repair of Cast Copper Alloy Propellers.
In zones B and C, the penetrant testing shall be performed by the manufacturer. PRS Surveyor may
require that the tests should be performed in his presence.
If repairs have been made either by grinding or by welding, the repaired areas shall be subjected to the
penetrant tests, irrespective of their severity zone.
17.3.8.2 Radiographic and Ultrasonic Tests
Where there is reason to doubt that the castings are not free from internal defects, PRS Surveyor may
require that radiographic and/or ultrasonic tests should be performed. The acceptance criteria, established
in accordance with a recognized standard, shall be agreed between the manufacturer and PRS Surveyor.
Copper Alloys 121
Note: The absorption of the X-rays and gamma-rays is stronger in copper based alloys than in steel. For propeller bronzes and
brasses, 300 kV X-rays can normally be used for components up to 50 mm and Co60 gamma-rays up to 160 mm in thickness. Due
to the above reasons, radiography is not used for checking the thickest parts of propellers. Also due to the above, ultrasonic testing
of Cu1 and Cu2 alloys is not feasible. For Cu3 and Cu4 alloys, ultrasonic testing may be applied.
17.3.8.3 Documentation of Defects and Inspections

All defects requiring welding repair on the castings shall be documented preferably on drawings
or special sketches showing their dimensions and locations. Furthermore, the inspection procedure shall
be reported. The documentation shall be presented to PRS Surveyor prior to any repair weldings.
17.3.9 Marking
The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification, which will enable all finished castings to be
traced to their original heats. PRS Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing the castings when
required.
Castings shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, Part IX. Additionally,
castings shall be marked with the following particulars:
.1 ice class mark, where applicable,
.2 propeller blade skew angle (for high-skew propellers).
For each propeller, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements of sub-
chapter 1.8, this Part. In addition to particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8, this Part, Inspection
.1 description of the casting with drawing number;
.2 diameter, number of blades, pitch, direction of turning;
.3 final weight;
.4 results of non-destructive tests and details of test procedure, where applicable;
.5 portion of alpha-structure for Cu1 and Cu2 alloys;
.6 casting identification number;
.7 propeller blade skew angle (for high-skew propellers).
18 ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
18.1 Wrought Aluminium Alloys
18.1.1.1 The requirements of sub-chapter 18.1 are applicable to wrought 5xxx (Al-Mg) and 6xxx (Al-
Si-Mg) aluminium alloys intended for use in the construction of hulls, superstructures and other marine
structures. They are not applicable to the use of aluminium alloys at low temperature for cryogenic
applications.
18.1.1.2 The requirements of sub-chapter 18.1 are applicable to wrought aluminium alloy products
within a thickness range of 3 mm and 50 mm inclusive.
The application of aluminium alloy products outside the above thickness range is subject to special
consideration by PRS.
18.1.1.3 The designation of aluminium alloy temper (delivery heat treatment), defined in the present
sub-chapter as “temper condition”, is in accordance with the requirements of PN-EN 515.
18.1.1.4 PRS may give consent to the use of aluminium alloys not specified in the present Chapter and to
alternative temper conditions, subject to a prior agreement with PRS and a detailed study of the alloy
properties, including corrosion resistance and of the alloy conditions of use (in particular welding
procedures).
18.1.2 Approval of the Manufacturer

All grades of aluminium alloys, including semi-finished products, shall be manufactured at works
approved by PRS.
18.1.3 Aluminium Alloys and Their Temper Conditions
Depending on the method of manufacture, the alloy designation and its temper condition shall be as
given in Tables 18.1.3-1 and 18.1.3-2.
Table 18.1.3-1
Rolled products (sheets, strips and plates)
Alloy designation
Temper condition 3)
Grade 1) European designation system2)
5083 EN AW-5083 [AlMg4.5Mn0.7] O, H111, H112, H116, H321
5086 EN AW-5086 [AlMg4] O, H111, H112, H116
5383 EN AW-5383 [AlMg4.5Mn0.9]
O, H111, H116, H321
5059 –
5754 EN AW-5754 [AlMg3] O, H111
5456 – O, H116, H321
1) Designation applied at product marking.
2) Designation according to PN-EN 573-1 and PN-EN 573-2
3) O – annealed, H111 – annealed with slight strain hardening, H112 – slightly strain hardened from working at elevated
temperature or from a limited amount of cold work, H116 – strain hardened (for Al-Mg alloys with Mg ≥ 4%, for which limits
for mechanical properties and exfoliation corrosion resistance have been specified), H321 – strain hardened and stabilized
(¼ hardened).
Aluminium Alloys 123
Table 18.1.3-2
Extruded products (sections, bars and closed profiles)
Alloy designation 3)
Temper condition
Grade1) European designation system2)
5083 EN AW-5083 [AlMg4.5Mn0.7]
5086 EN AW-5086 [AlMg4] O, H111, H112
5383 EN AW-5383 [AlMg4.5Mn0.9]
5059 – H112
6005A EN AW-6005A [AlSiMg(A)] T5, T6
6061 EN AW-6061 [AlMg1SiCu] T6
6082 EN AW-6082 [AlSi1MgMn] T5, T6
1) Designation applied at product marking
2) Designation according to PN-EN 573-1 and PN-EN 573-2
3) H111 – annealed with slight strain hardening, T5 – cooled from hot working and artificially aged, T6 – solution heat-
treated and artificially aged. Other temper conditions as given in Table 18.1.3-1.
Note: The alloy grades 6005, 6061 shall not be used in direct contact with sea water unless protected by anodes and/or paint system.

18.1.4.1 The manufacturer is obliged to determine the chemical composition of each cast.
18.1.4.2 The chemical composition of aluminium alloys shall comply with the requirements given in
Table 18.1.4.2.
18.1.4.3 The chemical composition, determined by the manufacturer, will be accepted by PRS subject
to occasional checks if required by PRS Surveyor. In particular, product chemical analysis may be required
where the final product chemistry is not well represented by the analysis from the cast.
18.1.4.4 Where the aluminium alloys are not cast in the same works in which they are manufactured into
semi-finished products, PRS Surveyor shall be furnished by the works in question with full information on
the product, including the reference numbers and chemical composition of each heat.
Table 18.1.4.2
Chemical composition of wrought aluminium alloys1)
Other Other
Si Fe Cu Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti elements 2) elements2)
Grade
[%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] each total
[%] [%]
5083 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.4÷1.0 4.0÷4.9 0.05÷0.25 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15
5383 0.25 0.25 0.20 0.7÷1.0 4.0÷5.2 0.25 0.4 0.15 0.055) 0.155)
5059 0.45 0.50 0.25 0.6÷1.2 5.0÷6.0 0.25 0.4÷0.9 0.20 0.056) 0.156)
5086 0.40 0.50 0.10 0.2÷0.7 3.5÷4.5 0.05÷0.25 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15
5754 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.503) 2.6÷3.6 0.33) 0.20 0.15 0.05 0.15
5456 0.25 0.40 0.10 0.5÷1.0 4.7÷5.5 0.05÷0.20 0.25 0.20 0.05 0.15
6005A 0.5÷0.9 0.35 0.30 0.504) 0.4÷0.7 0.304) 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.15
6061 0.4÷0.8 0.70 0.15÷0.4 0.15 0.8÷1.2 0.04÷0.35 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15
6082 0.7÷1.3 0.50 0.10 0.4÷1.0 0.6÷1.2 0.25 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.15
2) Includes Ni, Ga, V and listed elements for which no specific limit is shown.
3) Mn + Cr : 0.10 ÷ 0.60.
4) Mn + Cr : 0.12 ÷ 0.50.
5) Zrmax = 0,20%. The total for other elements does not include zirconium.
6) Zr = 0.05 ÷ 0.25%. The total for other elements does not include zirconium.

The mechanical properties of aluminium alloys, depending on temper condition, shall comply with the
requirements given in Tables 18.1.5.1-1 and 18.1.5.1-2.
Note: Regard shall be paid to the fact that the mechanical properties of the welded joints are lower for strain hardened or heat
treated alloys, when compared with those of the parent material.
Table 18.1.5-1
Mechanical properties for rolled products with a thickness of 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm3)
Thickness Rp0.2 [MPa] min. Rm [MPa] min. A [%] min. 1, 3)

Grade Temper condition
t [mm] or range or range A50 mm A
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 125 275 ÷ 350 16 14
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 125 275 ÷ 350 16 14
5083 H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 125 275 12 10
H116 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 215 305 10 10
H321 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 215 ÷ 295 305 ÷ 385 12 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 145 290 17
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 145 290 17
5383
H116 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 220 305 10 10
H321 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 220 305 10 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 160 330 24 24
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 160 330 24 24
3 ≤ t ≤ 20 270 370 10 10
5059 H116
20 < t ≤ 50 260 360 10
3 ≤ t ≤ 20 270 370 10 10
H321
20 < t ≤ 50 260 360 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 95 240 ÷ 305 16 14
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 95 240 ÷ 305 16 14
5086 3 ≤ t ≤ 12.5 125 250 8
H112
12.5 < t ≤ 50 105 240 9
H116 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 195 275 102) 9
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 80 190 ÷ 240 18 17
5754
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 80 190 ÷ 240 18 17
3 ≤ t ≤ 6.3 130 ÷ 205 290 ÷ 365 16
O
6.3 < t ≤ 50 125 ÷ 205 285 ÷ 360 16 14
3 ≤ t ≤ 30 230 315 10 10
H116 30 < t ≤ 40 215 305 10
5456
40 < t ≤ 50 200 285 10
3 ≤ t ≤ 12.5 230 ÷ 315 315 ÷ 405 12
H321 12.5 < t ≤ 40 215 ÷ 305 305 ÷ 385 10
40 < t ≤ 50 200 ÷ 295 285 ÷ 370 10
1)Elongation A50mm applies for thickness ≤ 12.5 mm, and A for thickness over 12.5 mm.
2)8% for thickness up to and including 6.3 mm.
3) The values are applicable for both longitudinal and transverse test specimens.
Note: Although the mechanical properties of O and H111 tempers are the same, they represent different processing and dual
grade designation (i.e. O/H111) shall not be used.
Table 18.1.5-2
Mechanical properties of extruded open profiles with a thickness of 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm2
Rm A
Thickness Rp0.2 [%]
Temper [MPa]
Grade t [MPa] min. 1, 2)
condition min.
[mm] min.
or range A50 mm A
0 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 110 270-350 14 12
5083 H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 165 275 12 10
H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 110 270 12 10
0 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 145 290 17 17
5383 H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 145 290 17 17
H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 190 310 13
5059 H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 200 330 10
0 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 95 240 ÷ 315 14 12
5086 H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 145 250 12 10
H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 95 240 12 10
T5 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 215 260 9 8
6005A 3 ≤ t ≤ 10 215 260 8 6
T6
10 < t ≤ 50 200 250 8 6
6061 T6 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 240 260 10 8
T5 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 230 270 8 6
6082 3≤t≤5 250 290 6
T6
5 < t ≤ 50 260 310 10 8
1) Elongation A50mm applies for thickness ≤ 12.5 mm and A for thickness over 12.5 mm.
2) The values are applicable for both longitudinal and transverse tensile test specimens.
18.1.6 Freedom from Defects

18.1.6.1 The finished material shall have a workmanlike finish and shall be free from internal and surface
defects detrimental to its intended application.
18.1.6.2 Slight surface imperfections within dimensional tolerances may be removed by grinding
or machining.
18.1.7 Dimensional Tolerances
18.1.7.1 The underthickness tolerances of products cannot exceed the values given in Table 18.1.7.1.
Table 18.1.7.1
Underthickness tolerances for rolled products
Thickness tolerances for nominal width
Nominal thickness t [mm]
[mm]
up to 1500 from 1500 to 2000 from 2000 to 3500
3≤t<4 0.10 0.15 0.15
4≤t<8 0.20 0.20 0.25
8 ≤ t < 12 0.25 0.25 0.25
12 ≤ t < 20 0.35 0.40 0.50
20 ≤ t < 50 0.45 0.50 0.65
18.1.7.2 Dimensional tolerances other than those given in Table 18.1.7.1 shall be specially agreed with
PRS.
18.1.8 Testing and Inspection

18.1.8.1 Testing Procedures
The shape and dimensions of test specimens and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 2, this Part.
18.1.8.2 Non-Destructive Tests
Non-destructive testing of materials is not required. However, the manufacturer is expected to employ
suitable methods of non-destructive testing for the general maintenance of quality standards.
18.1.8.3 Dimensions
It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to check the materials for compliance with the requirements
specified in 18.1.7.
18.1.8.4 Verification of Proper Fusion of Press Welds for Closed Profiles
For each batch of closed profiles, the manufacturer shall demonstrate, by conducting macrosection test
or drift expansion test that there is no lack of fusion at the press welds. The drift expansion test shall be
performed in accordance with the below requirements:
.1 every fifth profile shall be tested after the final heat treatment. From batches of five profiles or less,
one profile shall be tested. Where the length of profiles exceeds 6 m, every profile shall be tested.
The number of tests may be reduced to every fifth profile if the results from the first 3÷5 profiles
are found acceptable;
.2 from each profile subjected to tests, two test specimens, cut from the front and back end of the
profile, shall be taken;
.3 the test specimens shall be cut with the ends perpendicular to the axis of the profile. The edges of
the end may be rounded by filing;
.4 the length of the test specimen shall comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 2, this Part;
.5 testing shall be performed at ambient temperature and shall consist in expanding the end of the
profile by means of hardened conical steel former having an included angle of at least 60°;
.6 the test specimen is considered to be unacceptable if clean split along the weld which confirms lack
of fusion has been stated.
18.1.8.5 Corrosion Testing
18.1.8.5.1 Wrought aluminium alloys of grades 5083, 5383, 5059, 5086 and 5456 in the H116 and H321
temper conditions intended for use in marine hull construction or in marine applications where frequent
direct contact with sea water is expected shall be corrosion tested with respect to exfoliation and
intergranular corrosion resistance.
18.1.8.5.2 The manufacturer shall establish the relationship between microstructure and resistance to
corrosion for the above listed alloys. Reference photomicrographs taken at 500x, under the conditions
specified in ASTM B928, Section 9.4.1, shall be established for each temper condition and thickness ranges.
The photographs shall be taken from test samples which have exhibited no evidence of exfoliation corrosion
and a pitting rating of PB or better, when subjected to the test described in ASTM G66 (ASSET). The test
specimens shall also exhibit resistance to intergranular corrosion at a mass loss not greater than 15 mg/cm2,
when subjected to the test described in ASTM G67 (NAMLT). Upon satisfactory establishment of the
relationship between microstructure and resistance to corrosion, the reference photomicrographs and the
results of the corrosion tests shall be submitted to PRS for approval. Production practises shall not be changed
after approval of the reference micrographs.
Other test methods may also be accepted subject to agreement with PRS.
18.1.8.5.3 For batch acceptance of 5xxx-alloys listed in 18.1.8.5.1, metallographic examination of one
test sample selected from mid width at one end of a coil, plate or section, taken at random, shall be
performed. The microstructure of the test sample shall be compared with the reference photomicrographs
of the accepted material in the presence of PRS surveyor. A longitudinal section perpendicular to the rolled
surface shall be prepared for metallographic examination, under the conditions specified in ASTM B928,
Section 9.6.1. If the microstructure shows evidence of continuous grain boundary network of Al-Mg
precipitate in excess of the reference photomicrographs of accepted material, the batch is either to be
rejected or tested in respect to exfoliation and intergranular corrosion resistance subject to the agreement
of the PRS surveyor. The corrosion tests shall be in accordance with ASTM G66 and G67 or equivalent
standards. The sample shall exhibit no evidence of exfoliation corrosion and a pitting rating of PB or better
when subjected to the test described in ASTM G66. The sample shall exhibit resistance to intergranular
corrosion at a mass loss no greater than 15 mg/cm2 when subjected to the test described in ASTM G67. If
the results from testing satisfy the acceptance criteria stated above, the batch is accepted, else it shall be
rejected.
18.1.8.5.4 As an alternative to metallographic examination, each batch may be tested for exfoliation
corrosion resistance and intergranular corrosion resistance, in accordance with ASTM G66 and G67 under
the conditions specified in ASTM B928, or equivalent standards. If this alternative is used, then the results
of the test must satisfy the acceptance criteria stated in 18.1.8.5.3.
18.1.9 Test Materials
18.1.9.1 Definition of a Batch
A batch consists of products:
– of the same alloy grade and from the same cast,
– of the same product form and similar dimensions (in the case of plates – the same thickness),
– manufactured by the same process,
– having been submitted simultaneously to the same temper condition.
18.1.9.2 Location of Test Specimens
Test specimens shall be taken as follows:
– at one third of the width from a longitudinal edge of rolled products;
– in the range 1/3 to 1/2 of the distance from the edge to the centre of the thickest part of extruded products.
18.1.9.3 Orientation of Test Specimens
.1 Rolled products
In general, transverse test specimens are required. If the product width is insufficient to provide
transverse specimens or in the case of strain hardening alloys, longitudinal test specimens will be
permitted.
.2 Extruded products
From extruded products, longitudinal test specimens shall be taken.
18.1.9.4 After cutting test specimens from the product, each test specimen shall be clearly marked,
having regard to its location and orientation.
18.1.10 Tensile Test Specimens
18.1.10.1 The type and location of tensile test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Chapter 2, this Part.
18.1.11 Number of Test Specimens

18.1.11.1 Number of Tensile Test Specimens
.1 Rolled products
One tensile test specimen shall be taken from each batch of the product. If the weight of one
batch exceeds 2000 kg, one extra tensile test specimen shall be taken from every 2000 kg of the
product or fraction thereof, in each batch. For single plates or for coils weighing more than 2000 kg
each, only one tensile test specimen per plate or coil shall be taken.
.2 Extruded products
For the products with a nominal weight of less than 1 kg/m, one tensile test specimen shall be
taken from each 1000 kg, or fraction thereof, in each batch.
For nominal weights between 1 and 5 kg/m, one tensile test specimen shall be taken from each
2000 kg or fraction hereof, in each batch.
If the nominal weight exceeds 5 kg/m, one tensile test specimen shall be taken for each 3000 kg
of the product or fraction thereof, in each batch.
18.1.11.2 Verification of Proper Fusion of Press Welds
For closed profiles, verification of proper fusion of press welds shall be performed on each batch in
accordance with the requirements of paragraph 18.1.8.4.
18.1.11.3 Corrosion Tests
For rolled products of grades 5083, 5383, 5059, 5086 and 5456 delivered in the tempers H116 or H321
temper conditions, one test sample shall be tested per batch.
18.1.12 Re-tests
18.1.12.1 When the tensile test on the first test sample selected in accordance with 18.1.11 fails to meet
the requirements of the Rules, two further tests of the same test sample shall be performed. If both of these
additional tests comply with the requirements of the Rules, this test sample and the remaining test samples
from the same batch may be accepted.
18.1.12.2 If one or both additional tests do not comply with the requirements of the Rules, the test
sample shall be rejected, but the remaining material from the same batch may be accepted, provided that
two of the remaining test pieces in the batch selected in the same way, are tested with satisfactory results.
If unsatisfactory results are obtained from either of these two test pieces then the batch of material shall be
rejected.
18.1.12.3 In the event of any material bearing PRS mark failing to comply with the requirements of the
Rules, the mark shall be removed by the manufacturer.
18.1.13 Marking
18.1.13.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification, which will enable all aluminium alloy
products to be traced back to the original ladle of metal. PRS Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing
the products when required.
18.1.13.2 The products shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this
Part. Additionally, the products subjected to corrosion testing in accordance with 18.1.8.5 shall be marked
with the letter “M”, put after the temper condition designation, e.g. 5083 H321 M.
For each accepted batch of aluminium alloy products, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in
accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.8, this Part.
18.2 Aluminium Alloy Castings

18.2.1.1 The requirements of sub-chapter 18.2 apply to parts and structures of aluminium alloy castings
used in hull structure or ship machinery subject to PRS survey.
18.2.1.2 Castings shall be made at manufacturers approved by PRS and according to manufacturing
process agreed with PRS.
18.2.1.3 All castings shall be free from internal defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
application in service. The surface finish shall be in accordance with good practice and requirements specified
in the approved quality plan.
18.2.1.4 The designation of aluminium alloy temper (delivery heat treatment) defined in the present sub-
chapter as “temper condition” shall be in accordance with PN-EN 515.
18.2.2 Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties
18.2.2.1 The chemical composition and mechanical properties of aluminium alloy castings shall comply
with the requirements of Table 18.2.2.1.
18.2.2.2 The values of mechanical properties, given in Table 18.2.2.1, apply to sand castings. When
metal mould or pressure casting is used, higher values of mechanical properties may be required by PRS.
In this case, the required mechanical properties and sampling procedure shall be agreed with PRS.
18.2.2.3 The use of alloys with chemical composition and mechanical properties differing from those
given in Table 18.2.2.1 shall be specially agreed with PRS. For alloys having a modified chemical
composition, PRS may require a check of corrosion resistance to be made.
Table 18.2.2.1
Chemical composition and mechanical properties of aluminium alloy castings
Mechanical properties 3)
Grade Chemical composition 1)
Temper Rp0,2 Rm A HB
(European designation (basic elements)
condition 2) [MPa] [MPa] [%] (approx.
system) [%]
min. min. min. values)
Mg = 4.5-6.5
AlMg5(Si) Si ≤ 1.5
F 100 160 3 60
(EN AC- 51400) Mn ≤ 0.45
Al the remainder
Mg = 8-10,5
AlMg9 Si ≤ 2.5
T4 170 280 8 70
(EN AC- 51200) Fe ≤ 1
Al the remainder
Si = 9-10 F 90 170 2 55
AlSi9Mg Mg = 0.25-0.45 T6 190 230 2 75
(EN AC-43300) Mn ≤ 0,1
Al the remainder
Si = 10-11.8 F 70 150 6 45
AlSi11 Mg ≤ 0.45
T6 – 180 6 50
(EN AC-44000) Mn ≤ 0.1
Al the remainder
Notes:
1) The permissible content of impurities shall be taken according to recognized standards, e.g. PN-EN 1706.
2) F – as manufactured, T4 – solution heat-treated and naturally aged, T6 – solution heat-treated and artificially aged.
3) Mechanical properties determined on separately cast specimens.
18.2.3 Temper Condition

18.2.3.1 If aluminium alloy castings shall be heat treated, the type of heat treatment shall be determined
by the manufacturer and recorded in Inspection Certificate.
18.2.3.2 Temper conditions for aluminium alloy castings are given in Table 18.2.2.1.
18.2.4 Tests
18.2.4.1 The type and scope of tests of aluminium alloy castings shall be determined according to Table
18.2.4.1.
Test samples may be cast directly on castings or may be cast separately.
Table 18.2.4.1
Scope of tests for aluminium alloy castings
Test Scope of tests
Intended application Examples of application Type of tests
group Batch size Number of tests
Castings subject to loads Parts of internal combustion Determination of
per cast
I and exposed to corrosion engines, pumps, compressors, chemical composition
fans, valves Tensile test 1 cast 2
Parts operating at high Pistons of internal combustion Determination of
per cast
temperature and exposed to engines, compressors chemical composition
II lubricating and fuel oils, Tensile test 1 cast 1
etc. Hardness test each product 1
18.2.4.2 The sample thickness shall not be less than the minimum wall thickness of the casting. Where
possible, the cooling of the samples shall be done in conditions similar to the cooling of castings. In the case
of castings for parts operating under high loads, the thickness of the samples shall not be less than the
thickness of the highest loaded wall of the part and shall be indicated in the drawing.
Where samples shall be taken directly from cast, the scope of the tests shall be agreed with PRS.
18.2.4.3 Tensile tests shall be conducted to determine proof stress, tensile strength and elongation.
Subject to agreement with PRS, the yield stress determination may be omitted. Where castings for small-
size pistons are tested, PRS may also omit the tensile test and be satisfied with hardness determination.
Castings shall be submitted for inspection in cleaned condition, with gating system, heads and burrs
removed. The surfaces shall not be hammered or treated in any way which may obscure defects.
Before acceptance, all castings shall be visually examined by PRS Surveyor. Where practicable, the visual
examination shall include inspection of internal surfaces. Unless agreed otherwise, the verification
of dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
Castings to be used for the manufacture of items operating at high loads shall be subjected, at the request
of PRS Surveyor, to non-destructive tests.
Where required by the Rules, castings shall be pressure tested before the final acceptance. These tests
shall be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor. The casting drawing shall contain information of the
working pressure in the tested cavity and the test pressure.
In the event of any casting proving defective during subsequent machining or testing, it shall be
18.2.6 Repair of Defective Castings
18.2.6.1 General Requirements
The procedure of defective castings repair shall be agreed with PRS. The procedure of defect removal
and weld repair shall be in accordance with Chapter 23, this Part. The defects shall be removed in such
a way as to enable the proper welding procedure to be used. The resulting grooves shall be subsequently
ground smooth after complete elimination of the defective material and verified by non-destructive tests.
The manufacturer shall maintain full records of repairs and subsequent non-destructive tests traceable
to each repaired casting. These records shall be available to PRS Surveyor, on request.
18.2.6.2 Weld Repairs

If it has been agreed between the manufacturer and PRS that a casting can be repaired by welding, the
requirements specified in Chapter 23, this Part shall be complied with.
The welding procedure shall be tested by the manufacturer to demonstrate that satisfactory mechanical
properties can be obtained after heat treatment specified in 18.2.3.
18.2.7 Marking
18.2.7.1 The manufacturer shall adopt a system of identification, which will enable all finished castings
to be traced to the original ladle of metal. PRS Surveyor shall be given full facilities for so tracing the
castings when required.
18.2.7.2 Castings shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this Part.
18.2.7.3 Where small castings are manufactured in large numbers, modified arrangements for identification
For accepted aluminium alloy castings, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the
requirements of sub-chapter 1.8, this Part. In addition to particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8, this Part,
Inspection Certificate shall contain the following information:
.2 details of heat treatment, including temperatures and holding times,
.3 pressure test results, where applicable.
19 REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURE OF ANCHORS

19.1.1 Application
19.1.1.1 The requirements of the present Chapter apply to materials, manufacture, tests and acceptance
of anchors, shanks and anchor shackles produced from cast or forged steel, or fabricated by welded rolled
steel plates and bars.
19.1.1.2 Any changes to the design and manufacturing process shall be agreed with PRS.
19.1.2 Anchor Types
With regard to holding power at sea, the types of anchors covered include (refer to Part III – Hull
Equipment):
.1 ordinary anchors:
– stockless Hall anchor,
– Admiralty type anchor,
.2 high holding power (HHP) anchors;
.3 super high holding power (SHHP) anchors.
19.2 Materials
19.2.1 Materials for Anchors
Anchors shall be manufactured from materials meeting the requirements of the present Part of the Rules,
as indicated below:
.1 cast steel anchor flukes, shanks, swivels and shackles shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 13, this Part and comply with the
requirements for castings of welded construction. The steel shall be fine grain treated with
aluminium. The use of other grades of steels for the manufacture of swivels shall be specially
agreed with PRS;
.2 forged steel anchor pins, shanks, swivels and shackles shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
with the requirements specified in Chapter 12, this Part. Shanks, swivels and shackles shall comply
with the requirements for carbon and carbon-manganese steels for welded construction. The use
of other grades of steels for the manufacture of swivels shall be specially agreed with PRS;
.3 rolled billets, plates and bars for anchors fabrication shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
with the requirements specified in Chapter 3, this Part;
.4 rolled bars intended for pins, swivels and shackles shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 3, this Part.
19.2.2 Materials for Super High Holding Power (SHHP) Anchors
19.2.2.1 In addition to the requirements specified in sub-chapter 19.2.1, SHHP anchors shall be
produced in accordance with the material toughness requirements specified below.
19.2.2.2 The base steel grades in welded SHHP anchors shall be selected in accordance with the
requirements specified in Part II – Hull for hull members of class II. The welding consumables shall satisfy
the toughness for the base steel grades in accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 24, this Part.
The toughness of the anchor shackles for SHHP anchors shall meet that for grade 3 anchor chain in
accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 20, this Part. The toughness of steel castings for SHHP
anchors shall be not less than a Charpy V-notch energy average of 27 J at the temperature of 0°C.
Requirements for Manufacture of Anchors 133
19.3 Manufacture of Anchors

19.3.1 Tolerance
19.3.1.1 The clearance on either side of the shank within the shackle jaws shall be not more than 3 mm
for small anchors up to 3 tonnes weight, 4 mm for anchorsup to 5 tonnes weight, 6 mm for anchors up to
7 tonnes weight and shall not exceed 12 mm for larger anchors.
19.3.1.2 The shackle pin shall be a push fit in the eyes of the shackle, which shall be chamfered on the
outside to ensure good tightness when the pin is clenched over on fitting. The shackle pin to hole tolerance
shall be not more than 0.5 mm for pins up to 57 mm and 1.0 mm for pins of larger diameter.
19.3.1.3 The lateral movement of the shank shall not exceed 3 degrees (Fig. 19.3.1.3).
Fig. 19.3.1.3. Allowable lateral movement of shank
19.3.2 Welding of Anchors

Welded construction of fabricated anchors shall be made in accordance with the welding procedure
specification approved by PRS. Welding shall be performed by the manufacturer approved by PRS.
Welders shall hold valid PRS qualification test certificates; the welding consumables used shall be
approved by PRS. Non-destructive tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified
in sub-chapter 19.4.2.
19.3.3 Heat Treatment
19.3.3.1 Components for cast or forged anchors shall be properly heat treated, i.e. fully annealed,
normalized or normalized and tempered in accordance with the requirements specified in Chapters 12
and 13, this Part.
19.3.3.2 Fabricated anchors may require stress relieving after welding depending on the weld thickness.
Stress relieving shall be performed as indicated in the approved welding procedure specification. Stress
relieving temperatures shall not exceed the tempering temperature of the parent material.

All parts shall have a clean surface and be free from cracks, notches, inclusions and other defects that
would impair the performance of the product.
19.3.5 Repairs
Any necessary repairs to forged and cast anchors shall be accepted by PRS Surveyor and performed in
accordance with the repair criteria indicated in Chapters 12 and 13, this Part. Repairs to fabricated anchors
shall be accepted by PRS Surveyor and shall be performed in accordance with welding procedure
specification agreed with PRS, following the parameters of the welding procedures used in construction.
19.3.6 Anchor Assembly
Anchor assembly and fitting shall be made in accordance with the design details. Securing of the anchor
pin, shackle pin or swivel nut by welding shall be made in accordance with the agreed procedure.
19.4 Testing and Certification

19.4.1 Proof Load Test
Proof load tests shall be performed by an approved testing facility. Proof load testing for anchors shall
be performed in accordance with the requirements specified below considering the anchor type.
19.4.1.1 Testing of Ordinary Anchors
.1 The proof load, as per Table 19.4.1.1, shall be applied on the arm or on the palm at a spot which,
measured from the extremity of the bill, is one-third of the distance between the bill and the centre
of the crown as shown in Figs. 19.4.1.1-1 and 19.4.1.1-2.
Fig. 19.4.1.1-1. Stockless Hall anchor
Gauge length
Fig. 19.4.1.1-2. Admiralty type anchor
In the case of stockless anchors, both arms shall be tested at the same time, first on one side of
the shank, then reversed and tested on the other.
.2 Anchors of all sizes shall be proof load tested with the test loads specified in Table 19.4.1.1.
.3 Before application of proof test load, the cast anchors shall be carefully examined to be sure that
castings are reasonably free of surface imperfections of harmful nature. After proof load testing,
the anchors shall be examined for cracks and other defects. Additionally, stockless anchors shall
 45−1 
+3
be examined for rotation of their heads over the complete angle   . In every test, the
difference between the gauge lengths (see Figs. 19.4.1.1-1 and 19.4.1.1-2) where one-tenth of the
required load was applied first and where the load has been reduced to one-tenth of the required
load from the full load shall not exceed 1%.
Table 19.4.1.1
Proof load tests for anchors
Mass Proof test Mass Proof test Mass Proof test Mass Proof test
of anchor load of anchor load of anchor load of anchor load
[kg] [kN] [kg] [kN] [kg] [kN] [kg] [kN]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
50 23.2 1250 239 5000 661 12500 1130
55 25.2 1300 247 5100 669 13000 1160
60 27.1 1350 255 5200 677 13500 1180
65 28.9 1400 262 5300 685 14000 1210
70 30.7 1450 270 5400 691 14500 1230
75 32.4 1500 278 5500 699 15000 1260
80 33.9 1600 292 5600 706 15500 1270
90 36.3 1700 307 5700 713 16000 1300
100 39.1 1800 321 5800 721 16500 1330
120 44.3 1900 335 5900 728 17000 1360
140 49.0 2000 349 6000 735 17500 1390
160 53.3 2100 362 6100 740 18000 1410
180 57.4 2200 376 6200 747 18500 1440
200 61.3 2300 388 6300 754 19000 1470
225 65.8 2400 401 6400 760 19500 1490
250 70.4 2500 414 6500 767 20000 1520
275 74.9 2600 427 6600 773 21000 1570
300 79.5 2700 438 6700 779 22000 1620
325 84.1 2800 450 6800 786 23000 1670
350 88.8 2900 462 6900 794 24000 1720
375 93.4 3000 474 7000 804 25000 1770
400 97.9 3100 484 7200 818 26000 1800
425 103 3200 495 7400 832 27000 1850
450 107 3300 506 7600 845 28000 1900
475 112 3400 517 7800 861 29000 1940
500 116 3500 528 8000 877 30000 1990
550 124 3600 537 8200 892 31000 2030
600 132 3700 547 8400 908 32000 2070
650 140 3800 557 8600 922 34000 2160
700 149 3900 567 8800 936 36000 2250
750 158 4000 577 9000 949 38000 2330
800 166 4100 586 9200 961 40000 2410
850 175 4200 595 9400 975 42000 2490
900 182 4300 604 9600 987 44000 2570
950 191 4400 613 9800 998 46000 2650
1000 199 4500 622 10000 1010 48000 2730
1050 208 4600 631 10500 1040
1100 216 4700 638 11000 1070
1150 224 4800 645 11500 1090
1200 231 4900 653 12000 1110
Proof loads for intermediate mass shall be determined by linear interpolation.
19.4.1.2 Testing of High Holding Power (HHP) Anchors

The HHP anchor shall be proof load tested with the load required by Table 19.4.1.1 for an anchor mass
increased by 33%, i.e. equal to 1.33 times the actual mass of the HHP anchor. The proof load test procedure
and examination procedure for HHP anchors shall comply with those for ordinary anchors specified in
sub-chapter 19.4.1.1.
19.4.1.3 Testing of Super High Holding Power (SHHP) Anchors

.1 Anchor proof load test
The SHHP anchor shall be proof load tested with the load required by Table 19.4.1.1 for an
anchor mass increased by 100%, i.e. equal to 2 times the actual mass of the SHHP anchor. The
proof load test procedure and examination procedure for SHHP anchors shall comply with those
for ordinary anchors.
.2Anchor inspections and additional tests
After the proof load test, all SHHP anchors shall be surface inspected by the dye penetrant
method or by the magnetic particle method.
All surfaces of cast anchors shall be surface inspected. The criteria for assessment of the casting
surface defects shall be specially agreed with PRS in each particular case.
Each cast anchor shall be examined by ultrasonic tests in way of areas where feeder heads and
risers have been removed and where weld repairs have been performed. Ultrasonic tests and the
criteria for assessment of defects shall be specially agreed with PRS. Welded anchors shall be
inspected at the welds.
In justified cases, at sections of high load or at suspect areas, PRS may require volumetric non-
destructive examination; e.g. ultrasonic test or radiographic test to be performed.
PRS Surveyor may require additional tests of the anchor, e.g. the hammering test and the drop test of
cast anchors to be performed.
19.4.2 Product Tests
19.4.2.1 Product Test Programmes
PRS may request that either programme A or programme B shall be applied.
Table 19.4.2.1-1
Applicable programmes for each product form
Product form
Item Product test
Cast components Forged components Fabricated/welded components
1 Programme A Applicable Not applicable Not applicable
2 Programme B Applicable 1) Applicable Applicable
1) Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be performed to demonstrate at least 27 J average at 0°C.
Table 19.4.2.1-2
Product test requirements for programmes A and B
Programme A Programme B
Drop test –
Hammering test –
Visual inspection Visual inspection
General non-destructive tests General non-destructive tests
– Extended non-destructive tests
The scope of general and extended non-destructive tests, depending on the anchor type, is given in
Tables 19.4.2.5-1, 19.4.2.5-2 and 19.4.2.6.
19.4.2.2 Drop Test
Each anchor component (fluke and shank) is individually raised to a height of 4 m and dropped on to
a steel slab. The steel slab shall be suitable to resist the impact of the dropped component.
19.4.2.3 Hammering Test

After the drop test, hammering tests are performed on each anchor component (fluke and shank) which
is slung clear of the ground, using a non-metallic sling, and hammered to check the soundness of the
component. A hammer of at least 3 kg mass shall be used.
19.4.2.4 Visual Examination
After the proof load test, visual examination of all accessible surfaces shall be performed. Inspected
components shall be free from cracks.
19.4.2.5 General Non-destructive Tests
After the proof load test, general non-destructive tests shall be performed as indicated in Tables
19.4.2.5-1 and 19.4.2.5-2.
Table 19.4.2.5-1
Scope of general NDT for ordinary and high holding power (HHP) anchors
Item Location NDT method
1 Castings PT or MT
2 Weld repairs PT or MT
3 Forged components Not applicable
4 Fabrication welds PT or MT
Table 19.4.2.5-2
Scope of general NDT for SHHP anchors
1 Castings PT or MT and UT
2 All surfaces of castings PT or MT
19.4.2.6 Extended Non-destructive Tests

After the drop test, extended NDT shall be performed as specified in Table 19.4.2.6.
Table 19.4.2.6
Extended NDT for ordinary, high holding power (HHP)
and super high holding power (SHHP) anchors
1 Castings PT or MT and UT
2 All surfaces of castings PT or MT
3 Random areas of castings UT
19.4.2.7 Repair criteria

If defects are detected by non-destructive tests, repairs shall be performed in accordance with para.
19.3.5. For fracture and unsoundness detected in drop test or hammering test, repairs are not permitted and
the component shall be rejected.
19.4.3 Mass and Dimensional Inspection

Unless agreed otherwise, the verification of mass and dimensions is the responsibility of the
manufacturer. The procedure of mass and dimensional inspection shall be agreed with PRS Surveyor. The
mass of the anchor shall exclude the mass of the swivel, unless this is an integral component.
19.4.4 Re-tests
The requirements concerning re-tests are specified in sub-chapter 2.3, this Part.
19.4.5 Marking
19.4.5.1 Anchors shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this Part,
having regard to the below requirements.
19.4.5.2 Admiralty type anchors and anchors with solid arms shall be marked on the anchor shank, close
to the connection with the arms.
19.4.5.3 The marks shall be struck (drawn or cast) on a special projection or framed, e.g. with a sett.
19.4.5.4 Anchors with movable arms which meet the requirements of the Rules shall be stamped on the
shank and each fluke. On the fluke, these markings shall be approximately at a distance of two-thirds from
the tip of the bill to the centre line of the crown on the right hand fluke looking from the crown towards
the shank.
19.4.5.5 Additionally, the unique cast identification shall be cast on the shank and the fluke.
For accepted anchors, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements of
sub-chapter 1.8, this Part. In addition to particulars specified in sub-chapter 1.8, this Part, Inspection
.1 anchor type,
.2 proof test loads,
.3 details of heat treatment,
.4 marking (drawn or cast ) applied to anchor.
19.4.7 Painting
Anchors (all types) shall not be painted until all tests and inspections have been completed.
Anchor Chain Cables and Accessories 139
20 ANCHOR CHAIN CABLES AND ACCESSORIES

20.1.1 Scope
20.1.1.1 The requirements of the present Chapter apply to materials, design, manufacture and tests
of anchor chain cables and accessories used for ships classified by PRS.
20.1.1.2 Where studless short link chain cables are used with the consent of PRS, they shall comply with
recognized standards or material specifications agreed with PRS.
20.1.1.3 The requirements concerning chafing chain for Emergency Towing Arrangements (ETA) are
given in sub-chapter 20.6.
20.1.2 Chain Cables Grades
Depending on the nominal tensile strength of the chain cable steel used for manufacture, stud link chain
cables are divided into Grades 1, 2 and 3, while studless short link chain cables – into Grades 1 and 2. The
values of Rm for these grades are given in sub-chapter 11.5, this Part.
20.1.3 Approval of Chain Manufacturer
Anchor chain cables and accessories shall be manufactured by works approved by PRS.
20.2 Materials
20.2.1 Scope
The requirements of sub-chapter 20.2 apply to rolled steels, forgings and castings used for the
manufacture of anchor chain cables and accessories.
20.2.2 Requirements for Material Manufacturers
20.2.2.1 All materials used for the manufacture of anchor chain cables and accessories shall be supplied
by manufacturers approved by PRS. Approval is not required for Grade 1 steel bars.
20.2.2.2 Materials suppliers or chain cable manufacturers shall submit, for information, specification for
Grade 3 steel bars. The specification shall contain such data as manufacturing process, deoxydation
practice, chemical composition, heat treatment, mechanical properties, etc.
20.2.3 Rolled Steel Bars
Rolled steel bars used for the manufacture of chain cables and accessories shall comply with the
requirements given in Chapter 11, this Part.
20.2.4 Steel Forgings
20.2.4.1 Unless provided otherwise in the present Chapter, steel forgings used for the manufacture
of chain cables and accessories shall comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 12, this Part.
20.2.4.2 The chemical composition shall comply with the specification approved by PRS. The steel
manufacturer shall determine the chemical composition of every heat of material.
20.2.4.3 The stock material shall be supplied in the as rolled condition. Finished forgings shall be
properly heat treated, i.e. normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched and tempered, whichever is
specified for the relevant steel grade in Table 20.3.5.1.
20.2.5 Steel Castings
20.2.5.1 Unless provided otherwise in the present Chapter, steel castings used for the manufacture
of chain cables and accessories shall comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 13, this Part.
20.2.5.2 The chemical composition shall comply with the specification approved by PRS. The foundry shall
determine the chemical composition of every heat of material.
20.2.5.3 All castings shall be properly heat treated, i.e. normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched
and tempered, whichever is specified for the relevant cast steel grade in Table 20.3.5.1.
20.2.6 Materials for Studs
20.2.6.1 The studs shall be made from rolled, cast or forged steel or of steel corresponding to that of the
chain cable.
20.2.6.2 The use of other materials, e.g. grey or nodular cast iron is not permitted.
20.3 Design and Manufacture of Chain Cables and Accessories
20.3.1 Design
20.3.1.1 Chain cables shall be manufactured according to relevant standards, e.g. PN-ISO 1704. Typical
chain cable designs are given in Figs. 20.3.1-1 to 20.3.1-7. The dimensions, given in the figures, are
a multiple of the nominal diameter of the common link.
The dimensions, given in brackets, apply to end swivel and studless link connected with the swivel.
1.1
4
6.6
4.4
1.4
3
Fig. 20.3.1.1-1. Common link Fig. 20.3.1.1-2. Enlarged link
Fig. 20.3.1.1-3. Studless link Fig. 20.3.1.1-4. Kenter shackle
Fig. 20.3.1.1-5. Joining shackle Fig. 20.3.1.1-6. End shackle

4.7
3.4 φ2
1.2
1.4
3.3
7.4
9.7
(3.3)
1.75
3.1
1.25
1.1
(1.45)
Fig. 20.3.1.1-7. Swivel
20.3.1.2 A length of chain cable shall consist of an odd number of links. Where the chain design does not
comply with the above requirements and where accessories are of welded construction, drawings giving full
details of the manufacturing process, including heat treatment shall be submitted to PRS for approval.
20.3.2 Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
20.3.2.1 The shape and dimensions of links and accessories shall comply with PN-ISO 1704 or technical
documentation approved by PRS.
20.3.2.2 Dimension tolerances of the link nominal diameter, measured at the crown, shall not exceed the
Table 20.3.2.2
Nominal diameter, d Negative dimension tolerances The plus dimension tolerance
[mm] [mm] [mm]
d ≤ 40 –1
40 < d ≤ 84 –2
5% d
84 < d ≤ 122 –3
d > 122 –4
20.3.2.3 The cross-sectional area of the crown shall have no negative tolerance. Dimension tolerances
of the weld diameter shall comply with the manufacturer’s specification agreed with PRS.
Dimension tolerance of the link diameter, measured at locations other than the crown, shall be within
(0 ÷ 5%)d.
20.3.2.4 The maximum allowable tolerance on assembly, measured over a length of 5 links, with the
chain cable under tension after the proof load test, shall be within 0%,+2.5%.
20.3.2.5 All other dimensions are subject to a manufacturing tolerance ±2.5%, provided that all of the
final link parts of the chain cable fit together properly.
20.3.2.6 Studs shall be located in the links centrally and at right angles to the sides of the link. The studs
of the final link at each end of any length may also be located off-centre to facilitate the insertion of the
joining shackle.
The following tolerances are regarded as being inherent in the method of manufacture and will not be
objected to, provided that the stud fits snugly and its ends lie practically flush against the inside of the link
(see Fig. 20.3.2.6):
X – off-centre distance: maximum 10% of the nominal diameter d;
α – deviation: maximum 4°.
d
A−a
X =
α 2
Fig. 20.3.2.6. Stud location in the link
20.3.2.7 The following tolerances are applicable to accessories:

– nominal diameter: 0%,+5%,
– other dimensions: ±2.5%.
20.3.3 Manufacturing Process
20.3.3.1 Stud link chain cables shall be manufactured by flash butt welding method from Grade 1, 2 or 3
steel bars.
Manufacture of the links by drop forging or steel casting is permitted. Studless Grade 1 and 2 link chain
cables with the nominal diameter not exceeding 26 mm may be manufactured by pressure butt welding.
20.3.3.2 Accessories such as shackles, swivels and swivel shackles shall be forged or cast in steel of at
least Grade 2, but not lower than the steel grade from which the chain was made.
Subject to PRS consent, the above accessories may be of welded construction.
20.3.4 The Welding of Studs
The welding of studs shall be in accordance with an approved, by PRS, procedure, having regard to the
following conditions:
– the studs shall be made of weldable unalloyed steel;
– the studs shall be welded at one end only, i.e. opposite to the weldment of the link. The stud ends must
fit the inside of the link without appreciable gap;
– the welds shall be performed in the downhand position, by qualified welders using suitable welding
consumables;
– all welds shall be performed before the final heat treatment of the chain cable;
– the welds shall be free from defects liable to impair the proper use of the chain.
Undercuts, end craters and similar defects shall, where necessary, be ground off. PRS may require that the
tests of welding chain studs should be performed to ascertain that the proposed welding technique is suitable.
20.3.5.1 Depending on the steel grade, chain cables and accessories shall be supplied in one of the
conditions specified in Table 20.3.5.1.
Table 20.3.5.1
Supply condition of chain cables and accessories
Grade Chain cable Accessories
1 As welded or normalized –
2 As welded or normalized 1) Normalized
3 Normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched Normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched
and tempered and tempered
Note:
1) Grade 2 chain cables made by forging or casting shall be supplied in the normalized condition.
20.3.5.2 The heat treatment of chain cables and accessories shall be performed in each case before the
chain tests.
20.3.5.3 The mechanical properties of finished chain cables and accessories shall comply with Table
20.4.3.3.

20.3.6.1 All individual parts of the chain cable shall have a clean surface consistent with the method
of manufacture and shall be free from cracks, notches, inclusions and other defects impairing the
performance of the product. The flashes produced by upsetting or drop forging shall be properly removed.
20.3.6.2 Minor surface defects may be ground off so as to leave a gentle transition to the surrounding
surface. Remote from the crown local grinding up to 5% of the nominal link diameter may be permitted.
20.4 Testing and Inspection Certificate of Finished Chain Cables
20.4.1 Proof and Breaking Load Tests
20.4.1.1 The finished chain cables shall be subjected to the proof load test and the breaking load test in
the presence of PRS Surveyor. The chain cables shall not fracture or exhibit cracking during the tests.
Special attention shall be given to the inspection of the flash-butt weld, if present. For this purpose, the
chain cables shall be free from paint and anti-corrosion media.
20.4.1.2 Each chain cable (27.5 m) shall be subjected to a proof load test using an approved testing
machine.
20.4.1.3 The design and/or standard breaking loads (BL) and proof loads (PL) of stud link chain cables
are given in Table 20.4.1.3-1 for the chain diameter, d, in mm. The test load values, rounded off from the
loads above to be used for testing and acceptance of chain cables, are given in Table 20.4.1.3-2.
Table 20.4.1.3-1
Breaking loads and proof loads of stud link chain cables
Test Grade 1 chain Grade 2 chain Grade 3 chain
Breaking load [kN] BL1 = 9,80665 ⋅ 10-3 ⋅ d2 (44–0.08⋅d) BL2 = 1.4 BL1 BL3 = 2 BL1
Proof load [kN] PL1 = 0.7 BL1 PL2 = BL1 PL3 = 1.4 BL1
Note: d – nominal diameter, [mm].
Table 20.4.1.3-2
Test load values for stud link chain cables
Chain cable Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
diameter Proof load Breaking load Proof load Breaking load Proof load Breaking load
[mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
11 1) 35.8 51 51 71.7 71.7 102
1)
12.5 46 65.7 65.7 92 92 132
1)
14 57.9 82 82 116 116 165
1)
16 75.5 107 107 150 150 216
17.5 1) 89 127 127 179 179 256
19 1) 105 150 150 211 211 301
20.5 123 175 175 244 244 349
22 140 200 200 280 280 401
24 167 237 237 332 332 476
26 194 278 278 389 389 556
28 225 321 321 449 449 642
30 257 368 368 514 514 735
32 291 417 417 583 583 833
34 328 468 468 655 655 937
36 366 523 523 732 732 1050

38 406 581 581 812 812 1160
40 448 640 640 896 896 1280
42 492 703 703 981 981 1400
44 583 769 769 1080 1080 1540
46 585 837 837 1170 1170 1680
48 635 908 908 1270 1270 1810
50 686 981 981 1370 1370 1960
52 739 1060 1060 1480 1480 2110
54 794 1140 1140 1590 1590 2270
56 851 1220 1220 1710 1710 2430
58 909 1290 1290 1810 1810 2600
60 969 1380 1380 1940 1940 2770
62 1030 1470 1470 2060 2060 2940
64 1100 1560 1560 2190 2190 3130
66 1160 1660 1660 2310 2310 3300
68 1230 1750 1750 2450 2450 3500
70 1290 1840 1840 2580 2580 3690
73 1390 1990 1990 2790 2790 3990
76 1500 2150 2150 3010 3010 4300
78 1580 2260 2260 3160 3160 4500
81 1690 2410 2410 3380 3380 4820
84 1800 2580 2580 3610 3610 5160
87 1920 2750 2750 3850 3850 5500
90 2050 2920 2920 4090 4090 5840
92 2130 3040 3040 4260 4260 6080
95 2260 3230 3230 4510 4510 6440
97 2340 3340 3340 4680 4680 6690
100 2470 3530 3530 4940 4940 7060
102 2560 3660 3660 5120 5120 7320
105 2700 3850 3850 5390 5390 7700
107 2790 3980 3980 5570 5570 7960
111 2970 4250 4250 5940 5940 8480
114 3110 4440 4440 6230 6230 8890
117 3260 4650 4650 6510 6510 9300
120 3400 4850 4850 6810 6810 9720
122 3500 5000 5000 7000 7000 9990
124 3600 5140 5140 7200 7200 10280
127 3750 5350 5350 7490 7490 10710
130 3900 5570 5570 7800 7800 11140
132 4000 5720 5720 8000 8000 11420
137 4260 6080 6080 8510 8510 12160
142 4520 6450 6450 9030 9030 12910
147 4790 6840 6840 9560 9560 13660
152 5050 7220 7220 10100 10100 14430

157 5320 7600 7600 10640 10640 15200
162 5590 7990 7990 11170 11170 15970
1) Anchor chain cable diameters below 20.5 mm apply to ships with equipment number EN below 250.
20.4.1.4 The breaking load shall be determined on three links – in the case of stud link chain cable or five
links – in the case of studless link chain cable. The links concerned shall be made in a single manufacturing
cycle, together with the chain cable and shall be welded and heat treated with it. Only after this they may
be separated from the chain cable in the presence of PRS Surveyor. The breaking load shall be in
accordance with Tables 20.4.1.3-1 and 20.4.1.3-2. The breaking load shall be maintained for a minimum
of 30 seconds.
20.4.1.5 Where the required breaking load for large diameter cables is greater than the capacity of the
testing machine – the type and scope of alternative testing methods shall be specially agreed with PRS.
20.4.2 Re-tests
20.4.2.1 Where the breaking load test on three link specimen fails, a further specimen may be taken from
the same length of chain cable and tested. If the re-test fails, the length of the chain cable shall be rejected.
If the manufacturer so wishes, additional three link specimens may be taken from the remaining lengths
and subjected to breaking test. If one such test fails, the entire set of lengths shall be rejected.
20.4.2.2 Where the proof load test fails, the defective links shall be replaced, the new links being
subjected to local heat treatment. The chain cable length shall be subjected to a further proof load test.
An investigation shall be also made to identify the cause of the failure.
20.4.3 Mechanical Tests of Grade 2 and 3 Chain Cables
20.4.3.1 For Grade 2 and 3 chain cables, mechanical test specimens as required in Table 20.4.3.1 shall
be taken from every fourth length. For forged or cast chain cables where the batch size is less than four
lengths, the sampling frequency will be by heat and heat treatment charge. Mechanical tests shall be
performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor. Location of the test specimens is given in Fig. 11.6.3,
this Part. The tests shall be performed in accordance with sub-chapter 11.6, this Part. Re-tests shall be
in accordance with 11.6.4, this Part.
Table 20.4.3.1
Extent of mechanical tests for finished cables and accessories
Number of test specimens
Grade Method of manufacture Supply condition 1) Impact test
Tensile test of parent material
parent material weldment
AW
1 flush-butt welded NR NR NR
N
AW 1 3 3
flush-butt welded
2 N NR NR NR
drop forged or cast N 1 3 2) NA
flush-butt welded N, NT, QT 1 3 3
3
drop forged or cast N, NT, QT 1 3 NA
1)AW – as welded, N – normalized, NT – normalized and tempered, QT – quenched and tempered.
2)For chain cables, Charpy V-notch impact is not required.
NR – not required, NA –not applicable
20.4.3.2 To take the required set of specimens, an additional link/or, where links are small, a link
or several link shall be provided in a length of chain cable. The mechanical test specimens shall not be
taken from the same length as that from which the breaking test three link specimens have been prepared.
The specimen link shall be manufactured and heat-treated together with the length of chain cable.
The additional links shall be made in accordance with the requirements of 20.4.1.4.
20.4.3.3 The mechanical properties of completed chain cables shall be in accordance with the values
specified in Table 20.4.3.3.
Table 20.4.3.3
Mechanical properties of finished chain cables and accessories
Tensile test Impact test 1)
Grade Re A Z Impact energy [J] min.
Rm [%] Test temperature
[MPa] [%]
[MPa] min. [oC] Parent material Weldment
min. min.
1 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
2 295 490-690 22 NR 0 27 27
3 410 min. 690 17 40 02) 60 50
–20 35 27
1) Average value from 3 test specimens. One individual value only may be below the specified average value, provided it is not
less than 70% of that value..
2) Testing shall normally be performed at 0oC.
NR – not required
20.4.4 Marking
Chain cables shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this Part, having
regard to the requirements given below.
Both ends of the chain cable length, as well as all accessories which meet the requirements of the present
Chapter, shall be stamped with at least the marks given in Fig. 20.4.4.
Certificate No.
xxxxxx
xx x
Chain cable PRS’ stamp
grade
Fig. 20.4.4

For accepted chain cables, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements
.1 nominal diameter and weight,
.2 proof and breaking loads,
.3 heat treatment parameters,
.4 marks stamped on the chain.
20.5 Testing and Inspection Certificate for Accessories

20.5.1 Proof Load Test
All chain cable accessories shall be subjected to the proof load test according to the requirements of
Tables 20.4.1.3-1 and 20.4.1.3-2, prescribed for the given chain grade and diameter.
20.5.2 Breaking Load Test

20.5.2.1 From each manufactured batch (the same grade, size and heat treatment batch) of 25 items
or less of shackles, swivels, swivel shackles, large links and end links, and from each manufactured batch
of 50 items or less of Kenter shackles, one item, selected at random, shall be subjected to the breaking load
test. The tested item cannot be further used.
20.5.2.2 PRS may waive the breaking load test if:
– the breaking load has been demonstrated at the time of acceptance tests, and
– the mechanical properties of each manufactured batch have been determined, and
– chain cables accessories have been subjected to non-destructive tests, agreed with PRS.
20.5.2.3 The accessories which have been satisfactorily tested at the prescribed breaking load
appropriate to the chain, may be used in service at the discretion of PRS where the accessories are
manufactured with the following:
– the material having higher strength characteristics than those specified for the part in question (e.g.
Grade 3 material for Grade 2 chain), or
– the same grade as that of the chain, but with increased dimensions subject to the successful procedure
tests that such accessories are so designed that the breaking strength is not less than 1.4 times the
prescribed breaking load of the chain for which they are intended.
20.5.3.1 From each batch, a set comprising 1 tensile test specimen and 3 impact test specimens shall be
taken in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 11.6, this Part.
20.5.3.2 The test results shall comply with the requirements given in Table 20.4.3.3. Re-tests shall be
performed in accordance with para. 20.4.2. Enlarged links and end links need not be tested, provided that
they are manufactured and heat treated together with the chain cable.
20.5.4 Marking
Accessories shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this Part.
Additionally, the marking shall contain the chain cable Grade.
For accepted accessories, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements
.1 nominal diameter and weight,
.2 proof and breaking loads,
.3 heat treatment parameters,
.4 marks stamped on the accessories,
.5 length.
20.6 Chafing Chain for ETA Equipment
20.6.1 Application
The requirements of the present sub-chapter apply to the chafing chain for chafing gear of Emergency
Towing Arrangements (ETA) 1) with specified working load (SWL) of 1000 kN (ETA1000) and 2000 kN
(ETA2000). Chafing chains other than those specified can be used subject to agreement with PRS.
1) Chafing chain – short chain segment constituting the end of a towing or mooring rope protecting from the rope chafing against
the chock.
ETA (Emergency Towing Arrangements) equipment – arrangements for towing a ship which has lost its propulsion or steerability
as a result of breakdown
20.6.2 Approval of the Manufacturer

The chafing chains for ETA equipment shall be manufactured at works approved by PRS, in accordance
with the manufacturing process agreed with PRS.
20.6.3 Materials
The materials used for the manufacture of the chafing chain shall comply with the requirements set
forth in sub-chapter 20.2, this Part.
20.6.4 Design, Manufacture, Testing and Acceptance of Chafing Chain
20.6.4.1 The chafing chain shall be designed, manufactured, tested and accepted in accordance with the
requirements set forth in sub-chapters 20.3, 20.4 and 20.5.
20.6.4.2 The arrangement at the end connected to the strongpoint and the dimensions of the chafing
chain are determined by the type of ETA. The other end of the chafing chain shall be fitted with a pear-
shaped open link allowing connection to a shackle corresponding to the type of ETA and chain cable grade.
A typical arrangement of such chain end is shown in Fig. 20.6.4.2.
Fig. 20.6.4.2. Typical outboard chafing chain end
20.6.4.3 The chafing chain links shall be common links of stud link type Grade 2 or 3.
20.6.4.4 The chafing chain shall be able to withstand a breaking load not less than twice the SWL. For
each ETA equipment, the nominal diameter of common link for chafing chains shall comply with the
Table 20.6.4.4
Nominal Diameter of Common Link for Chafing Chain
Nominal diameter of common link dmin, [mm]
Type of ETA
Grade 2 Grade 3
ETA 1000 62 52
ETA 2000 90 76
Steel Wire Ropes 149
21 STEEL WIRE ROPES

21.1.1 The requirements of the present chapter are applicable to steel wire ropes used in cargo handling
gear, towing, mooring, anchoring equipment and life-saving appliances subject to PRS survey.
21.1.2 Wire ropes shall be manufactured in works approved by PRS and shall comply with the
requirements specified in the Rules or material specifications (standards) agreed with PRS.
21.2 Manufacture
21.2.1 Steel wires used for the manufacture of ropes shall have a round cross-section, be galvanized and
have 1550, 1770, 1960 or 2160 MPa1) tensile strength.
The use of wires with a tensile strength different from that specified above shall be specially agreed
with PRS.
21.2.2 Ropes intended for running rigging shall be made from zinc coated class B1) wires.
Ropes for standing rigging, as well as towing, mooring and anchor ropes shall be made from zinc coated
class A1) wires.
21.2.3 The fibre cores (FC) of the ropes shall be made of new natural fibres (sisal, manila) or new synthetic
fibres (polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamide).
The main core shall be constructed of at least 3 strands and shall constitute a single length, of the same
diameter and structure. In ropes of less than 8 mm in diameter, one-strand fibre cores are permitted.
21.2.4 Where wire-rope cores are used, these shall be steel independent wire-rope cores (IWRC).
Independent wire strand cores (WSC) may be used in ropes of less than 13 mm in diameter (in ropes with
greater diameter, only where provided for by recognized standard), as well as in all multilayer ropes.
21.2.5 Where steel core is included in the wire cross-section, the wires used for its manufacture shall be
of the same tensile strength as that of the wire ropes.
21.2.6 In the completed rope, all wires shall be lubricated to protect them against corrosion. Natural
fibre cores shall be treated with anticorrosive and rotproofing compounds insoluble in sea water and
containing neither acids nor alkalis.
Wires and natural fibre cores shall be covered with compatible lubricants.
21.3 Tests
21.3.1 Each rope shall be tested to destruction to determine the actual breaking load of the completed rope.
Additionally, not less than 10% of wires in the rope shall be subjected to reverse bend test, torsion test
and the zinc coating inspection in accordance with PN-EN 10264-2.
21.3.2 The minimum breaking load Fmin of the rope shall be calculated from the formula (according to
PN-EN 12385-2):
Fmin = d ⋅ Rr ⋅ K
2
[kN] (21.3.2)
1000
where:
d – the rope nominal diameter, [mm],
Rr – rope strength class,
K – the rope minimum breaking load factor (see Table 21.3.7).
21.3.3 The test length of the tensile test sample shall comply with the requirements given in Table 21.3.3
and Fig. 21.3.3.
1) Designation according to PN-EN 10264-2.

Table 21.3.3
Rope test length acc. to ISO 3108
Rope diameter d Specimen minimum test length l
[mm] [mm]
d≤6 300
6 < d ≤ 20 600
d > 20 30 x d
d
l
Fig. 21.3.3
21.3.4 For the purpose of testing, from each manufactured rope of up to 10 000 m in length, of the same
nominal diameter, wire strength class, zinc coating class and the rope construction, one test sample shall be
taken; from the rope of 10 000 m in length and above – two test samples, one at each end.
21.3.5 When performing the breaking test, the breaking load shall be applied quickly until 80% of the
minimum breaking load, calculated according to formula (21.3.2), is obtained, and then the load shall be
applied slowly so that the stress in the rope will rise at a speed of approx. 10 MPa/s.
21.3.6 The actual breaking load of the rope is obtained if a breakage of at least one strand occurs. If the
specimen breakage occurs within a distance less than 50 mm from the machine grip and the minimum
breaking load is not obtained, the test shall be considered as not reliable and shall be repeated.
21.3.7 Table 21.3.7 presents steel wire ropes for general application, having regard to the rope
construction (class), construction of strands and the minimum breaking load factors.
Table 21.3.7
Steel wire ropes (acc. to PN-EN 12385-4)
The rope and core minimum breaking load
Examples of wire Construction
Class factor3)
cross-sections 1)
Rope2) Strand K1 K2 K3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6x7 6x7-FC 6x7 1-6 0.332 0.359 0.388
8x7 8x7-FC 8x7 1-6 0.291 0.359 0.404
6x19 6x19S-FC 6x19S 1-9-9 0.330 0.356
6x25F-FC 6x25F 1-6-6F-12
6x19W 1-6-6+6
6x26WS 1-5-5+5-10
8x19 8x19S-IWRC 8x19S 1-9-9 0.293 0.356
8x25F-IWRC 8x25F 1-6-6F-12
8x19W 1-6-6+6
8x26WS 1-5-5+5-10
6x36 6x36WS-IWRC 6x31WS 1-6-6+6-12 0.330 0.356
6x41WS-IWRC 6x36WS 1-7-7+7-14
6x41WS 1-8-8+8-16
6x49WS 1-8-8-8+8-16
6x46WS 1-9-9+9-18
Steel Wire Ropes 151
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8x36 8x36WC-IWRC 8x31WS 1-6-6+6-12 0.293 0.356
8x36WS 1-7-7+7-14
8x41WS 1-8-8+8-16
8x49WS 1-8-8-8+8-16
8x46WS 1-9-9+9-18
6x35N 6x35NW-FC 6x28NW 1-5-5+5/12 0.317 0.345
6x23NW 1-6-6+6/14
6x34NW 1-6-6+6/15
6x35NW 1-6-6+6/16
6x19M 6x19M-WSC 6x19M 1-6/12 0.307 0.362
6x37M 6x37M-FC 6x37M 1-6/12/18 0.295 0.395 0.346
18x7 17x7-FC 17x7 1-6 0.328 0.328
18x7-FC 18x7 1-6
34(M)x7 34(M)x7-FC 34(M)x7 1-6 0.318 0.318
36(M)x7 1-6
35(W)x7 35(W)x7 35(W)x7 1-6 0.360 0.350
1) Type of core: FC – fibre core, IWRC – independent wire rope core, WSC – independent wire strand core.
2) Construction of strands:
– with linear contact : S – Seale, W – Warrington, F – Filler,
– with combined linear contact: WS – Warrington/Seale,
– multi-operations coiling: M – point contact, N – combined contact.
3) K1 – factor for stranded ropes with fibre cores (single-layer rope) or fibre centre (non-rotating ropes),
K2 – factor for stranded ropes with independent wire rope core,
K3 – factor for stranded ropes with wire strand core (non-rotating ropes).

21.4.1 Compliance of the construction, diameter and other parameters of the rope with the requirements
of the present Chapter and the order conditions shall be verified by external examination and
measurements.
21.4.2 The ends of all steel wire ropes shall be protected against unstranding by bonds.
After removal of the bonds from the ends of the wire rope, the strands in the rope and wires in the
strands shall not unstrand or shall unstrand to such an extent that they can easily return to their initial
position.
21.4.3 The actual diameter of the rope shall be measured on the rope straight unloaded section in two
points, spaced at least 1 m.
In each of the points, at least two measurements shall be made in two, perpendicular to the rope axis,
directions, between two opposite strands.
Dimension tolerance of ropes with 8 mm and more of nominal diameter shall be within:
−1%, +4% for ropes with strands constructed exclusively of wires,
−1%, +6% – for ropes with strands constructed of fibre cores.
21.5 Marking
Steel wire ropes shall be marked in accordance with sub-chapter 1.9, this Part. Additionally, the
marking shall contain the following particulars:
.1 rope construction (class),
.2 rope length,
.3 rope nominal diameter,
.4 minimum pre-strain force, kN,
.5 coil (reel) No.

For accepted ropes, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements of sub-
chapter 1.8, this Part. Additionally, the following particulars shall be given:
.1 rope nominal diameter,
.2 rope actual diameter,
.3 rope length,
.4 rope construction,
.5 rope lay (type, direction),
.6 wire strength,
.7 wire surface treatment,
.8 the actual breaking load,
.9 coil (reel) No.
Fibre Ropes 153
22 FIBRE ROPES
22.1.1 The requirements of the present Chapter are applicable to fibre ropes used in towing, mooring
equipment, cargo handling gear, life-saving appliances and other equipment provided on ships subject to PRS
survey.
22.1.2 Fibre ropes shall be manufactured at works approved by PRS and shall comply with the
requirements specified in the Rules or material specifications (standards) agreed with PRS.
22.2 Manufacture
22.2.1 Fibre ropes shall be manufactured from new natural fibres (sisal, manila) or new synthetic fibres
(polyamide, polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene).
22.2.2 The basic parameters of stranded or plaited fibre ropes shall comply with the relevant standards
agreed with PRS.
22.2.3 Ropes and the rope strands shall constitute a single length, without joints on standard length in
delivery or a smaller length.
22.2.4 Ropes shall be manufactured in accordance with PN-EN ISO 9554 to ensure dimensions stability,
resistance to the effects of sunlight (for synthetic ropes), mould and bacteria (for natural fibre ropes). Ropes
shall be resistant to petroleum products.
The content of titanium dioxide in the polyamide and polyester ropes cannot exceed 0.05%. The ropes
shall be heat treated to fix the strand and to stabilize dimensions.
22.2.5 Ropes shall be identified with a thread or tape, easily recognizable despite getting dirty, wet
or fading. The tape shall be at least 3 mm wide and shall be printed with the number of the relevant ISO
standard and a reference number identifying the manufacturer. The maximum distance between two
consecutive marks shall be 0.5 m.
22.3 Tests
22.3.1 Each rope shall be tested to destruction to determine the actual breaking load of the completed
rope.
Each type of rope shall be additionally subjected, one time, to ageing in accordance with Publication
40/P – Non-Metallic Materials and subsequently to tensile test according to the requirements of the present
Chapter.
The mechanical properties shall not be reduced by more than 30% in relation to the initial value.
22.3.2 The effective lengths of test samples and the types of testing machine grips are given in Table
22.3.2 and Figures 22.3.2-1, 22.3.2-2 and 22.3.2-3.
Table 22.3.2
Effective lengths acc. to PN-EN ISO 2307
Minimum effective length Lu
Type of rope Type of testing machine grips
[mm]
Synthetic ropes with reference number ≤ 10 all types 400
”cors de chasse” 400
Synthetic ropes with reference number > 10 and < 20 pins 1000
wedge grips –
Synthetic ropes with reference number ≥ 20 pins 2000 1)
Natural fibre ropes all types 2000
1) If the length of the lay is greater than 360 mm, Lu shall be increased to 5 lengths, where possible.
r r
Lu
Fig. 22.3.2-1. The effective length Lu for wedge grips testing machine, applicable to ropes with reference number < 20
r – limiting marks for standard test, Lu – the effective length measured under zero tension
Fig. 22.3.2-2. The effective length Lu for pin grip testing machine, applicable to ropes with reference number ≥ 20
r – limiting marks for standard test, Lu – the effective length measured under zero tension, w – two marks on test specimen
Fig. 22.3.2-3. The effective length Lu for cors de chasse testing machine, applicable to ropes with reference number < 20
r – limiting marks for standard test, Lu – the effective length measured under zero tension, w – two marks on test specimen
22.3.3 The test results shall comply with the requirements given in standards or material specifications
agreed with PRS.
22.3.4 At the purchaser’s consent, the actual breaking load Fc of three-strand, four-strand, eight-strand and
twelve-strand rope with reference number greater than 44 may be determined from the formula:
Fc = Fy · n · fr [N] (22.3.4)
Fy – the average strength of threads, [N]
n – number of threads in the rope;
fr – correction factor 1).
22.3.5 The elongation E, in percentage, during the breaking test of synthetic ropes shall be determined
from the formula 1):
L3 − L2
E= ⋅ 100 [%] (22.3.5)
L2
where:
L2 – the gauge length of the rope sample under initial stress, [mm];
L3 – the gauge length of the rope sample under the stress equal to 50 of the required minimum breaking
load, [mm].
Compliance of the rope construction, circumference and other dimensions with the relevant standard
or material specifications agreed with PRS shall be verified by external examination and measurements.
The defects which disqualify the rope are: mould, partial melting, the smell of rot or burning.
Criteria for the rope resplice and retirement are given in PN-EN ISO 9554.
1) E.g. acc. to PN-ISO 2307.

Fibre Ropes 155
22.5 Marking
Ropes shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 1.9, this Part. Additionally,
the marking shall contain the following particulars:
.1 constituent material,
.2 manufacturer’s identification and the country of origin,
.3 reference number,
.4 delivery length,
.5 declaration of conformity to standard relating to the constituent material.
For accepted ropes, Inspection Certificate is issued by PRS in accordance with the requirements of sub-
chapter 1.8, this Part. Additionally, the following particulars shall be given:
.1 constituent material,
.2 rope construction (number of strands, lay of a rope, etc.),
.3 treatment of rope,
.4 reference number,
.5 confectioning length,
.6 reference to standard relating to the constituent material.
WELDING
Welding 155
23 WELDING
23.1 General
23.1.1 The requirements specified in Chapter 23 apply to welding of the structures subject to technical
survey by PRS during both their construction and repair. Works using welding processes for construction
or repair of such structures shall have valid approval by PRS to the welding in the scope covering the work
performed.
Welders shall hold valid PRS qualification certificates relevant to the work performed.
Qualification of welders for welding structures subject to PRS survey is conducted in accordance with
PRS requirements provided in Publication 30/P – Principles for Certification of Welders or in the
requirements of recognised standards, e.g. IACS UR W32, a set of standards PN-EN ISO 9606, ASME
Sec. IX or ANSI/AWS D1.1.
Welding of high manganese austenitic stainless steel used for construction of cargo and fuel tanks of
LNG carriers and LNG-fuelled ships shall be in accordance with Interim Guidelines on the Application of
High Manganese Austenitic Stainless Steel for Cryogenic Service (IMO MSC.1/Circ. 1599).
Welding works for brittle crack arrest steels shall be in accordance with the relevant requirements for
each steel grade excluding suffix BCA1 or BCA2 specified in Chapter 3.
23.1.2 When the welding process is performed in the open air, at low temperature and high humidity,
means shall be provided to ensure the required quality of welded joints. Preheating, depending on the type
and thickness of the welded materials, as well as ambient temperature shall be agreed with PRS.
23.1.3 Structure documentation shall contain information on all welded joints in the structure,
indicating: type of the welded joint, type of weld, weld dimensions, weld groove dimensions, the thickness
transition in butt welds where elements of different thickness are welded.
These particulars may be given in the drawings or in the Welding table, which shall constitute an
integral part of the structure documentation.
23.1.4 Edges of structures to be welded shall be prepared in accordance with the technical
documentation and methods approved by PRS.
23.1.5 The edges prepared for welding shall be free from oil, scale rust, paint and substances which
form at a very low temperature such as snow, hoarfrost, etc. Welding of structures with the shop primer is
permitted, provided the paint is approved by PRS as not having significant harmful effect on the quality
of welded joints in accordance with PN-EN ISO 17652 Standard.
23.1.6 Welding sequence shall be such as to avoid excessive residual stresses and permanent distortions.
23.1.7 Welding under water and welding of the structures, the other side of which is in contact with
water shall be agreed with PRS.
Inspections of underwater welded joints shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
specified in Publication 34/P – Inspection of Underwater Welded Joints.
23.1.8 When plates, sheets, patches or the like are welded into a rigid contour, processing measures
shall be taken to decrease the stresses due to welding. Opening with closed perimeter is considered to have
a rigid contour if one of its dimensions is less than 60 plate thicknesses in the particular place.
23.1.9 Straightening of structures is allowed within reasonable limits. Straightening may be done by
heating with the use of load or without load; damage to the weld or plate surface is not permitted. The
heating temperature during straightening welded hull structural steel shall not exceed 650°C and the
heating process shall not change the structural properties of the material.
Straightening by heating, with simultaneous water-cooling, may be used, provided that the straightening
procedure shall be agreed with PRS and the personnel qualifications are confirmed.
The method of heating and intensity of cooling, as well as the maximum heating temperature shall be
appropriate for the properties and thickness of the material.
23.1.10 Heat treatment after welding is required in the case when residual thermal stresses shall be
eliminated. The type of heat treatment shall be determined according to the properties of the material and
shall be agreed with PRS in each particular case.
23.1.11 The components made of cold-bent hull structural steel may be welded without heat treatment
if the inner radius of bending is greater than 3 times the plate thickness.
23.1.12 Hydrogen-controlled welding consumables shall be protected against humidity and shall be
dried up according to the manufacturer’s recommendations prior to application.
23.2 Welding of Ship Hull and its Equipment
23.2.1 Consumables for welding particular normal and higher strength hull structural steel grades shall
be selected in accordance with Table 23.2.1-1, whereas consumables for welding high strength structural
steel shall be selected in accordance with Table 23.2.1-2.
Table 23.2.1-1
Consumables for welding normal and higher strength hull structural steel grades
Hull structural steel grades
Grades of welding
consumables3) AH32 DH32 EH32 FH32
A B D E AH40 DH40 EH40 FH40
AH36 DH36 EH36 FH36
1 x
1Y x x2)
2 x x x
2Y x x x x x
1) 1) 1)
2Y40 x x x x
3 x x x x
3Y x x x x x x x
1) 1) 1) 1)
3Y40 x x x x x x
4Y x x x x x x x x
1) 1) 1) 1)
4Y40 x x x x x x x x
1) 1) 1) 1)
5Y40 x x x x x x x x
1) Welding consumables approved for welding steel of Grades AH40, DH40, EH40 and FH40 may be used for welding the
corresponding grades of normal strength hull structural steel subject to PRS agreement in each particular case.
2) Welding consumables of Grade 1Y may be used for welding higher strength hull structural steel up to 25 mm in thickness.
3) Grade notation of welding consumables for semi-automatic welding is supplemented with letter S; grade notation of
consumables for automatic welding is supplemented with the following letters:
T – for two-run technique,
M – for multi-run technique,
TM – for two-run and multi-run techniques.
Example: 3YS, 3YT, 3YM, 3YTM, 3Y40S.
23.2.2 Where normal strength hull structural steel is to be joined with higher strength hull structural steel,
the welding consumables of the lovest grade intended for these steels may be used.
23.2.3 Where two different steel grades are to be joined, the welding consumables intended for higher
or lower strength shall be used.
23.2.4 Hydrogen-controlled welding consumables (e.g. basic-type electrodes) shall be used for welding
the following elements:
– assembly joints between sections,
– all butts and seams of the ice belt of shell plating,
– elements of longitudinal framing,
– butt welds of hull elements more than 20 mm in thickness,
– thick-walled elements (sternframe, stem, etc.),
– butt welds welded in the closed and stiff circumference conditions.
Welding 157
Table 23.2.1-2
Selection of consumables for welding high strength steel
High strength steel grades
Grade of D420
A420
D460
A460
D500
A500
D550
A550
D620
A620
D690
A690
D890
A890
D960
A960
welding
E420
E460
E500
E550
E620
E690
E890
E960
F420
F460
F500
F550
F620
F690
consumables
3Y42 x
4Y42 x x
5Y42 x x x
3Y46 x x
4Y46 x x x x
5Y46 x x x x x x
3Y50 x x x
4Y50 x x x x x x
5Y50 x x x x x x x x x
3Y55 x x
4Y55 x x x x
5Y55 x x x x x x
3Y62 x x
4Y62 x x x x
5Y62 x x x x x x
3Y69 x x
4Y69 x x x x
5Y69 x x x x x x
3Y89 x
4Y89 x x
3Y96 x x
4Y96 x x x x
Grade notation of welding consumables for semi-automatic welding is supplemented with the letter S; grade notation of consumables for automatic multi-run welding – with the letter M.
Example: 3Y69S, 3Y69M.
23.2.5 When joining steel of Grade E, the Grade E steel with steel of other strength level, as well as higher
strength and the steel for boilers and pressure vesels, hydrogen-controlled welding consumables shall be used
in accordance with Table 24.4.5.
When welding high strength steel, hydrogen-controlled welding consumables shall be used in accordance
with Table 24.10.6.
23.2.6 Tack welds shall be performed only by welders certified by PRS and using the same welding
consumables which are required for welding the particular structure. Tack welds shall be free from defects
that might impair the quality of the welded joints. At the request of the PRS Surveyor, tack welds shall be
examined for cracks or other defects. Any defective tack welds shall be cut out to sound metal and shall
be re-welded.
Where tack welds are made by welders not certified by PRS, they shall be cut out immediately before
welding.
23.2.7 Lifting eye plate positions shall be free from cracks and laminations which shall be confirmed
by the results of adequate tests, e.g. ultrasonic testing.
23.2.8 When applied to YP47 steels, short bead length for tack and repairs of welds by welding shall
not be less than 50 mm. In the case where Pcm is less than or equal to 0.19, 25 mm of short bead length
may be adopted with approval of PRS.
23.2.9 For YP47 steels, preheating shall be 50°C or over when air temperature is 5°C or below. In the
case where Pcm is less than or equal to 0.19 and the air temperature is below 5°C but above 0°C, alternative
preheating requirements may be adopted with approval of PRS.
23.3 Welding of Machinery
23.3.1 The requirements specified in sub-chapter 23.3 apply to welding of the components of machinery
made from the parent metal, using consumables which fulfil the requirements specified in the relevant
Parts of the Rules. Welding of components made from materials other than those specified in the Rules
23.3.2 Consumables for welding machinery shall be so selected as to suit the particular steel grades,
with due regard paid to the requirements specified in paragraphs 23.2.1, 23.2.2 and 23.2.4, as well as the
steel manufacturer’s recommendations, particularly in the case of steel other than hull structural steel.
23.3.3 Where the component parts of machinery are subjected to high service temperature or are in
contact with chemically active media, welding consumables shall be selected having regard to these
operating conditions.
23.3.4 When welding component parts of the ship machinery made from steel 30 mm in thickness and
over, hydrogen controlled welding consumables shall be used to ensure the resistance of the welded joint
to cold cracking. Welding operations shall be so performed as to avoid cold cracking by technological
processes (preheating, heat treatment, limitation of the minimum ambient temperature, etc.).
23.3.5 Welding of propeller shafts and crankshafts shall be agreed with PRS.
23.3.6 PRS may give consent to the use of welding, build-up welds, metallisation and other methods for
repair of ship machinery, provided satisfactory test results are obtained according to the programme agreed
with PRS and suitability of the welding method for a given structure is confirmed.
23.4 Welding of Boilers and Pressure Vessels

23.4.1 Welded seams of boilers and pressure vessels shall be so marked as to enable identification of the
welder who performed the weld.
Longitudinal and circumferential welds of headers and drums of boilers and pressure vessels shall be
executed as butt welds.
Welding 159
Where butt welds are impracticable, the selected joint method and workmanship technology are subject
Longitudinal and circumferential seams of boiler drums shall be made with back sealing run, except
cases where the weld joint factor has been taken equal to or less than 0.7.
Single-side butt welding on backing strips forming the weld root is subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case.
Cut-outs and openings in the boiler shell shall be, as far as practicable, so located as not to intercept the
longitudinal or circumferential welds of boiler drums nor be tangent thereto. The minimum distance between
the hole and weld shall not be less than 3 times the plate thickness, however not less than 50 mm.
The possibility of welding, to the boiler drum, temporary fittings used for assembly, clamps or other fittings
is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
23.4.2 Consumables for the welding of boilers and pressure vessels shall be suitable for the grade
of steel to be used in construction, taking into account the requirements specified in paragraphs 23.2.1,
23.2.2 and 23.2.4, as well as the steel manufacturer’s recommendations, particularly in the case of steel
other than hull structural steel.
23.4.3 Hydrogen-controlled welding consumables, e.g. basic-type electrodes shall be used for welding Class
I boilers and pressure vessels. Other welding consumables may be used for welding Class II and III boilers and
pressure vessels if they are made from unalloyed steel and the joint thickness does not exceed 20 mm.
23.4.4 Heat treatment of boilers and pressure vessels shall be effected in accordance with the relevant
standards and the steel manufacturer’s recommendations.
Welded joints of elements which, due to size or special construction thereof, cannot be subjected to
stress relief heat treatment as a whole may be submitted to this treatment in sections subject to PRS
Stress relief heat treatment shall consist in uniform heating a sufficiently wide area along the joint over
the width approx. 6 times the plate thickness.
23.4.5 When manufacturing pressure vessels, boilers and heat exchangers of Class I or II, the weld test
assemblies shall be made to check the mechanical properties in the case of:
– piece production;
– series production – on the first piece, as well as in the case of novel types of structures or application
of new materials and new methods of welding.
PRS may require that the weld test assemblies should also be made for structures of Class III.
23.4.6 The weld test assemblies shall be so attached to the boiler or pressure vessel that the test assembly
is a continuation of the joint of the boiler or pressure vessel. The weld of the test assembly shall be made
in the same technological conditions in which the welding of the boiler or pressure vessel is performed.
After non-destructive testing, the following specimens shall be taken from the test assemblies and tested:
– one butt weld transverse tensile test specimen,
– one transverse bend test specimen for root bend test,
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test,
– three Charpy V-notch test specimens.
The conditions of cutting out the specimens from the test assemblies and the conditions of testing shall
fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.3, having regard to the appropriate method and
technique of welding.
23.5 Welding of Pipelines
Welding of pipelines shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in Publication
23/P – Prefabrication of Pipelines.
23.6 Welding of Stainless Steels

When welding stainless steels specified in Chapter 8, the following guidelines shall be observed:
– welding consumables used shall be approved and so selected that the welded joint corrosion resistance
corresponds to that of the parent metal and the mechanical properties of the welded joint correspond to
those of the welded steels,
– welding shall be performed with a low heat input,
– ferrite content in the weld shall be at a level adequate for the welded steels,
– adequate level of cleanness shall be provided to prevent impurities from getting into the weld and to
protect the plate and welded joint from damage and scratch.
23.7 Welding of Stainless Steels with other Steels
When welding stainless steels with other steels, the welding method and welding consumables shall be
so selected as to guarantee the weld properties suitable for the weld joint application.
23.8 Welding of Clad Steels with Austenitic Stainless Steels
When welding clad steels, the following guidelines shall be observed:
– welding consumables used shall be approved and so selected that the welded joint corrosion resistance
on the side of cladding is similar to that of the cladding,
– welding shall be performed with a low heat input,
– first, unalloyed steels shall be welded using the consumables corresponding to that steel grade (runs
1 – 5, see Fig. 23.8),
– the joint on the side of cladding shall have at least two runs of weld metal. The first run shall be welded
with material having higher Cr and Ni content, the second run shall be welded with materials suitable
for cladding, as shown in Fig. 23.8.
5
4 3
2
1 1-5 runs – to be welded with electrodes suitable for unalloyed steel
6th run – to be welded with materials having higher Cr and Ni content
7 th run – to be welded with materials suitable for cladding
Fig. 23.8. Method of welding clad steels
23.9 Welding of Steel Forgings and Castings

23.9.1 Preheating and other technological means shall be provided, whatever the ambient temperature,
to ensure the required welding quality in the following cases:
– steel castings or forgings with the carbon content exceeding 0.25%;
– steel castings and forgings with the carbon content exceeding 0.23%, which shall constitute parts of hull
structures in ships with ice strengthening notation L1A, L1 or L2 (castings and forgings of sternframes,
stems, propeller shaft brackets, etc.).
23.9.2 Preheating temperature and heat treatment procedure for castings and forgings shall be
determined depending on the design, size and service conditions of the structure concerned, having regard
to the requirements specified in paragraphs 23.1.2 and 23.1.10.
23.9.3 Defects of new castings and forgings may be repaired by welding only where the parent metal
has been previously checked for weldability, with due regard paid to the service conditions of the cast
or forged part. The repair of defects by welding is subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Repair of defects by welding shall be performed before the final heat treatment. Welding repair
of defects after the final heat treatment may be performed only in exceptional cases.
Repetitive defects in castings and forgings shall not be repaired by welding.
Welding 161
23.9.4 Welding repair of defects in castings shall be made after gating system and riser heads have been
removed and the castings have been thoroughly cleaned of sand, scale, inclusions, etc.
The surface to be repaired shall be ground to the sound metal so as to ensure full penetration of the weld.
23.10 Welding of Cast Iron
Repair of defects in iron castings by welding is generally not permitted.
In special cases, PRS may give consent to the repair of defects by welding.
23.11 Welding of Copper and Copper Alloys
Welding of copper and copper alloys shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the
relevant standards. Welding repair of cast copper alloy propellers shall be performed in accordance with
the requirements specified in Publication 7P – Repair of Cast Alloy Propellers.
23.12 Welding of Wrought Aluminium Alloys
23.12.1 Welding of wrought aluminium alloys, specified in Chapter 18.1, shall be performed using
welding methods and welding consumables suitable for the parent metal and ensuring high quality of joints
and resistance to corrosion.
23.12.2 Welded joints shall be arranged, as far as practicable, in the areas with the lowest stress level.
Welding operations shall be performed in the most convenient positions – as far as possible, in the flat
position.
Reinforcements of the welds may be removed subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
23.12.3 Before welding (tack welding), the edges of the elements to be welded shall be cleaned using
stainless steel wire brushes and then degreased by means of suitable solvents (acetone, alcohol, etc.). The
period between cleaning and welding shall be, as far as practicable, short to avoid the cleaned areas from
getting dirty. Tack welds shall be also cleaned carefully. In the case of multi-run welding technique, each
run of deposit shall be brushed before the next run is applied.
23.12.4 Welding wire and rods of aluminium alloys shall be degreased and cleaned; the surfaces
of wires and rods shall be made free from the layer of oxides, prior to welding.
23.12.5 For welding aluminium alloys, the use of permanent or temporary backings is permitted.
Temporary backings shall be made of stainless steel; permanent backings – of the same alloy as that used
for the elements to be welded.
23.12.6 In the case of two-side welded joint, before a sealing run is applied to the back of the weld, the
root of the weld shall be removed, by chipping, machining or plasma cutting, to the sound metal. Cutting
out the root by means of grinding is permitted, provided the special abrasive disks, intended for aluminium
only, are used.
23.12.7 Structures made of aluminium alloys may be straightened using oxyacetylene flame.
Straightening technology, taking into account the alloy type, straightening method and personnel
qualifications shall be agreed with PRS.
23.12.8 In way of riveted joints of aluminium alloy structures, all essential welding processes shall be
completed before riveting.
23.12.9 Welding of other aluminium alloys shall be agreed with PRS.
23.13 Hard Soldering

Brazed connections of hull structures, specified in paragraph 1.1.1, are subject to PRS survey and shall
be executed in accordance with the relevant standards and technical documentation agreed with PRS.
24 WELDING CONSUMABLES
24.1.1 Consumables for welding of the structures which are subject to PRS survey shall be approved by
PRS.
24.1.2 Welding consumables are approved by PRS on the basis of the approval procedure specified in
sub-chapter 24.2. Welding consumables, not listed in this sub-chapter, are approved by PRS on the basis
of tests performed in accordance with a separate programme which is subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case.
24.1.3 Consumables for welding normal and higher strength hull structural steel, as well as high strength
steel are divided into grades, based on the deposited metal and welded joints mechanical properties.
The pattern of welding consumable grade notation is specified in paragraph 24.1.4.
24.1.4 Welding consumable grade notation consists of one of the numbers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, which indicates
the required deposited metal and welded joints impact test temperature: 1(+20°C), 2(0°C), 3(−20°C),
4(−40°C), 5(−60°C).
Letter Y, added after the grade number, indicates that the welding consumable is intended for welding
higher strength steel or high strength steel.
One of the numbers: 40, 42, 46, 50, 55, 62, 69, 89 or 96, added after the letter Y, indicates the required
minimum yield stress of the deposited metal: 40(400 MPa), 42(420 MPa), 46(460 MPa), 50(500 MPa),
55(550 MPa), 62(620 MPa), 69(690 MPa), 89(890 MPa) or 96(960 MPa).
24.1.5 Grades 1, 2, 3 – indicate that the welding consumable is intended for welding normal strength hull
structural steels.
Grades 1Y, 2Y, 3Y, 4Y – indicate that the welding consumable is intended for welding higher strength
hull structural steels with Re ≤ 355 MPa. Grade 1Y is applicable to the welding consumables for automatic
welding only.
Grades 2Y40, 3Y40, 4Y40, 5Y40 – indicate that the welding consumable is intended for welding higher
strength hull structural steels with Re ≤ 390 MPa.
24.1.6 Grades 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42 – indicate that the welding consumable is intended for welding high
strength hull structural steels with Re ≤ 420 MPa, grades 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50 – indicate that the welding
consumable is intended for welding high strength hull structural steels with Re ≤ 500 MPa and similarly:
grades 3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55 – steels with Re ≤ 550 MPa, grades 3Y62, 4Y62, 5Y62 – steels with Re ≤ 620
MPa, grades 3Y69, 4Y69, 5Y69 – steels with Re ≤ 690 MPa, grades 3Y89, 4Y89 – steels with Re ≤ 890
MPa, 3Y96, 4Y96 – steels with Re ≤ 960 MPa.
24.1.7 Welding consumables for which the hydrogen content has been controlled are identified by mark:
H15, H10 or H5 depending on the diffusible hydrogen content in the deposited metal. One of these symbols
is added to the grade notation of the consumables with controlled hydrogen content.
24.1.8 Grade notations of welding consumables for automatic welding are supplemented, depending on
welding technique, with the following marks:
– T – for two-run technique where each layer is formed by one run only,
– M – for multi-run technique,
– TM – for two-run and multi-run techniques.
Suffix "S" will be added after the grade notation to indicate approval for semi-automatic welding.
Suffix "V" will be added after the grade notation to indicate approval for electroslag welding and
electrogas welding.
24.1.9 Consumables approved by PRS may be used in such welding positions only for which they have
been approved.
24.1.10 PRS approval is valid only for this welding consumable – coated electrode type, wire-flux
combination or wire-shielding gas combination, which has been subjected to approval tests.
Welding Consumables 163
24.1.11 In the case of any change in properties and the chemical composition of an approved welding
consumable, the approval tests shall be repeated.
24.1.12 Upgrading of welding consumables or extension of the approval range may be made at the
manufacturer’s request, preferably at the time of annual tests, subject to additional tests of test assemblies.
The scope of these additional tests shall be agreed with PRS.
24.1.13 If welding consumables are manufactured in several factories of the same company (with the
manufacturer’s confirmation that the material used and the manufacturing process are identical with those
used in the main works) or are manufactured under licence, the complete approval tests shall be performed
in one of the works only. In the remaining factories, these tests may be reduced to annual tests.
24.2 Approval Procedure
24.2.1 Technical Documentation
The technical documentation of the welding consumable submitted to PRS for approval shall include at least
the following:
– name of the works – the welding consumable manufacturer,
– proposed grade of the welding consumable according to the Rules,
– chemical composition of the deposited metal, guaranteed by the manufacturer,
– mechanical and technological properties of the deposited metal and welded joint, guaranteed by the
manufacturer,
– hydrogen content in the deposited metal for hydrogen-controlled welding consumables,
– welding procedure, including particular welding positions,
– short description of welding consumable manufacture technique, manufacture process quality control,
as well as the quality control of the welding consumable subjected to approval tests.
24.2.2 Works Inspection
Inspection of the works – the welding consumable manufacturer – shall ascertain that the structure
of the works, production methods and quality control ensure uniformity of manufacture.
The inspection of the works applying for approval of welding consumables for the first time shall be
conducted prior to approval. On this occasion, PRS Surveyor may select welding consumables which will be
subjected to approval tests.
Inspection of the approved works shall be conducted at least once a year, at the time of annual tests.
In special cases, equivalent alternative arrangements may be accepted.
24.2.3 Approval Tests
Approval tests of welding consumable cover the welding of the deposited metal test assemblies and the
butt weld test assemblies.
Selection of welding consumables for the preparation of test assemblies, welding, taking the test specimens
and the tests shall be performed in the presence of PRS Surveyor or a person duly authorized by PRS. The
welding consumables selected for the preparation of tests assemblies shall be manufactured no more than one
year prior to the start of welding of test assemblies.
Results of the tests shall fulfil the requirements for the grade of welding consumable requested by the
manufacturer at the approval. The results of annual tests shall fulfil the requirements for the particular
grade of welding consumable specified in the approval.
24.2.4 Annual Tests
Welding consumables approved by PRS are subject to tests to be performed at least once a year. During
the annual tests PRS checks that the manufacturer maintains adequate quality levels at each stages of the
manufacture of the approved consumables. Detailed scope of the annual tests is specified in the provisions
concerning the conditions for approval of the particular consumables. The tests shall be performed in the
presence of PRS Surveyor or a person duly authorized by PRS. The annual tests and their documenting
shall be complete before the expiry of the current approval.
Annual tests may – at the manufacturer’s request – be used for approval tests intended to upgrade the
existing grade of the tested consumable. In that case, additional test pieces shall be made and tested in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.5.7.
24.3 Preparation and Testing of Welding Consumables Test Assemblies
24.3.1 The deposited metal test assemblies may be prepared from any grade hull structural steel.
Depending on the grade of welding consumable, butt weld test assemblies shall be prepared from one
of the steel grades specified in Table 24.3.1.
Table 24.3.1
Steel grades for preparation of test assemblies
Grade of welding consumable Grade of steel for test assembly preparation
1 A
2 A, B, D
3 A, B, D, E
lY AH32, AH36
2Y AH32, AH36, DH32, DH36
3Y AH32, AH36, DH32, DH36, EH32, EH36
4Y AH32, AH36, DH32, DH36, EH32, EH36, FH32, FH36
2Y40 AH40, DH40
3Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40
4Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40
5Y40 AH40, DH40, EH40, FH40
The dimensions of test assemblies, i.e. the width and length are specified in particular figures. Where
the length is not specified, the test assemblies shall be of such length as to allow taking the prescribed
number of test specimens.
24.3.2 Test assemblies shall be prepared under the PRS Surveyor’s supervision. The welding of tests
assemblies shall be performed in the PRS Surveyor’s presence. The edges of test assemblies may be
beveled by machining or by oxygen cutting. The beveled edges shall be free from any remaining scale
or other impurities.
24.3.3 The welding parameters used, such as amperage, voltage, travel speed, etc., shall be within the
range recommended by the manufacturer and shall fulfil the requirements specified in Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) as well as comply with good welding practice. Where a welding consumable is stated
to be suitable for both alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC), AC shall be used for the preparation
of the test assemblies. PRS may, however, require that the welding tests using direct current shall also be
performed.
24.3.4 Test assemblies shall be welded at ambient temperature and each successive run shall be deposited
after the previous run has cooled to at least 250°C, but not less than 100°C. After welding, the test assemblies
shall not be subjected to heat treatment.
24.3.5 Before being cut into test specimens, the butt weld test assemblies shall be submitted to
radiographic examination for freedom from inadmissible imperfections.
24.3.6 Chemical composition of the deposited metal shall be determined.
24.3.7 The dimensions of specimens for testing the mechanical properties of the deposited metal and
butt weld are specified in paragraphs 2.5.6, 2.5.7 and 2.6, 2.7.
24.3.8 The axis of a deposited metal longitudinal tensile test specimen specified in paragraph 2.5.7 shall
coincide with the centre of the weld and the mid-thickness of the plate, as shown in Fig. 24.5.l.
The longitudinal axis of a test specimen taken from butt weld made using a two-run technique shall
coincide with the centre of the weld and the mid-thickness of the 2nd run. Prior to testing, the specimens
may be heated to a temperature not exceeding 250°C for a period not longer than 16 hours for hydrogen
removal.
24.3.9 The upper and lower surfaces of butt weld transverse tensile test specimen, shown in Fig. 2.5.6,
shall be machined flush with the surface of the plate.
24.3.10 The upper and lower surfaces of butt weld transverse bend test specimen shall be machined
flush with the surface of the plate. The sharp corners of the specimen may be rounded to a radius not
exceeding 2 mm.
24.3.11 Charpy V-notch impact test specimen, shown in Fig.2.6.1, shall be cut with its longitudinal axis
perpendicular to the weld length. The longitudinal axis of impact test specimens of deposited metal and
butt weld made with multi-run technique shall be in the middle of the plate thickness, as shown in Fig.
24.3.11-1. With two-run technique, impact test specimens shall be taken on the 2nd run side, 2 mm below
the surface, as shown in Fig. 24.3.11-2. The notch shall be cut in the centerline of the weld and
perpendicular to the plate, as shown in Figures 24.3.11-1 and 24.3.11-2.
For electrogas and electroslag welding, additional test specimens with the notch at 2 mm from the fusion
line in the deposited metal shall be taken as shown in Fig. 24.8.1.
Fig. 24.3.11-1.
The method of preparing Charpy V-notch impact test specimen from butt weld test assembly welded with multi-run technique
Fig. 24.3.11-2.
The method of preparing Charpy V-notch impact test specimen from butt weld test assembly welded with two-run technique
24.4 Assessment of Results of Tests of Welding Consumables for Hull Structure Steels
24.4.1 At deposited metal tensile test, the values of yield stress, tensile strength and elongation shall be
determined. At butt weld tensile test, the values of the butt weld tensile strength and the position of fracture
shall be determined.
The required mechanical properties are given in Tables 24.4.4-1 and 24.4.4-2.
24.4.2 The result of the bend test is considered satisfactory if, after bending the specimen through
an angle of 120° over a former having a diameter three times the specimen thickness, no cracks can be
seen on the side in tension. Superficial cracks less than 3 mm in length should be ignored.
For each set of bend test specimens, one part of specimens shall be tested with the face of the weld in
tension and the other with the root of the weld in tension.
24.4.3 Impact test shall be performed on 3 specimens. The average absorbed energy value shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Tables 24.4.4-1 and 24.4.4-2.
One individual value may be less than the required average value, however it is not less than 70% of this
value.
The test temperature for grades 2, 2Y, 2Y40, 3, 3Y, 3Y40, 4Y, 4Y40 and 5Y40 shall be controlled
within ±2°C accuracy.
24.4.4 Mechanical properties of the deposited metal shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table
24.4.4-1; whereas the mechanical properties of butt weld – shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table
24.4.4-2.
Table 24.4.4-1
Requirements for mechanical properties of deposited metal
Impact test (ISO Charpy V-notch specimen)
Tensile test for deposited metal from electrodes for deposited metal
Grade of and from semi-automatic welding from automatic welding
welding Test Average energy Test Average energy
consumables Re A
Rm temperature value from three temperature value from three
[MPa] [%]
[MPa] [°C] specimens, [J] [°C] specimens, [J] min.
min. min.
min.
1 +20 47 +20 34
2 400÷560 305 22 0 47 0 34
3 –20 47 –20 34
1Y not subject to classification +20 34
2Y 0 47 0 34
490÷660 375 22
3Y –20 47 –20 34
4Y –40 47 –40 34
2Y40 0 47 0 39
3Y40 –20 47 –20 39
510÷690 400 22
4Y40 –40 47 –40 39
5Y40 –60 47 –40 39
Table 24.4.4-2
Requirements for mechanical properties of butt weld
Impact test (ISO Charpy V-notch specimen)
for joints welded using electrodes for joints welded using
Tensile test Bend test
and semi-automatic welding automatic welding
Welding position
Grade
of welding flat, vertical Average energy
consumables Test horizontal- upward, Test value from
Rm Bending angle temperature vertical, vertical temperature three specimens
[MPa] [degrees] [°C] overhead downward [°C] [J]
min. min. min.
Average energy value from
three specimens, [J] min.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 +20 47 34 +20 34
2 400 120 0 47 34 0 34
3 –20 47 34 –20 34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1Y not subject to classification +20 34
2Y 0 47 34 0 34
490 120
3Y –20 47 34 –20 34
4Y –40 47 34 –40 34
2Y40 0 47 39 0 39
3Y40 –20 47 39 –20 39
510 120
4Y40 –40 47 39 –40 39
5Y40 –40 47 39 –40 39
24.4.5 Hydrogen content in the deposited metal of hydrogen-controlled welding consumables shall not
be higher than the values specified in Table 24.4.5. Consumables which fulfil the above requirements are
called low-hydrogen welding consumables.
Hydrogen tests are not performed for deposited metal from welding using solid wire with shielding gas.
Table 24.4.5
Permissible hydrogen content in deposited metal
Permissible hydrogen content in deposited metal [cm3/100 g deposited metal] max.
Mark of diffusible hydrogen content Mercury method

Thermal conductivity detector method Glycerine method
(ISO 3690)
H15(H) 15 10
H10(HH) 10 5
1)
H5(HHH) 5
1) Not applicable.
24.4.6 Where the results of the tensile and bend test do not fulfil the requirements, duplicate test
specimens shall be prepared and tested.
The results of re-tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Tables 24.4.4-1 and 24.4.4-2, respectively.
24.4.7 Where the results of impact test conducted in accordance with the requirements specified in
paragraph 24.4.3 do not fulfil the requirements, an additional set of three impact re-test specimens may be
prepared and tested. Re-tests are permitted where not more than two results are below the required average
value, and only one of them is below 70% of the required value.
The results obtained shall be combined with the original results to form a new average which, for
acceptance, shall not be less than the required value. For these combined results, not more than two
individual values shall be less than the required average value, and of these, not more than one shall be
less than 70% of the average value.
24.4.8 Subject to PRS consent, further re-tests may be performed, which shall, however, be done on
a new welded test assembly and shall include all tests that were required for the original assembly, even
those which were required for the original assembly, even those which were previously satisfactory.
24.5 Approval Tests of Covered Electrodes for Manual Arc Welding of Hull Structural Steels
24.5.1 Deposited Metal Tests
To determine the deposited metal properties, two deposited metal test assemblies shall be prepared in
the flat position, one with 4 mm diameter electrode and the other with the largest size manufactured. If an
electrode is available in one diameter only, one test assembly is sufficient. The test assemblies shall be as
shown in Fig. 24.5.1.
The weld metal shall be deposited in multi-run layers. The direction of deposition of each layer shall
alternate from each end of the plate, each run of the weld being not less than 2 mm and not more than
4 mm thick. Welding parameters shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs
24.3.3 and 24.3.4.
From each test assembly, the following test specimens shall be taken:
– one longitudinal tensile test specimen of a round section,
– three impact test specimens.
PRS may require that the chemical composition of the deposited metal should be determined.
The tests results shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-1.
Fig. 24.5.1. Deposited metal test assembly
24.5.2 Butt Weld Tests

In order to determine the mechanical properties of butt weld executed in any welding position (flat,
horizontal-vertical, vertical or overhead) for which the electrode is recommended by the manufacturer, one
test assembly shall be prepared, as shown in Fig. 24.5.2, for each welding position.
Electrodes intended for welding in flat and vertical-upward positions may be used for horizontal-
vertical position subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Fig. 24.5.2. Butt weld test assembly welded manually

The following welding procedure shall be adopted in preparing test assemblies:

– flat position
The first run shall be welded with 4 mm diameter electrode. The remaining runs – with 5 mm diameter
electrodes or above according to the normal welding practice. The runs of the last two layers shall be
welded with the largest diameter of electrode manufactured;
– flat position, the second test assembly (the second test assembly is required for electrodes intended for
welding in the flat position only);
The first run shall be welded with 4 mm diameter electrode. The remaining runs shall be welded with
the largest diameter of electrode manufactured;
– horizontal-vertical position
The first run shall be welded with 4 mm or 5 mm diameter electrode. Subsequent runs – with 5 mm
diameter electrode;
– vertical-upward and overhead positions
The first run shall be welded with 3.25 mm diameter electrode. The remaining runs shall be welded
with 4 mm diameter electrodes or with 5 mm diameter electrodes in accordance with the normal welding
practice or the manufacturer’s recommendations;
– vertical-downward position
The electrode diameter recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.
The back sealing runs shall be made with 4 mm diameter electrodes in the welding position appropriate
to each butt weld test assembly, after cutting out the root run to clean metal. The welding parameters shall
be in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs 24.3.3 and 24.3.4. After radiographic
examinations, the following test specimens shall be taken from each test assembly:
– one transverse tensile test specimen,
– three Charpy V-notch impact test specimens,
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test ,
– one transverse bend test specimen for root bend test.
The results of all tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2.
24.5.3 Deposited Metal Hot Cracking Test
PRS may require that the deposited metal hot cracking test should be performed.
For this purpose, three tee joints shall be prepared as shown in Fig. 24.5.3. The welds shall be, as far as
practicable, made with electrodes of various diameters.
The lower face of the vertical plate shall be straight and shall fit closely the flat upper surface of the
bottom plate.
Tack welds shall be made on the end face of the plate. To prevent distortion, the bottom plate shall be
stiffened by three transverse stiffeners.
Both fillet welds shall be made in a single pass in the flat position.
The welding current used shall be the maximum of the range recommended by the manufacturer for the
electrode. The second fillet weld shall be laid down immediately after completion of the first fillet weld,
starting at the end of the test piece where the first weld terminated. Both fillet welds shall be laid down at
a uniform speed, without weaving the electrode.
Fig. 24.5.3. Tee joint for deposited metal hot cracking test
For welding a fillet length of 120 mm, the lengths of electrodes in accordance with Table 24.5.3 shall
be used up.
Table 24.5.3
Length of fused electrodes at hot cracking test
Length of fused electrode
Diameter of electrode [mm]
[mm]
I fillet II fillet
4 200 150
5 150 100
6 100 75
After welding, the slag shall be removed from the fillet welds. After the test piece has cooled completely
through its entire thickness, the fillet welds shall be examined for cracks using non-destructive methods.
The first fillet weld shall then be removed by machining and the second fillet weld shall be fractured
with the root of the weld in tension. The fracture of the weld shall be free from cracks.
24.5.4 Determining Hydrogen Content in Deposited Metal

24.5.4.1 The hydrogen content shall be determined using the mercury method or thermal conductivity
detector method as specified in standard ISO 3690. Four weld assemblies shall be prepared. The
temperature of the specimens and minimum holding time are to be complied with Table 24.5.4.1, according
to the measuring method.
Table 24.5.4.1
Test temperature Minimum holding time
Measuring method
[°C] [h]
Thermal conductivity detector 1) 45 72
Gas chromatography 150 6
1) The use of hot carrier extraction method may be considered subject to verification of the testing procedure to confirm that
collection and measurement of the hydrogen occurs continuously until all of the diffusible hydrogen is collected.
The glycerine method may be used subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case, however only for
the consumables marked H10 or H15. This method is described in paragraph 24.5.4.2.
24.5.4.2 Four test specimens from hull steel shall be prepared, measuring 12 mm by 25 mm in cross
section by about 125 mm in length and they shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram.
On the 25 × 125 mm surface of each test specimen, a single bead of welding shall be deposited, about
100 mm in length by a 4 mm electrode, fusing 150 mm of the electrode. The welding shall be performed
with an arc as short as possible and with a current of about 150 A. Prior to welding, the electrodes shall be
submitted to the normal drying process recommended by the manufacturer. Within 30 seconds of the
completion of the welding of each specimen the slag shall be removed and the specimen quenched in water
at approximately 20°C. After 30 seconds in water, the specimen shall be cleaned and dried, and then placed
in an apparatus suitable for the collection of hydrogen by displacement of glycerine within a further
30 seconds.
During the process of hydrogen emission, the glycerine shall be kept at a temperature of 45°C during
the test and the specimens shall be kept immersed in the glycerine for a period of 48 hours and, after
removal, they shall be cleaned thoroughly in water and spirit, and then dried by the current of warm air.
After the specimens have cooled down to the ambient temperature, they shall be weighed to the nearest
0.1 g. The amount of gas involved shall be measured to the nearest 0.05 cm3, and corrected for temperature
and pressure to 0°C and 760 mm Hg.
The content of hydrogen in deposited metal shall be taken as the average value of the test results
obtained on four specimens. The average values obtained shall not exceed those specified in Table 24.4.5,
and the individual results shall not exceed this value by more than 20%.
24.5.5 Approval Tests of Electrodes Intended for Fillet Welds

For electrodes intended exclusively for welding fillet welds, the following shall be performed:
– deposited metal test assemblies, in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 24.5.1,
– tee joints, as shown in Fig. 24.5.5-1, one for each welding position for which the tested electrodes are
intended,
– determining the hydrogen content in the deposited metal for hydrogen-controlled electrodes.
The joints shall be welded in each position for which the electrodes are intended (flat, horizontal-
vertical, vertical-upward, vertical-downward, horizontal overhead) using electrodes of the size
recommended by the manufacturer for the particular welding position.
The length of the specimen shall ensure the deposition of the weld with the electrode completely fused.
The weld on one side of the assembly shall be made with the maximum size of electrode manufactured
and on the other – with the minimum size of electrode manufactured. The welding parameters shall be in
accordance with the electrode manufacturer’s recommendations.
From three test pieces of about 25 mm in width, 3 specimens for macroscopic examination shall be
prepared and the hardness of the weld, heat affected zone and parent metal shall be determined by Vickers
(HV) method – in accordance with Fig. 24.5.5-1 and Fig. 24.5.5-2.
Hardness of the weld and heat affected zone shall not be greater than 350 HV (under a load of 98 N).
Two test pieces of a tee joint remaining after the preparation of specimens for macroscopic examination
shall be subjected to breaking test. From one piece, the first weld shall be removed by arc-gouging or
machining and the second weld shall be fractured with the root of the weld in tension. From the second
piece, the second weld shall be removed and the first weld shall be subjected to breaking test in the same
way as the first piece. The fractures of the welds shall be free from cracks, incomplete fusion or excessive
porosity.
Fig. 24.5.5-1. Tee joint test assembly for testing electrodes intended for fillet weld
20
HAZ
20
Fig. 24.5.5-2. Sketch for determining the tee joint hardness

24.5.6 Approval Tests of Electrodes for Gravity Welding

In the case of electrodes designed solely for gravity welding, the deposited metal test assembly, as
shown in Fig. 24.5.1, and a tee joint, as shown in Fig. 24.5.5-1 shall be prepared.
Welding parameters shall be in accordance with the electrode manufacturer’s recommendations. From
the test assemblies, specimens shall be taken in accordance with the above-mentioned figures. The results
of deposited metal tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-1; the results of tee joints
tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.5.5.
Where an electrode has been approved for manual welding and is also recommended for gravity
welding, additional tests of tee joints, using gravity welding device, shall be performed.
24.5.7 Annual Tests

All approved electrodes are subject to annual tests. The annual test shall involve the following:
– electrodes for manual welding – two deposited metal test assemblies shall be prepared in accordance
with Fig. 24.5.1. The welding conditions for test assemblies preparation are specified in sub-chapter
24.5.1; this applies also to electrodes designed solely for fillet welding;
– electrodes designed solely for gravity welding – one deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared in
accordance with Fig. 24.5.1. The deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared with a representative
electrode according to the normal welding practice.
From the deposited metal test assemblies, specimens shall be taken in accordance with Fig. 24.5.1. The
test results shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-l.
For hydrogen-controlled electrodes marked H5 or H10, PRS may require that the hydrogen content in
the deposited metal should be determined.
Where, at the time of annual tests, upgrading of welding consumable, without the change of the
approved deposited metal mechanical properties, i.e. Re, Rm, A, is requested by the manufacturer, then, in
addition to deposited metal test assemblies, butt weld test assemblies for all welding positions, for which
the welding consumable has been approved, shall be prepared. After radiographic examination, 3 impact
test specimens shall be taken from each of the test assemblies in accordance with the requirements specified
in sub-chapter 24.5.2. The impact test temperature shall correspond to the requested upgrading of the
welding consumable.
Where the extension of approval is requested by the manufacturer, i.e. a consumable shall be approved
for welding higher strength steels, then, at the approval tests, test assemblies shall be prepared and tested
in accordance with the recommendations specified in sub-chapters 24.3, 24.5.1, 24.5.2 or 24.10.
24.6 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Submerged Arc Welding
of Hull Structural Steels
The present requirements apply to wire-flux combinations for multi-run and two-run automatic welding
techniques.
Where particular wire-flux combinations are intended for welding with both techniques, tests shall be
performed for each technique.
24.6.1 Deposited Metal Test
To determine the deposited metal properties, one deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared in the
flat position as shown in Fig. 24.6.1.
The weld shall be deposited using multi-run technique. The direction of deposition of each run shall
alternate from each end of the plate.
Between each run, the assembly shall be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250°C, but not
below 100°C.
The thickness of each layer shall be at least 4 mm, however not less than the diameter of the wire.
Welding parameters shall fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapters 24.3.3 and 24.3.4. The results
of tests performed on test specimens taken from the test assembly shall fulfil the requirements specified in
Table 24.4.4-1.
Transverse tensile
Transverse bend test
Transverse bend test
Transverse tensile
Fig. 24.6.2. Butt weld test assembly welded with multi-run technique
24.6.2 Butt Weld Tests for Multi-run Technique

To determine the butt weld properties, one butt weld test assembly shall be prepared in the flat position
as shown in Fig. 24.6.2. The welding parameters shall fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapters
24.3.3 and 24.3.4.
The root run shall be cut out to clean metal and welded.
After radiographic examination, the following test specimens shall be prepared and tested:
– two transverse tensile test specimens,
– three impact test specimens,
– two transverse bend test specimens for face bend test,
– two transverse bend test specimens for root bend test.
The results of tests performed on specimens taken from the test assembly in accordance with Fig. 24.6.2
shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2.
24.6.3 Butt Weld Tests for Two-run Technique

Where approval for use with two-run technique is requested, butt weld test assemblies shall be prepared
in accordance with Fig. 24.6.3:
– for Grades 1 and 1Y – one test assembly 12 to 15 mm in thickness and one test assembly 20÷25 mm in
thickness,
– for Grades 2, 2Y, 2Y40, 3, 3Y, 3Y40, 4Y, 4Y40 – one test assembly 20÷25 mm in thickness and one
test assembly 30÷35 mm in thickness.
Transverse tensile
Fig. 24.6.3. Butt weld test assembly welded with two-run technique
Edge preparation of test assemblies and the wire diameter shall be in accordance with Table 24.6.3.
The root gap shall not exceed 1 mm. Butt weld test assemblies shall be welded in two runs. After
completion of the first run and prior to the next run, the test assembly shall be left in still air until it has cooled
down to less than 250°C, however not below 100°C. The welding parameters shall be in accordance with the
welding consumable manufacturer’s recommendations and normal good welding practice.
After radiographic examination, the following test specimens shall be taken from each test assembly
and tested:
– two flat transverse tensile test specimens,
Table 24.6.3
Edge preparation of butt weld test assemblies for two-run technique
Plate
Maximum wire diameter
thickness Edge preparation Grade of welding consumable
[mm]
[mm]
1
12÷15 5
1Y
1
1Y
2
2Y
2Y40
20÷25 6 3
3Y
3Y40
4Y
4Y40
5Y40
2
2Y
2Y40
3
30÷35 7 3Y
3Y40
4Y
4Y40
5Y40
From each test assembly with the thickness of 20 mm and above, one longitudinal tensile test specimen
shall be additionally taken.
The results of the tests performed on a longitudinal tensile test specimen shall fulfil the requirements
specified in Table 24.4.4-1; the results of the tests performed on the remaining specimens shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2.
24.6.4 Annual Tests
The approved wire/flux combinations are subject to annual tests.
For multi-run technique, only deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared in accordance with Fig.
24.6.1. From the test assembly, the following test specimens shall be taken:
– one longitudinal tensile test specimen,
For multi-run and two-run techniques, in addition to deposited metal test assembly for multi-run
technique, butt weld test assembly with minimum 20 mm thickness plate shall be prepared in accordance
with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.6.3.
After radiographic examination, the following test specimens shall be taken from the test assembly:
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test – the first run,
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test – the second run.
For wire-flux combination approved solely for the two-run technique, only butt weld test assembly with
minimum 20 mm thickness plate shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-
chapter 24.6.3.
After radiographic examination, the following test specimens shall be taken from the test assembly:
– one bend tensile test specimen,
– one flat transverse tensile test specimen,
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test – the second run.
Where a wire-flux combination is approved for welding both normal strength and higher strength steel
using two-run technique, the annual tests shall be performed on test assemblies prepared from higher strength
steel.
The results of the tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Tables 24.4.4-l and 24.4.4-2.
24.7 Approval Tests of Wires without and with Shielding Gas
The requirements specified in this sub-chapter apply to the approval of solid wires and flux-cored wires
for use with shielding gas and to the approval of flux-cored wires for use without shielding gas, intended for:
– semi-automatic welding,
– single electrode automatic multi-run welding,
– single electrode automatic two-run welding.
PRS approval is valid only for this wire/shielding gas combination which has been subjected to approval
tests.
24.7.1 Shielding Gases
Marking and composition of gas types and mixtures are specified in Table 24.7.1.
Table 24.7.1
Composition of gas types and mixtures
Gas composition (Vol. %)
Group
CO2 O2 H2 Ar1)
1 > 0 up to 5 – > 0 up to 5 remainder
2 > 0 up to 5 – – remainder
M1
3 – > 0 up to 3 – remainder
4 > 0 up to 5 > 0 up to 3 – remainder
M2 2 – > 3 up to 10 – remainder
M3 2 – > 10 up to 15 – remainder
1 100 – – –
C
2 remainder > 0 up to 30 – –
1) Argon may be substituted by helium up to 95% of its content.
24.7.2 Determining Hydrogen Content in Deposited Metal

Flux-cored wires which have satisfied the requirements for Grades 2, 2Y, 2Y40, 3, 3Y, 3Y40, 4Y, 4Y40
shall be subjected to a hydrogen test.
To determine the hydrogen content in deposited metal, flux-cored wires shall be submitted to tests in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.5.4, using the recommended, by the
manufacturer, welding parameters and adjusting the deposition rate to give the weight of weld deposit per
specimen similar to that deposited when using electrodes for manual arc welding.
24.7.3 Approval Tests of Wires for Semi-Automatic Welding

At approval tests of wires for semi-automatic welding, to determine the deposited metal properties, two
deposited metal tests assemblies shall be prepared in the flat position in accordance with Fig. 24.5.1, one
using the smallest diameter and the other using the largest diameter of wire intended for the welding of ship
structures. Where only one diameter is manufactured, only one deposited metal test assembly shall be
prepared. The weld metal shall be deposited according to the practice recommended by the manufacturer
and the thickness of each layer of weld metal shall be between 2 and 6 mm.
Chemical analysis of the deposited metal shall be made.
From the deposited metal test assemblies, the following test specimens shall be taken:
The results of the tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-1.
To determine the butt weld properties, butt weld test assemblies shall be prepared in accordance with
Fig. 24.5.2 for each recommended, by the manufacturer, welding position. The flat assembly shall be
welded using, for the first run, the wire of the smallest diameter to be approved and for the remaining runs,
the wire of the largest diameter to be approved. The butt weld test assemblies in positions other than the
flat shall be welded using, for the remaining runs, the largest diameter of wire recommended by the
manufacturer for the position concerned.
Where approval is requested only in the flat position, an additional butt weld test assembly shall be
prepared in that position using wire of diameter different from that used for preparing the first assembly.
Where only one diameter is manufactured, only one flat butt weld test assembly shall be prepared.
Welding parameters shall be in accordance with the wire manufacturer's recommendations specified in
WPS and normal good welding practice.
After radiographic examination, the following test specimens shall be taken from test assemblies:
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test,
– one transverse bend test specimen for root bend test .
The results of the tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2. Wires intended
exclusively for welding fillet welds shall be tested in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-
chapter 24.5.5.
24.7.4 Approval Tests of Wires for Automatic Multi-Run Welding
Solid wires and flux-cored wires for use with shielding gas, as well as flux-cored wires for use without
shielding gas approved for multi-run semi-automatic welding may be also accepted, without additional
tests, for use in multi-run automatic welding.
Approval tests of wires for automatic multi-run welding shall be performed in accordance with the
below mentioned recommendations.
To determine the deposited metal properties, one deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared in the
flat position as shown in Fig. 24.6.1. The diameter of the wire shall be in accordance with the welding
practice with the wires. The welding parameters shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the
welding consumables’ manufacturer and good welding practice. The thickness of each layer shall be not
less than 3 mm.
Chemical analysis of the deposited metal shall be made. From the prepared deposited metal test
assembly, specimens shall be taken as shown in Fig. 24.6.1. The results of the tests shall fulfil the
requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-1.
To determine the butt weld properties, butt weld test assembly shall be prepared in the flat position
according to Fig. 24.6.2. The welding conditions shall fulfil the requirements specified in sub-chapters
24.3.3 and 24.3.4.
From the prepared test assemblies, specimens shall be taken as shown in Fig. 24.6.2. The results of the
tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2.
24.7.5 Approval Tests of Wires for Automatic Two-Run Welding

Approval tests of wires for automatic two-run welding shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.6.3, having regard to the following recommendations:
– irrespective of the approval grade, two butt weld test assemblies shall be prepared, using plates of
12÷15 mm and 20÷25 mm in thickness. The plates shall be welded as shown in Fig. 24.7.5;
Fig. 24.7.5. Two-run butt weld test assemblies
– where approval is requested for welding plate thicker than 25 mm, two butt weld test assemblies shall
also be prepared – one assembly shall be prepared using plates approximately 20 mm in thickness and
the other using plates of the maximum thickness for which approval is requested. The beveling of the
plate thicker than 25 mm, as well as the wire diameter and the welding parameters shall be in accordance
with the wire manufacturer’s recommendations.
From the prepared test assemblies, specimens shall be taken as shown in Fig. 24.6.3. The results of the
tests shall fulfil the requirements specified in Tables 24.4.4-1 and 24.4.4-2.
24.7.6 Annual Tests
The approved solid wires and flux-cored wires for use with shielding gas, as well as flux-cored wires
for use without shielding gas are subject to annual tests.
Within the scope of the tests, the following shall be performed:
– for wires approved for semi-automatic welding, the deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.7.3, using one of approved diameter
wires,
– for wires approved for automatic multi-run welding, the deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared
in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.7.4,
– for wires approved for automatic two-run welding, the butt weld test assembly shall be prepared in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.7.5, using plate 20 ÷ 25 mm in thickness.
The diameters of wires used shall be stated in the test report.
From the deposited metal test assemblies – multi-run semi-automatic and automatic welding – the
following test specimens shall be taken:
From the butt weld test assembly – two-run automatic welding – after radiographic examination, the
following test specimens shall be taken:
– one transverse bend test specimen for face bend test – the second run,
– one longitudinal tensile test specimen when the wire is approved solely for automatic two-run welding.
For flux-cored wires PRS may require that a hydrogen test should be performed at annual tests.
24.8 Approval Tests of Consumables for Use in Electroslag and Electrogas Welding
24.8.1 Test Assemblies’ Testing
Approval tests of consumables for electroslag and electrogas welding shall be performed in accordance
with the below mentioned recommendations.
Two butt weld test assemblies shall be prepared as shown in Fig. 24.8.1, one of them using plates
20 ÷ 25 mm thick, the other using plates 35 ÷ 40 mm thick or more. The grade of steel to be used for the
assemblies shall be selected in accordance with Table 24.3.1. For consumables intended for welding higher
strength tensile steel, a niobium treated steel shall be used for the approval tests.
Longitudinal tensile test specimen
Longitudinal tensile test specimen
Fig. 24.8.1. Electroslag and electrogas butt weld test assembly
The edge preparation, gap and welding conditions shall fulfil the recommendations specified by the
welding consumables manufacturer.
From the prepared butt weld test assemblies subjected to radiographic examination, specimens shall be
taken as shown in Fig. 24.8.1. From each of the test assemblies the following specimens shall be taken:
– two longitudinal tensile test specimens,
– two transverse bend test specimens,

– two side bend test specimens
– two sets of Charpy V-notch test specimens consisting of three items each; in one set the specimens with
the notches in the centreline of the weld whereas in the other set, the specimens with their notches at
2 mm from fusion line, in the weld,
– two macroscopic test specimens.
The results of the tests performed on the longitudinal tensile test specimens shall fulfil the requirements
specified in Table 24.4.4-1, whereas for the remaining specimens – the requirements specified in Table
24.4.4-2.
24.8.2 Annual Tests
Approved welding consumables for use in electroslag and electrogas welding are subject to annual tests.
Within the scope of the tests, one butt weld test assembly using plates 20÷25 mm in thickness shall be
prepared in accordance with Fig. 24.8.1.
From the prepared butt weld test assembly subjected to radiographic examination, test specimens shall
be taken in accordance with Fig. 24.8.1. The results of the tests performed on round tensile test specimens
shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-1. The results of the tests performed on the remaining
specimens shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2.
24.9 Approval Tests of Consumables for One Side Welding on Backing Strips
24.9.1 Approval tests of consumables for one side welding on backing strips shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapters 24.5, 24.6 and 24.7 for appropriate welding
method, having regard to the recommendations specified below.
The deposited metal test assembly shall be prepared in accordance with Fig. 24.5.1 or Fig. 24.6.1,
depending on the welding method.
To determine the properties of a butt weld, a test assembly shall be prepared using plates of 20–25 mm
in thickness for each welding position recommended by the manufacturer, see Fig. 24.9.
For high heat input welding processes where the minimum thickness of individual layers exceeds 6
mm, the second test assembly shall be made of 35–40 mm in thickness. In addition to the test specimens
indicated in Fig. 24.9, one set of three Charpy V-notch impact test specimens shall be prepared; the
specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at the plate mid-thickness, and the notch shall be situated in
the middle of the weld as shown in Fig. 24.3.11-1.
The edge preparation, gap and welding conditions shall fulfil the recommendations specified by the
welding consumables manufacturer.
Mechanical properties of deposited metal shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-1; the
mechanical properties of the butt weld shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.4.4-2, for the
appropriate grades of welding consumables.
Where welding consumables have been approved by PRS for welding without backings, only butt weld
test assembly shall be prepared in accordance with Fig. 24.9.
24.10 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for High Strength Steels
24.10.1 Welding consumables for high strength steel shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
specified in sub-chapters 24.5, 24.6 and 24.7. Approval of welding consumables for automatic welding is
subject to special consideration by PRS.
Test assemblies shall be prepared from high strength steel; for the tests, the steel grade shall be selected
in accordance with Table 24.10.1.
The deposited metal test assemblies may be prepared from other grade steel, provided that the side walls
of the weld, before assembling, are buttered with the welding consumable subjected to approval.
Welding parameters shall be in accordance with the welding consumables and steel manufacturers’
recommendations.
Fig. 24.9. Butt weld test assembly made on backings
Table 24.10.1
Steel requirements for the approval tests of welding consumables for high strength steel
Grade of welding consumables Grade of high strength steel
3Y42 A420, D420
4Y42 A420, D420, E420
5Y42 A420, D420, E420, F420
3Y46 A460, D460
4Y46 A460, D460, E460
5Y46 A460, D460, E460, F460
3Y50 A500, D500
4Y50 A500, D500, E500,
5Y50 A500, D500, E500, F500
3Y55 A550, D550
4Y55 A550, D550, E550
5Y55 A550, D550, E550, F550
3Y62 A620, D620
4Y62 A620, D620, E620
5Y62 A620, D620, E620, F620
3Y69 A690, D690
4Y69 A690, D690, E690
5Y69 A690, D690, E690, F690
3Y89 A890, D890
4Y89 A890, D890, E890
3Y96 A960, D960
4Y96 A960, D960, E960
24.10.2 Mechanical properties of deposited metal, obtained from consumables, shall fulfil the requirements
specified in Table 24.10.2.
Table 24.10.2
Tensile strength test Charpy V-notch impact test
Grade
Re A5 Average value
of welding Rm Test temperature
[MPa] [%] from three specimens, [J]
consumable [MPa] [°C]
min. min. min.1)
3Y42 –20
4Y42 420 520 ÷ 680 20 –40 47
5Y42 –60
3Y46 –20
4Y46 460 540 ÷ 720 20 –40 47
5Y46 –60
3Y50 –20
4Y50 500 590 ÷ 770 18 –40 50
5Y50 –60
3Y55 –20
4Y55 550 640 ÷ 820 18 –40 55
5Y55 –60
3Y62 –20
4Y62 620 700 ÷ 890 18 –40 62
5Y62 –60
3Y69 –20
4Y69 690 770 ÷ 940 17 –40 69
5Y69 –60
3Y89 –20
890 940 ÷ 1100 14 69
4Y89 –40
3Y96 –20
960 980 ÷ 1150 13 69
4Y96 –40
1) For the requirements regarding minimum individual values of impact energy and re-tests, see paragraphs 24.4.3 and 24.4.7.
24.10.3 Mechanical properties of welded joints shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.10.3.
Table 24.10.3
Requirements for mechanical properties of welded joint
Tensile strength Charpy V-notch impact test Bending

Grade of welding Rm Average value from
consumable [MPa] Test temperature three specimens Bending angle Bend ratio
min. [°C] [J] min. [degrees]1) D/t 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6
3Y42 –20
4Y42 520 –40 47 120 4
5Y42 –60
3Y46 –20
4Y46 540 –40 47 120 4
5Y46 –60
3Y50 –20
4Y50 590 –40 50 120 4
5Y50 –60
3Y55 –20
4Y55 640 –40 55 120 5
5Y55 –60
3Y62 –20
4Y62 700 –40 62 120 5
5Y62 –60
1 2 3 4 5 6
3Y69 –20
4Y69 770 –40 69 120 5
5Y69 –60
3Y89 –20
890 69 120 6
4Y89 –40
3Y96 –20
960 69 120 7
4Y96 –40
1) Bending angle attained before the first incipient cracks; minor cracks up to max. 3 mm are disregarded.
2) D – former diameter, t – specimen thickness.
24.10.4 If, during the bend test, the bending angle specified in Table 24.10.3 has not been attained, the
test may be considered satisfactory if the gauge length L0 relative elongation (Fig. 24.10.4) fulfils the
requirements specified in Table 24.10.2.
Fig. 24.10.4. Bend test dimensions
24.10.5 Consumables for welding high strength steel, other than solid wire-gas combinations, shall be
subjected to a hydrogen test. The hydrogen content in deposited metal shall be determined by the mercury
method or any other method, such as the gas chromatographic method which correlates with the mercury
method in respect of cooling rate, the preparation time of the weld samples and the hydrogen content
determination.
24.10.6 The permissible hydrogen content in the deposited metal for particular grades of consumables
intended for welding high strength steel is specified in Table 24.10.6.
Table 24.10.6
Permissible hydrogen content in deposited metal from welding consumables
for welding high strength steels
Hydrogen content in deposited metal
Grade of welding consumables Hydrogen symbol [cm3/100 g] deposited weld metal
max.
3, 4, 5Y42
3, 4, 5Y46 H10 10
3, 4, 5Y50
3, 4, 5Y55
3, 4, 5Y62
3, 4, 5Y69 H5 5
3, 4Y89
3, 4Y96
24.10.7 Annual Tests

Approved welding consumables for welding high strength steels are subject to annual tests.
The tests shall include deposited metal test, in accordance with Fig. 24.5.1 or Fig. 24.6.1, depending on
welding consumables.
The scope of the tests shall be as required for annual tests in accordance with the requirements specified
in paragraphs 24.5.7, 24.6.4, 24.7.6, depending on welding consumable.
For grades 3Y89, 4Y89, 3Y96 and 4Y96 annual hydrogen test is required.
In special cases, PRS may require additional tests, e.g. welded joints tests, to be performed.
24.11 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Boiler Steels

Approval tests of consumables for welding boiler steels shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements specified in sub-chapters 24.5 to 24.7, taking account of the following recommendations:
– test assemblies shall be prepared from the boiler steel for which the welding consumables are intended;
– from deposited metal and butt weld test assemblies, three additional Charpy V-notch specimens shall
be taken for impact test after ageing (ageing conditions – 5% plastic strain and annealing at temperature
of 250°C during 1 hour). The test conditions and requirements are subject to PRS acceptance in each
particular case;
– when testing welding consumables for boiler steels operating at a temperature exceeding 350°C, PRS
may require performing the tensile test at the maximum working temperature, with determination of the
proof stress R0.2. The tests and the tests results assessment shall be agreed with PRS.
24.12 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Machinery, Equipment and Piping Steels
Welding consumables approved for hull structural and boiler steels may be also approved, without
additional testing, for steels intended for the manufacture of machinery, equipment and piping, provided
they are made of steel similar to hull structural steel or having similar properties.
In all other cases, the welding consumables shall be tested in connection with steels for which they are
intended.
The tests shall be performed in accordance with a programme agreed with PRS.
24.13 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Stainless and Clad Steels
24.13.1 Approval tests of consumables for welding stainless steels, described in Chapter 8, shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements specified in sub-chapters 24.5, 24.6 and 24.7. Test
assemblies shall be made from steel for which approval of the consumables is requested. The deposited
metal test assemblies may be prepared from other grade steel, provided that the side walls of the weld,
before assembling, are buttered with the welding consumable, subjected to approval.
The deposited metal tests results shall comply with the properties guaranteed by the manufacturer; the
butt weld tests results – with the minimum specified properties of steel for which they are intended.
24.13.2 In order to determine the properties of butt weld made of clad steel, two test assemblies shall
be prepared as shown in Fig. 24.13.2-1 in accordance with the welding procedure specification agreed with
PRS: one assembly shall be prepared from the material of a minimum thickness, the other from the material
of a maximum thickness for which the tested welding consumables are intended. From the prepared test
assemblies, specimens shall be taken as shown in Fig. 24.13.2-1. From bend test specimen, the surplus
of the weld shall be removed, not more, however, than to the level of the cladding. The measurement
of hardness shall be performed as shown in Fig. 24.13.2-2.
In the case of two-side clad steel plates, for transverse bend test, a double number of specimens shall
be cut from the test assembly. The bend test shall be performed with the clad layer in tension. The
measurement of hardness shall be performed as shown in Fig. 24.13.2-2.
For the welds where the plate is two-side cladded, the measurement of hardness shall be performed on
both sides.
The hardness shall be measured by Vickers method (under the load of 98 N). The bend test results shall
fulfil the requirements specified in paragraph 24.4.2. The hardness measurement results shall be submitted
to PRS for acceptance in each particular case.
Fig. 24.13.2-1. Butt weld test assembly
Fig. 24.13.2-2. Butt weld hardness test specimen
24.14 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Copper, Heavy Metals

and other on-Ferrous Metals
Consumable intended for welding the particular parent metal shall be tested on the material concerned.
The tests shall be performed in accordance with a programme agreed with PRS.
24.15 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for Aluminium Alloys
24.15.1 The requirements specified in sub-chapter 24.15 apply to the approval of welding consumables
(wires or rods) intended for welding, with shielding gas, of wrought aluminium alloys specified in sub-
chapter 18.1.
Consumables recommended for welding wrought aluminium alloys are divided into two types:
– solid rods intended for tungsten inert gas arc welding – TIG welding,
– solid wires intended for semi-automatic or automatic metal-arc inert gas welding – MIG welding
or automatic TIG welding.
24.15.2 The grade notation of welding consumables intended for welding wrought aluminium alloys
consists of two capital letters.
The first letter indicates the type of welding consumables:
R – solid rod,
W – solid wire.
The second letter indicates the welding consumable application, depending on the grade of alloy used
for tests assemblies’ preparation:
A – 5754
B – 5086
C – 5083, 5383, 5456, 5059
D – 6005A, 6061, 6082.

Welding consumables approved on higher strength AlMg grades may also be used for lower tensile
strength AlMg grades and their combination with AlSi grades.
24.15.3 Aluminium alloy grades for the test assemblies intended for approval tests of particular grades
of welding consumables shall be selected in accordance with Table 24.15.3-1.
Table 24.15.3-1
Aluminium alloy requirements for approval tests of welding consumables
Aluminium alloy grades
Consumable quality grade Alloy designation
Numerical Chemical symbol
RA/WA 5754 AlMg3
RB/WB 5086 AlMg4
5083 AlMg4.5Mn0.7
5383 AlMg4.5Mn0.9
RC/WC
5456 AlMg5
5059 –
6005A AlSiMg(A)
RD/WD 6061 AlMg1SiCu
6082 AlSi1MgMn
Approval of a wire or rod will be granted in conjunction with a shielding gas – specified in accordance
with Table 24.15.3-2 – used for the approval tests.
Composition of the shielding gas shall be given in the test report.
Table 24.15.3-2
Composition of shielding gases and mixtures for welding aluminium alloys
Gas composition (Vol. %)
Gas designation
Argon (Ar) Helium (He)
I–1 100 –
I–2 – 100
I–3 Rest 0 to 33
I–4 Rest 33 to 66
I–5 Rest 66 to 95
S Special composition gas 1)
1) Gases of other chemical composition (mixed gases) may be considered as “special gases” and covered by separate tests subject
24.15.4 To determine the chemical composition of deposited metal, one test assembly, as shown in Fig
24.15.4, shall be prepared. The test assembly dimensions, dependent on the grade of welding consumable
and the welding process, shall give a sufficient amount of pure weld metal for chemical analysis.
Chemical composition of the parent metal shall be compatible with the weld metal.
Chemical composition of the deposited metal shall be determined by the manufacturer and stated on
the material certificate.
The results of the analysis shall not exceed the limit values specified by the manufacturer.

24.15.5 Testing of welded joints shall be performed on butt-weld test assemblies prepared from base
materials specified in Table 24.15.3-1, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Butt-weld test assemblies with a thickness of 10÷12 mm shall be prepared for each welding position
(flat, horizontal-vertical, vertical-upward and overhead) recommended by the welding consumable
manufacturer.
Consumables approved for flat and vertical-upward positions may also be used for the horizontal-
vertical position subject to PRS acceptance in each particular case.
Additionally, one test assembly with a thickness of 20÷25 mm shall be welded in the flat position only.
The minimum dimensions of test assemblies are 350 × 350 mm. The edge preparation, gap and welding
parameters shall fulfil the recommendations specified by the tested welding consumables manufacturer.
On completion of welding, test assemblies shall be allowed to cool naturally to ambient temperature.
Welded test assemblies and test specimens shall not be subjected to any heat treatment. Prior to tests,
Grade D test assemblies shall be subjected to natural ageing for a minimum of 72 hours from the
completion of welding.
After test assemblies’ radiographic examination, the following test specimens shall be taken:
– one macroscopic test specimen,
The dimensions of transverse tensile test specimens shall be in accordance with Fig. 2.5.6, whereas the
dimensions of bend test specimens – in accordance with Fig. 2.7.4.
24.15.6 Mechanical properties of butt welds shall fulfil the requirements specified in Table 24.15.6.
The position of the specimen fracture shall be indicated in the test report.
Table 24.15.6
Requirements for mechanical properties of butt weld
Tensile strength Bend test 1)
Consumable Base material
Rm [MPa] Bending angle
grade used for test Former diameter
min. min.
RA/WA 5754 190 3t
RB/WB 5086 240 6t
5083 275 6t
180°
RC/WC 5383 or 5456 290 6t
5059 330 6t
RD/WD 6061, 6005A or 6082 170 6t
t specimen thickness
1) During the test, the test specimen shall not reveal a single flaw greater than 3 mm (in any direction). Flaws appearing at the
corners of a test specimen shall be ignored in the evaluation, unless there is evidence that they result from lack of fusion.
Macroscopic tests are performed to detect such imperfections as: lack of fusion, cavities, inclusions,
pores or cracks.
24.15.7 Annual tests cover:

– preparation of deposited metal test assembly in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph
24.15.4,
– preparation of one flat butt weld test assembly with a thickness of 10÷12 mm; the test specimens shall
be taken in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 24.15.5.
24.16 Approval Tests of Welding Consumables for YP47 steels
24.16.1 The requirements specified in 24.1 ÷ 24.10 apply unless otherwise specified in this sub-chapter.
24.16.2 Mechanical properties of deposited metal and welded joint of welding consumables for YP47
steels shall be in accordance with Tables 24.16.2-1 and 24.16.2-2.
Table 24.16.2-1
Tensile strength test Charpy V-notch impact test
Re A5 Average value
Rm [%] Test temperature
[MPa] from three specimens, [J]
[MPa] min. [°C]
min. min.1)
460 570 ÷ 720 19 –20 64
Table 24.16.2-2
Requirements for mechanical properties of welded joint
Charpy V-notch impact test Bending
Tensile strength
Rm Average value from
Test temperature Bending angle Bend ratio
[MPa] three specimens
[°C] [degrees]1) D/t 2)
[J] min.
570 ÷ 720 –20 64 20 4
24.16.3 Special care shall be paid to the final welding so that harmful defects do not remain.
Jig mountings shall be completely removed with no defects in general, otherwise the treatment of the
mounting shall be accepted by PRS.
Welded Structure Manufacturers 189
25 WELDED STRUCTURE MANUFACTURERS

25.1.1 Manufacturers, including their all plants and subcontractors, using welding processes for
construction and repair of the structures which are subject to technical survey by PRS shall have valid
approval by PRS to the welding in the scope covering the work performed.
25.1.2 Manufacturer requesting an approval shall specify in detail the scope of the requested approval.
The requesting manufacturer shall specify the welding processes to be approved and the scope of approval
for each of those processes, indicating the following:
– groups and grades of base materials intended to be welded using the particular welding process
including the type of product (plates, tubes),
– dimension ranges for parent metals, i.e. ranges of thickness for plates and diameters and ranges of wall
thicknesses for tubes,
– weld types (butt, fillet),
– weld details for butt welds and fillet welds,
– welding positions.
25.1.3 Within the approval procedure, the manufacturer shall demonstrate and document that – in the
requested scope of approval – their organisation, personnel, equipment, welding processes used in the
fabrication conditions, supervision of the processes of construction or repair of the welded structures as
well as their final control ensure reproducible quality of the structures made and compliance with PRS
requirements.
25.1.4 The manufacturer shall employ welders holding valid PRS qualification certificates necessary (see
paragraph 23.1.1) for performance of the welding processes within the scope of the approval requested by
the manufacturer.
25.1.5 The condition for issuance by PRS the Approval Certificate is a satisfactory result of the approval
procedure used. The detailed range of approval is specified in the Annex to the Approval Certificate.
25.1.6 Approval Certificate issued for one manufacturer’s plant also applies to their branches provided
they report to the same quality management unit and the same technical supervision.
25.1.7 Approval Certificate is issued, by PRS, for a three-year period. The condition for maintaining the
certificate validity for three years is the manufacturer’s compliance with the conditions specified in
Approval Certificate. The manufacturer shall conduct an ongoing analysis – in accordance with the
requirements specified in Publication 80/P – Non-destructive Testing, of welding quality based on the
results of non-destructive testing of the welds performed and determine the percentage quality index
of welded joints at least once in six months.
25.1.8 Prior to the Approval Certificate expiry date, the manufacturer intending to renew its validity
shall request PRS to renew the Approval Certificate. This shall take place in sufficient advance so that the
renewal procedure can be completed and the Approval Certificate be issued before the expiry date of the
existing Approval Certificate.
25.1.9 Extension of the approval specified in the Approval Certificate may take place at the request
of the manufacturer during the period of validity of the existing approval or within the approval renewal
procedure. The procedure and requirements are the same as in the case of manufacturer approval.
25.2 Approval Procedure
25.2.1 Manufacturer intending to obtain an approval shall request PRS to initiate the approval
procedure. Together with the relevant request, the technical documentation including the organisation and
technical particulars concerning the manufacturer specified in sub-chapter 25.3 as well as the welding
procedure qualification programme corresponding to the requested scope of approval shall be submitted.
25.2.2 Approval procedure covers:
– consideration of the technical documentation submitted by the manufacturer,
– acceptance of welding procedure qualification programme,
– supervision of the welding procedure qualification tests, performed by the manufacturer, corresponding
to the scope of approval,
– manufacturer inspection.
25.3 Technical Documentation
Documentation of the manufacturer requesting PRS approval for using particular welding processes
shall include the following:
– manufacturer’s name,
– manufacturer’s organisation chart,
– description of the plant experience in construction or repair of welded structures,
– manufacturer’s reference list, e.g. copies of approval certificates issued by other bodies, copies
of quality management system certificates, etc.,
– requested scope of approval, as required in paragraph 25.1.2,
– particulars concerning the person supervising the welding operations at the manufacturer and other welding
personnel and quality control staff, including their qualifications, record of work and authorisation,
– list of the welders employed who have valid PRS certificates; for welders having certificates issued by
other institutions, the name of such institution shall be provided,
– description of the plant technical infrastructure including: production workshops possessed, storage
rooms – including a store room for welding consumables, lifting appliances, machining appliances used
for edge preparation for welding, fusion cutting appliances as well as welding appliances – including
type and year of their manufacture, pre-heating appliances, post-weld heat treatment appliances,
stationary and holding ovens for welding consumables, welding equipment,
– parent materials used (grades, product types, dimensional ranges),
– welding consumables used,
– welding procedure specifications used, and other documents applied by the manufacturer during
welding operations, e.g. concerning the welding sequence, welding consumables’ handling, welding
operations quality control, performing of non-destructive testing and other tests.
The above mentioned particulars concerning the manufacturer may be communicated to PRS by
completing the relevant PRS form to which copies of the required documents shall be enclosed.
25.4 Manufacturer Inspection
25.4.1 Manufacturer inspection is intended to verify the data provided by the manufacturer. Where
welding processes are being performed at the separate manufacturer’s plants at different locations and they
report to the same the same quality management unit and the same technical supervision, the inspection
also applies to those plants.
25.4.2 The inspection covers technical and organisational conditions at the manufacturer in respect
of welding processes being the subject of the requested approval. The manufacturer inspection is intended
to verify:
– supervising personnel – by verifying documents confirming their theoretical job knowledge, hand-on
experience and authorisation of the welding supervision staff and quality control staff,
– welders – by verifying welders’ register, validity of welders’ qualification certificates issued by PRS
corresponding to the requested approval, methods of marking the welds performed by particular
welders, welders’ identification marks,
– plant equipment – by verifying the condition of cutting appliances, welding appliances, as well as drying
appliances and conditions of storage of covered electrodes and fluxes for submerged-arc welding,
register of the possessed equipment, its supervision and periodical maintenance,
Welded Structure Manufacturers 191
– documentation – by verifying welding procedure specifications used and other corporate documents in
force applicable to the welding operations, e.g. concerning the welding sequence, welding consumables’
handling, welding quality control, non-destructive testing or other tests, welding operations’ quality,
validity of standards possessed, principles of familiarising welders with this documentation, availability
of this documentation at workstations, methods of filing of both the performed welding operations
and documentation of welding operations’ quality, traceability of welding conditions, and identification
of welders performing the welds,
– materials – by verifying the methods of storage of parent materials and welding consumables, marking
of parent materials and preparing consumables for welding.
25.5 Welding Procedure Qualification
25.5.1 PRS conducts welding procedure qualification in accordance with the following requirements:
– Publication 74/P – Principles for Welding Procedure Qualification Tests – the requirements of this
Publication are applicable during the qualification of welding procedure for normal-strength and higher-
strength hull steels as well as aluminum alloys intended for construction of ship hulls and ither marine
structures intended for welded structures, welded steel forgings and steel castings and also wrought
alluminium alloys which fulfil the requirements specified in these Rules and equivalent materials,
– Publication 48/P – Requirements Concerning Gas Tankers – the requirements for qualification
of welding procedure for materials intended for construction of gas tankers,
– standards of PN-EN ISO 15614 series or in accordance with an agreed specification (e.g. ASME,
EEMUA, etc.).
25.5.2 Manufacturer shall develop the welding procedure qualification programme corresponding to the
scope of requested approval. Preliminary Welding Procedure Specification (pWPS) shall be enclosed to
the programme.
25.5.3 Processes of qualification of the procedures of welding materials and products not covered
by the above mentioned Publications shall be conducted in accordance with the programme agreed with
PRS. This programme shall take account of specific properties of such materials and products as well as
the requirements specified in the relevant standards.
25.5.4 After these documents have been accepted by PRS, the manufacturer may begin the process
of the welding procedure qualification under the direct supervision of PRS Surveyor.
25.5.5 The set of documents concerning the performed process of welding procedure qualification shall
include:
– Preliminary Welding Procedure Specification (pWPS) for the test assembly preparation,
– agreed welding procedure qualification programme,
– copies of the approval certificates for parent materials and welding consumables used for the test
assembly preparation,
– records of the test assembly welding parameters confirmed by the supervising surveyor,
– reports on all destructive and non-destructive tests of the test assembly,
– welding procedure qualification record (WPQR),
– welding procedure specification (WPS) being the record of the verified process of welding procedure
qualification.
25.5.6 Welding procedure qualification record (WPQR) signed by PRS Surveyor constitutes the basis
for development, by the manufacturer, welding procedure specifications, however solely in the scope
corresponding to the qualification range resulting from the performed procedure.
25.5.7 Welding procedure qualification record does not have an expiry date. Its validity is conditional
on maintaining, by the manufacturer, the same technical specifications during welding process as those
entered in the welding procedure qualification record (WPQR).
25.5.8 Qualification ranges resulting from the successful welding procedure qualification processes
constitute the basis for determining the scope of the manufacturer approval.
25.5.9 Within the manufacturer approval procedure, PRS may recognise welding qualification
procedures performed under the supervision of other independent technical survey bodies. The
manufacturer shall submit a complete set of the relevant documents to be considered by PRS in accordance
with the requirements specified in paragraph 25.5.6.
Appendixes 193
APPENDIXES
Appendix A
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Hull Structural Steels
A1 APPROVAL PROCEDURE FOR MANUFACTURER OF SEMI-FINISHED PRODUCTS
1 Scope
Part A1, Appendix A specifies (as provided in paragraph 3.2.1, this Part) the procedure for the approval
of the manufacturing process of semi-finished products, such as ingots, slabs, blooms and billets for hull
structural steels.
The manufacturing process approval procedure is valid for verifying the manufacturer’s capability to
provide satisfactory products stable under effective process and production controls in operation.
The products shall be subjected to approval in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 3.2 in this
Part.
2 Request for Approval

2.1 Documents to be Submitted
The manufacturer shall submit, to PRS, a request for approval, the proposed approval test programme
(see sub-chapter 3.1) and the following information:
.1 name and address of the manufacturer, location of the workshops, general indications relevant to
the background, production range, estimated total annual production of finished products for
shipbuilding and for other applications;
.2 the works organization and the quality management system:
– organizational chart,
– staff employed, responsible for manufacturing process,
– staff employed and organization of the quality control department,
– qualification of the personnel involved in activities related to the quality of the products,
– certification of the quality management system (if established),
– Approval Certificates already granted by another Classification Societies (if any);
.3 manufacturing facilities:
– flow chart of the manufacturing process,
– origin and storage of raw materials,
– storage of the finished products,
– equipment for systematic control during fabrication;
.4 details of inspections and quality control facilities, in particular:
– details of the system used for identification of materials at the different stages of manufacture,
– equipment for chemical analyses and the relevant calibration procedures,
– list of quality control and quality management procedures;
.5 types of products (ingots, slabs, blooms, billets), types of steel (normal or higher strength), range
of thickness and the expected material properties such as:
– range of chemical composition and the analysis of grain refining, micro alloying and residual
elements for the various grades of steel; if the range of the chemical composition depends on
thickness and supply condition, the different ranges shall be specified, as appropriate,
– maximum carbon equivalent CEV,
– maximum Pcm content for higher strength steel with low carbon content (C < 0.13 %),
– production statistics of the chemical composition and if available at rolling mills, mechanical
properties (Re, Rm, A and KV), intended to demonstrate the capability to manufacture the steel
products in accordance with the requirements of this Part,
.6 steelmaking process:
– steelmaking process and capacity of furnace/s or converter/s,
– raw material used,
– deoxidation and alloying practice,

– desulphurisation and vacuum degassing installations, if any,
– casting methods: ingot or continuous casting. In the case of continuous casting, information
relevant to type of casting machine, teeming practice, methods to prevent re-oxidation,
inclusions and segregation control, presence of electromagnetic stirring, soft reduction, etc.,
shall be provided, as appropriate,
– ingot or slab size and weight,
– ingot or slab treatment: scarfing and discarding procedures,
.7 documentation of approval tests performed under supervision of another Classification Society.
2.2 Documents to be Submitted for Changing the Approval Conditions

In such cases as:
.1 change of the manufacturing process (steel making process, casting method, steelmaking plant,
caster),
.2 change of the maximum thickness (dimensions),
.3 change of the chemical composition, added elements, etc.,
the manufacturer shall submit to PRS the documents, required in sub-chapter 2.1, and the request for
changing the approval conditions.
However, where the documents are duplicated by the ones at the previous approval for the same type
of product, part or all of the documents may be omitted, except the approval test programme (see sub-
chapter 3.1).
3 Approval Tests
3.1 Extent of Approval Tests
The extent of the test programme is specified in sub-chapter 3.6. It may be modified on the basis of the
preliminary information submitted by the manufacturer.
This refers, in particular, to a reduction of the indicated number of casts, product thicknesses and steel
types to be tested or waiving the approval tests. PRS may accept such proceeding taking into account:
.1 approval already granted by another Classification Society and documentation of the approval tests
performed,
.2 grades of steel to be approved and availability of long-term statistic results of chemical and
mechanical properties,
.3 change of the approval conditions.
On the other hand, an increase of the number of casts and thicknesses to be tested may be required in
the case of newly developed types of steel or manufacturing processes.
3.2 Approval Tests Programme
Where the extent of the tests differs from that specified in sub-chapter 3.6, the programme shall be
agreed with PRS before the tests.
3.3 Approval Tests Supervision
The approval tests shall be supervised by PRS Surveyor at the manufacturer’s plant. The execution
of the plant inspection in operation may be required by PRS Surveyor during the approval tests. If the
testing facilities are not available at the works, the tests shall be performed at approved laboratories.
3.4 Selection of the Test Product

For each type of steel and for each manufacturing process (e.g. steelmaking, casting), one test product
with the maximum thickness (dimension) to be approved shall be selected for each kind of product.
The selection of the casts for the test product shall be based on the typical chemical composition, with
particular regard to the specified CEV, Pcm values and grain refining micro-alloying additions.
Appendixes 195
3.5 Position of Test Samples

Unless agreed otherwise, the test samples shall be taken from the product (slabs, blooms, billets)
corresponding to the top of the ingot or, in the case of continuous casting, a random sample.
3.6 Tests of Semi-finished Products
3.6.1 Type of Tests
For the approval of the manufacturing process of semi-finished products, the following tests shall be
performed:
.1 chemical analysis; the analysis shall be complete and shall include micro alloying elements,
.2 sulphur prints.
In addition, for initial approval and for each renewal of approval PRS may require full tests, specified in
Chapter 3, Part A2, Appendix A to be performed. The tests shall be performed at rolling mill on the minimum
thickness semi-finished product.
In the case of a multi-caster work, full tests on finished products shall be performed for one caster. For
other casters, reduced tests (chemical analysis and sulphur prints) shall be performed. The tests shall be
performed on the minimum thickness semi-finished product.
3.6.2 Test Specimens and Testing Procedure

The following tests shall be performed:
.1 chemical analysis:
both the ladle and product analyses shall be made. The content of the following elements shall be
checked: C, Mn, Si, P, S, Ni, Cr, Mo, Al, N, Nb, V, Cu, As, Sn, Ti and, for steel manufactured
from electric or open-hearth furnace, Sb and B,
.2 Baumann printing (sulphur print test):
sulphur prints shall be taken from product edges which are perpendicular to the axis of the ingot
or slab. These sulphur prints shall be approximately 600 mm long taken from the centre of the edge
selected and shall include the full plate thickness.
4 Results
All required information, specified in Chapter 2, Part A2 of the present Appendix, applicable to the
products subjected to the tests shall be collected by the manufacturer and put in reports which will include
all the results of the tests and operation records relevant to steel making, casting and, where applicable,
rolling and heat treatment of the test products.
These reports shall be submitted to PRS. Depending on the test results, particular limitations or testing
conditions, as deemed appropriate, may be specified in the Approval Certificate.
5 Approval
If the results of the inspection and approval tests are satisfactory, PRS will issue Approval Certificate
stating at least:
.1 type of product (ingots, slabs, blooms, billets),
.2 steelmaking and casting process,
.3 thickness range of the semi-finished products,
.4 types of steel (normal or higher strength).
6 Renewal of Approval
The validity of Approval Certificate shall be a maximum of three years. Renewal of approval can be
performed at the manufacturer’s request, which shall be submitted before the expiry date of the approval
validity and after conducting inspection confirming that the approval conditions are complied with.
Manufacturers who have not produced the approved grades and products (UR) during the period
between renewals may be required to either carry out approval tests or, on the basis of results of production
of similar grades of products, at the discretion of PRS, be reapproved.
Where, for operational reasons, the renewal audit falls beyond the period of approval, the manufacturer
will still be considered as approved if agreement to this audit date is made within Approval Certificate
validity. In such case, upon satisfactory renewal audit, PRS extends the Approval Certificate with validity
from the original renewal date.
7 Withdrawal of Approval
PRS may withdraw the approval in the following cases:
.1 in service failures, traceable to the product quality,
.2 non-conformity of the product revealed during fabrication or construction,
.3 discovered failures of the manufacturer’s quality system,
.4 changes made by the manufacturer, without the prior agreement with PRS, to the approval extent
specified in the Approval Certificate,
.5 major non-conformities (discovered at testing the products).
A2 APPROVAL PROCEDURE FOR MANUFACTURER OF HULL STRUCTURAL STEELS
1 Scope
Part A2, Appendix A specifies (as provided in paragraph 3.2.1, this Part), the procedure for the approval
of the manufacturing process of normal and higher strength hull structural steels.
The manufacturing approval procedure is valid for verifying the manufacturer’s capability to provide
satisfactory products stable under effective process and production controls in operation. The products
shall be subjected to approval in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 3.2, this Part.

the background, production range, estimated total annual production of the finished products for
shipbuilding and for other applications,
.2 the works organization and the quality management system:
– equipment for mechanical tests, chemical analyses, metallographic examination and relevant
calibration procedures,
– equipment for non-destructive tests,
.5 types of products (plates, sections, coils), grades of steel, range of thickness and the expected
material properties, as follows:
Appendixes 197
– the range of chemical composition and the analysis of grain refining, micro-alloying and residual
elements for the various grades of steel; if the range of the chemical composition depends on
thickness and supply condition, the different ranges shall be specified, as appropriate,
– maximum carbon equivalent CEV,
– maximum Pcm content for higher strength steel with low carbon content (C < 0.13 %),
– production statistics of the chemical composition and mechanical properties (Re, Rm, A and KV),
intended to demonstrate the capability to manufacture the steel products in accordance with the
requirements of this Part,
– deoxidation and alloying practice,
– desulphurisation and vacuum degassing installations, if any,
.7 reheating and rolling:
– type of furnace and treatment parameters,
– rolling: reduction ratio of slab/bloom/billet to the finished product thickness, rolling and
finishing temperatures,
– descaling treatment during rolling,
– capacity of the rolling stands;
.8 heat treatment:
– type of furnaces, heat treatment parameters and their relevant records,
– accuracy and calibration of temperature control devices;
.9 programmed rolling: for products delivered in the controlled rolling (CR) or thermo-mechanical
rolling (TM) condition, the following additional information on the programmed rolling schedules
shall be given:
– description of the rolling process,
– normalizing temperature, re-crystallization temperature and Ar3 temperature and the methods
used to determine the parameters,
– control standards for typical rolling parameters used for the different thicknesses and grades of
steel (temperature and thickness at the beginning and at the end of the passes, interval between
passes, reduction ratio, temperature range and cooling speed of accelerated cooling, if any) and
the relevant method of control,
– calibration of the control equipment;
.10 recommendations for working and welding, in particular for products delivered in the CR or TM
condition:
– cold and hot working recommendations if needed in addition to the normal practice used in the
shipyards and workshops,
– minimum and maximum heat input if different from the ones usually used in the shipyards and
workshops (15 ÷ 50 kJ/cm);
.11 additional information on the manufacturing process shall be included if any part of the process is
assigned to another firms or manufacturing plants,
In such cases as, where applicable:
.1 change of the manufacturing process (steel making, casting, rolling and heat treatment),
.3change of the chemical composition, added elements, etc.,

.4subcontracting the rolling, heat treatment, etc.,
.5the use of the slabs/blooms/billets manufactured by other manufacturers which are not approved
by PRS,
chapter 3.1).
3 Approval Tests
3.1.1 The extent of the test programme is specified in sub-chapters 3.6 and 3.7. It may be modified on
the basis of the preliminary information submitted by the manufacturer.
This refers, in particular, to a reduction of the indicated number of casts, steel plate thicknesses and
grades to be tested or waiving the approval tests. PRS may accept such proceeding taking into account, as
follows:
.1 approval already granted by another Classification Society and documentation of approval tests
performed,
.2 types of steel to be approved and availability of long-term statistic results of chemical and
mechanical properties performed on rolled products,
.3 approval for any grade of steel also covering approval for any lower grade in the same strength
level, provided that method of manufacture and condition of supply are similar,
.4 for higher tensile steels, approval of one strength level covering the approval of the strength level
immediately below, provided the steelmaking process, deoxidation and fine grain practice, casting
method and condition of supply are the same,
.5 change of the approval conditions.
3.1.2 In the case of multi-source slabs or changing the slab manufacturer, the rolled steel manufacturer
is required to obtain the approval of the manufacturing process of rolled steels using slabs from each slab
manufacturer and to conduct approval tests in accordance with 3.6 and 3.7. A reduction or waiving the
approval tests may be considered by PRS taking into account the previous approval, as follows:
.1 the rolled steel manufacturer has already been approved for the manufacturing process using other
semi-finished products characterized by the same thickness, steel grade, grain refining and micro-
alloying elements, steelmaking and casting process,
.2 the semi-finished products manufacturer has been approved for the complete manufacturing
process with the same conditions (steelmaking, casting, rolling and heat treatment)
3.2 Approval Test Programme
Where the extent of the tests differs from that specified in sub-chapters 3.6 and 3.7, the approval test
programme shall be agreed with PRS before the tests.
The approval tests shall be supervised by PRS Surveyor at the manufacturer’s plant. The execution of
the plant inspection in operation may be required by PRS Surveyor during the approval tests. If the testing
facilities are not available at the works, the tests shall be performed at approved laboratories.
Appendixes 199

For each grade of steel and for each manufacturing process (e.g. steel making, casting, rolling and
condition of supply), one test product with the maximum thickness (dimension) to be approved shall be
selected for each kind of product.
In addition, for initial approval, PRS may require the selection of one test product of average thickness.
particular regard to the specified CEV, Pcm values and grain refining micro-alloying additions.
3.5 Position of Test Samples
Unless agreed otherwise, the test samples shall be taken from the product (plate, flat, section, bar)
corresponding to the top of the ingot or, in the case of continuous casting, a random sample.
The position of test samples shall be in accordance with paragraph 3.9.3, this Part. The term “piece” is
defined in paragraph 3.9.1, this Part. The direction of the test specimens with respect to the final direction
of rolling of the material shall be as indicated in Table 3.6.1 of Appendix.
3.6 Parent Material Tests
3.6.1 Type of Tests
The tests shall be carried in accordance with Table 3.6.1.
Table 3.6.1
Parent Material Tests
Position of test samples and direction
Type of test Remarks
of the test specimens 1)
Tensile test Top and bottom transverse test R e, Rm, A shall be stated in test report
specimens2)
Tensile test (stress relieved) only for TM Top and bottom transverse test Stress relieving at 600 °C
steels specimens 2 (2 min/mm for min. 1 hour)
Impact tests 3) on non-aged specimens for Test temperature [°C]
grades
A, B, AH32, AH36, AH40 +20 0 –20
D, DH32, DH36, DH40 Top and bottom – longitudinal test 0 –20 –40
specimens
E, EH32, EH36, EH40 0 –20 –40 –60
FH32, FH36, FH40 -20 -40 –60 –80
A, B, AH32, AH36, AH40 +20 0 –20
D, DH32, DH36, DH40 Top and bottom – transverse test 0 –20 –40
E, EH32, EH36, EH40 specimens 4) –20 –40 –60
FH32, FH36, FH40 –40 –60 –80
Impact test 3) on strain aged test specimens 5 Test temperature [°C]
AH32, AH36, AH40 +20 0 –20
D, DH32, DH36, DH40 Top – longitudinal test specimens 0 –20 –40
E, EH32, EH36, EH40 –20 –40 –60
FH32, FH36, FH40 –40 –60 –80
Chemical analyses 6) Top Complete analysis, including micro
alloying elements
Sulphur prints Top
Micro examination Top
Grain size determination Top Only for fine grain steels
4)
Pellini drop weight test Top Only for grades E, EH32, EH36, EH40,
FH32, FH36, FH40
Through thickness tensile test Top and bottom Only for grades with improved through
thickness properties
1) For hot rolled strips, see paragraph 3.6.2.

2) Longitudinal direction for sections and plates having the width less than 600 mm.
3) One set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens is required for each impact test.
4) Not required for sections and plates having the width less than 600 mm.
5) Deformation 5% + 1 hour at 250 °C.
6) Besides product analyses, ladle analyses are required.

The test specimens and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 2,
this Part. In particular the following applies:
.1 tensile test:
– for plates made from hot rolled strips, one additional tensile test specimen shall be taken from the
middle of the strip constituting the coil,
– for plates having the thickness greater than 40 mm, when the capacity of the available testing
machine is insufficient to allow the use of test specimens of full thickness, multiple flat
specimens, representing collectively the full thickness, can be used. Alternatively, two round
specimens with the axis located at one quarter and at mid-thickness can be taken;
.2 impact test:
– for plates made from hot rolled strip, one additional set of impact test specimens shall be taken from
the middle of the strip constituting the coil,
– for plates having thickness greater than 40 mm, one additional set of impact specimens shall be
taken with the axis located at mid-thickness,
– in addition to the determination of the energy value, also the lateral expansion and the
percentage crystallinity shall be reported;
.3 chemical analysis:
both the ladle and product analyses shall be made. The material for the product analyses should be
taken from the tensile test specimen. The content of the following elements shall be checked: C,
Mn, Si, P, S, Ni, Cr, Mo, Al, N, Nb, V, Cu, As, Sn, Ti and, for steel manufactured from electric or
open-hearth furnace, Sb and B;
.4 Baumann printing (sulphur print test):
sulphur prints shall be taken from plate edges which are perpendicular to the axis of the ingot or
slab. These sulphur prints shall be approximately 600 mm long taken from the centre of the edge
selected, i.e. on the ingot centreline and shall include the full plate thickness;
.5 micrographic examination:
the micrographs shall be representative of the full thickness. For thick products, in general, at least
three examinations shall be made at surface, one quarter and mid-thickness of the product. All
photomicrographs shall be taken at x100 magnification and where ferrite grain size exceeds ASTM 10,
additionally at x500 magnification. Ferrite grain size should be determined for each photomicrograph;
.6 Pellini test (drop weight test – DWT):
the test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of sub-chapter 2.8, this Part. The
NDTT shall be determined and photographs of the tested specimens shall be taken and enclosed
with the test report;
.7 through thickness tensile test:
the test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 5, this Part. The test
results shall be in accordance, where applicable, with the requirements specified in Chapter 3, this
Part for the tested steel grades.
3.6.3 Other Tests
For newly developed types of steel not covered by the requirements of Chapter 3, this Part, additional tests
such as CTOD test, large scale brittle fracture tests (Double Tension test, ESSO test, Deep Notch test, etc.)
or other tests may be required by PRS.
Appendixes 201
3.7 Weldability Tests
3.7.1 Extent of the Tests

Weldability tests are required for plates and shall be performed in accordance with 2.12, this Part on
test samples taken from the thickest plate. Weldability tests are required for normal strength grade E and
for higher strength steels.
3.7.2 Preparation and Welding of the Test Assemblies

The following test assemblies shall be prepared:
.1 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat input approximately 15 kJ/cm,
.2 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat input approximately 50 kJ/cm.
The butt weld test assemblies shall be prepared with the weld seam transverse to the plate rolling
direction, so that impact specimens will result in the longitudinal direction.
The bevel preparation should be preferably 1/2V or K.
The welding procedure shall be as far as possible in accordance with the normal welding practice used
at the yards for the type of steel in question.
Test report shall contain the welding procedure specification (WPS) used for the weld test assemblies
and copies of certificates issued for welding consumables used for the test assemblies preparation.
3.7.3 Types of Tests
From the test assemblies, the following test specimens shall be taken:
.1 1 cross weld tensile test specimen;
.2 a set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens transverse to the weld with the notch located at the
fusion line and at a distance 2, 5 and minimum 20 mm from the fusion line. The fusion boundary shall
be identified by etching the specimens with a suitable reagent. The test temperature shall be the one
prescribed for the testing of the steel grade in question;
.3 hardness tests HV5 across the weldment. The indentations shall be made along a 1 mm transverse
line beneath the plate surface on both the face side and the root side of the weld as follows:
– fusion line,
– HAZ: at each 0.7 mm from fusion line into unaffected parent material (minimum 6 to 7
measurements for each HAZ).
The maximum hardness value shall be not higher than 350 HV.
A sketch of the weld joint depicting groove dimensions, number of passes, hardness indentations shall
be attached to the test report, together with photomacrographs of the weld cross-section.
3.7.4 Other Tests
For newly developed types of steel not covered by Chapter 3, this Part, additional tests such as cold
cracking tests (CTS, Cruciform, Implant, Tekken, Bead-on plate), CTOD or other tests may be required by
PRS.
4 Results
All required information, specified in Chapter 2, applicable to the products subjected to the tests, shall
be collected by the manufacturer and put in reports which will include all the results of the tests and
operation records relevant to steel making, casting, rolling and heat treatment of the test products.
5 Approval
If the results of the inspection and approval tests are satisfactory, PRS will issue Approval Certificate.
Manufacturers who have not produced the approved grades and products during the period between
renewals may be required to either carry out approval tests or, on the basis of results of production of
similar grades of products, at the discretion of PRS, be reapproved.
Appendixes 203
Appendix B
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Hull Structural Steels
Intended for Welding with High Heat Input
1 Scope
The present Appendix specifies the weldability confirmation procedure for normal and higher strength
hull structural steels intended for welding with high heat input (over 50 kJ/cm).
The weldability confirmation procedure shall be generally applied by the manufacturer’s option and
shall be valid for certifying that the steel has satisfactory weldability for high heat input welding concerned
under testing conditions.
Demonstration of conformance to the requirements of this document approves a particular steel mill to
manufacture grade of steel to the specific chemical composition range, melting practice and processing
practice for which conformance was established. The approval procedure does not apply to qualification
of welding procedures to be undertaken by welded structures manufacturers.

The manufacturer seeking the approval shall submit to PRS a request for approval, the proposed
approval tests programme (see sub-chapter 3.2) and the following technical documentation:
.1 a description of products subject to approval:
– grade,
– thickness range,
– deoxidation method,
– fine grain practice,
– range of chemical composition,
– maximum CEV and Pcm,
– production statistics of mechanical properties (tensile and Charpy V-notch impact tests);
.2 manufacturing control points to prevent toughness deterioration in heat affected zone when welded
with high heat input, relevant to chemical elements, steelmaking, casting, rolling, heat treatment,
etc.;
.3 welding control points to improve joint properties on strength and toughness.
3 Tests
Unless agreed otherwise with PRS, the range of approval tests for steel grades shall be as follows:
.1 approval tests of the lowest and highest toughness levels cover the intermediate toughness level;
.2 approval tests of normal strength level cover that strength only;
.3 for high tensile steel, approval tests of one strength level cover strength level immediately below;
.4 tests may be performed separately subject to the same manufacturing process;
.5 the results of approval tests performed under the supervision of another Classification Society may
be accepted by PRS subject to special consideration.
3.2 Weldabilty Test Programme
Weldability tests are required for plates and shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
of sub-chapter 2.12, this Part, having regard to the requirements of the present Appendix.
The extent of the test programme is specified in sub-chapter 3.5. It may be modified according to the range
of certification. In particular, additional test assemblies and/or tests may be required in the case of newly
developed types of steel, welding consumables, new welding method or when deemed necessary by PRS.
Where the extent of the tests differs from that specified in sub-chapter 3.5, the test programme shall be
agreed with PRS before the tests.
3.3 Test Plates

Test plates shall be manufactured by a process approved by PRS, in accordance with the requirements
of Appendix A, this Part.
For each manufacturing process route, two test plates with different thickness shall be selected. The
thicker plate (with the thickness t) and thinner plate (with the thickness less than or equal to t/2) shall be
proposed by the manufacturer.
Small changes in manufacturing process (e.g. within the TM process) may be considered for acceptance
without testing, at the discretion of PRS.
3.4 Test Assemblies
One butt weld assembly welded with heat input over 50 kJ/cm shall be prepared with the weld axis
transverse to the plate rolling direction.
The dimensions of the test assembly shall be amply sufficient to take all required test specimens
specified in sub-chapter 3.5.
The welding procedure shall be as far as possible in accordance with the normal practices applied at
shipyards for the test plate concerned.
Test report shall contain the following data: welding process, welding position, welding consumables
(manufacturer, type, grade, diameter and shielding gas), welding parameters, including bevel preparation,
heat input, preheating temperatures, interpass temperatures, number of passes, etc.
3.5 Examination and Tests of the Test Assembly
Unless agreed otherwise with PRS, the test assembly shall be examined and tested in accordance with
sub-paragraphs .1 ÷ .8:
.1 Visual inspection
Overall welded surface shall be uniform and free from injurious defects such as cracks, undercuts,
overlaps, etc.
.2 Macroscopic tests
One macroscopic photograph shall be representative of transverse section of the welded joint and
shall show absence of cracks, lack of penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects.
.3 Microscopic tests
micrograph with x100 magnification shall be taken at the following positions:
– the weld centreline,
– fusion line
and at a distance 2, 5, 10 and minimum 20 mm from the fusion line. The test results are provided
for information purpose only.
.4 Hardness test
Along two lines across transverse weld section 1mm beneath plate surface on both face and root side
of the weld, indentations by HV5 shall be made at weld metal centreline, fusion line and each 0.7
mm position from fusion line to unaffected parent material (minimum 6 to 7 measurements for each
heat affected zone). The maximum hardness value shall not be higher than 350 HV.
.5 Tensile test
Two flat tensile test specimens shall be taken from the test assembly. The test specimens and
testing procedures shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, this Part.
The tensile strength shall be not less than the minimum required value for the grade of the parent
material.
.6 Bend test
Two bend test specimens shall be taken from the test assembly and bent on a mandrel with diameter
of quadruple the specimen thickness. Bending angle shall be at least 120°. Test specimens shall
comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, this Part.
For plate thickness up to 20 mm, one face-bend and one root-bend specimens or two side-bend
specimens shall be taken. For plate thickness over 20 mm, two side-bend specimens shall be taken.
After testing, the test specimens shall not reveal any cracks nor other open defects in any direction
greater than 3 mm.
Appendixes 205
.7 Impact test
Charpy V-notch impact test specimens (a set of three specimens) shall be taken within 2 mm below
plate surface on face side of the weld with the notch perpendicular to the plate surface.
One set of the test specimens transverse to the weld shall be taken with the notch located at the
fusion line and at a distance 2, 5 and minimum 20 mm from the fusion line. The fusion boundary
shall be identified by etching the specimens with a suitable reagent. The test temperature shall be
the one prescribed for the testing of the steel grade in question.
For steel plates with thickness greater than 50 mm or in one side welding for plate thickness greater
than 20 mm, one additional set of test specimens shall be taken from the root side of the weld with
the notch located at the same position as for the face side.
The average impact energy at the specified test temperature shall comply with Tables 3.6.2-1 and
3.6.2-2 in Chapter 3, this Part, depending on the steel grade and thickness. Only one individual
value may be below the specified average value, provided it is not less than 70% of that value.
Additional tests at the different testing temperatures may be required for evaluating the transition
temperature curve of absorbed energy and percentage crystallinity at the discretion of PRS.
.8 Other tests
Additional tests such as wide-width tensile test, HAZ tensile test, cold cracking test (CTS,
Cruciform, Implant, Tekken, and Bead-on plate), CTOD or other tests may be required at the
discretion of PRS (see sub-chapter 3.2).
4 Results
The manufacturer shall submit to PRS the complete test report, including all the results and required
information relevant to the confirmation tests, specified in sub-chapter 3.
The test report is reviewed and evaluated by PRS in accordance with the weldability confirmation
procedure.
5 Approval
Upon satisfactory evaluation of the test report, Approval Certificate is issued by PRS.
The Approval Certificate shall contain the following information:
.1 the manufacturer’s name,
.2 grade designation with notation of heat input (see Chapter 6),
.3 deoxidation method,
.4 fine grain practice,
.5 supply condition,
.6 plate thickness tested,
.7 welding process,
.8 welding consumables (manufacturer, type, grade),
.9 actual heat input applied.
6 Grade Designation
Upon issuance of Approval Certificate, the notation indicating the value of heat input applied in the
confirmation test may be added to the grade designation of the test plate, e.g. EH36-W300 (in the case
of heat input 300 kJ/cm applied). The value of this notation shall be not less than 50 and every 10 added.
Appendix C
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Corrosion Resistant Steel
Used as Alternative Means of Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks
1 General Requirements
1.1 This appendix specifies the procedure for approval of corrosion resistant hull steels manufacturers
based upon corrosion testing.
1.2 Approval shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Appendixes A1 and A2 together
with the additional requirements for corrosion testing specified in this Appendix.
1.3 The corrosion test and assessment criteria shall be in accordance with the Appendix of the Annex to
IMO Resolution MSC.289(87) Performance Standard for Alternative Means of Corrosion Protection for
Cargo Oil Tanks of Crude Oil Tankers.
The request for approval shall contain following information:
– corrosion test plan and details of equipment and test environments,
– technical data related to product assessment criteria for confirming corrosion resistance,
– the technical background explaining how the variation in added and controlled elements improves
corrosion resistance,
– the grades, the brand name and maximum thickness of corrosion resistant steel to be approved;
designations for corrosion resistant steels are given in 3.15.5 of this Part,
– the welding processes and the brand name of the welding consumables to be used for approval.
3 Corrosion Test Plan
3.1 The manufacturer shall submit the corrosion test program, which is subject to agreement by PRS
prior to tests being performed. PRS will identify tests that need to be witnessed by the surveyor.
3.2 Method for selection of test samples shall meet the following requirements:
.1 The numbers of test samples shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Appendix of the
Annex to IMO Resolution MSC.289(87),
.2 The number of casts and test samples selected shall be sufficient to make it possible to confirm the
validity of interaction effects and/or the control range (upper limit, lower limit) of the elements
which are added for improving the corrosion resistance.
.3 Additional tests may be required by PRS when reviewing the test program against the paragraph .2.
Remark:
The chemical composition of the corrosion resistant steel shall be within the range specified for rolled steel for hull. Elements to
be added for improving the corrosion resistance and for which content is not specified shall generally be within 1% in total.
3.3 The approval tests shall be performed in accordance with the agreed test plan in the presence
of PRS Surveyor. The Surveyor shall be present when the test samples are being identified.
3.4 The report of the approval tests shall be submitted to PRS. The results will be assessed by PRS
in accordance with the acceptance criteria specified in the Appendix of the Annex to IMO Resolution
MSC.289(87).
3.5 Upon positive results of the approval tests, Approval Certificate is issued by PRS.
Appendixes 207
Appendix D
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of High Strength Steel

for the Container Carrier Hull Construction
1 General
1.1 This Appendix specifies additional requirements for approval of manufacturer of EH47 high strength
steel intended for construction of container carriers hull construction.
1.2 One test product with the maximum thickness shall be selected provided the approved target
chemical composition range remains unchanged.
2 Scope of Tests
2.1 Base Metal Tests

.1 Impact Test
Impact test shall be performed in accordance with 2.6 of this Part.
Test samples shall be taken from the plate corresponding to the top of the ingot, unless
otherwise agreed. In the case of continuous casting, test samples shall be taken from a randomly
selected plate.
The location of the test sample shall be at the square cut end of the plate, approximately one-
quarter width from an edge. Samples shall be taken with respect to the principal rolling direction
of the plate at locations representing the top and bottom of the plate as follows:
– longitudinal Charpy V-notch impact tests – top and bottom,
– transverse Charpy V-notch impact tests – top only,
– strain aged longitudinal Charpy V-notch impact test – top only.
The test are required from bot the quarter and mid thickness locations of the test samples.
One set of three Charpy V-notch impact specimens is required for each impact test. The test
temperature shall be –40°C. In the test the energy value, the lateral expansion and the percentage
cristallinity shall be reported.
The ageing conditions for the determination of strain ageing resistance are specified in 2.6.4 of
this Part.
.2 Fracture Mechanics Test
Deep Notch Test or CTOD (Crack Tip Opening Displacement) test shall be performed. Details
of the test shall be agreed with PRS.
.3 Pellini Dropweight Test
Pellini Dropweight Test (DWT) shall be performed in accordance with 2.8 of this Part. Nil
Ductility Test Temperature (NDTT) shall be reported for reference and may be used in the
qualification of production test method.
.4 ESSO Test
ESSO test or equivalent (e.g. Double Tension Test) shall be performed in order to obtain the
brittle crack arrest toughness for reference.
.1 Impact Test
Charpy V-notch impact test shall be taken at a position of 1/4 thickness from the plate surface
on the face side of the weld with the notch perpendicular to the plate surface.
One set of three specimens transverse to the weld shall be taken with the notch located at the
fusion line and at a distance 2, 5 and minimum 20 mm from the fusion line. The fusion boundary
shall be identified by etching the specimens with a suitable reagent. One additional set of the
specimens shall be taken from the root side of the weld with the notch located at the same position
and at the same depth as for the face side.
The impact test temperature is –40°C.
.2 Hydrogen Crack Test
The test method shall be in accordance with a national or international standard, agreed with PRS.
.3 Fracture Mechanics Test
CTOD test or Deep Notch Test shall be performed in order to determine fracture mechanics.
Appendixes 209
Appendix E
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of High Strength Steels for Welded Structures
1 Scope
Appendix E specifies (as provided in paragraph 4.2.1, this Part), the procedure for the approval of the
manufacturing process of high strength steels for welded structures.
All materials are to be manufactured at works which have been approved by PRS for the type, supply
condition grade and thickness of steel which is being supplied. The suitability of each grade of steel for
forming and welding is to be demonstrated during the initial approval tests at the steelworks.
The manufacturing approval procedure is valid for verifying the manufacturer’s capability to provide
satisfactory products stable under effective process and production controls in operation including
programmed rolling, which is required in paragraph 4.2.2 of this Part.

the background, production range, estimated total annual production of the finished products,
.2 the work of organization and the quality management system:
– equipment for mechanical tests, chemical analyses, metallographic examination and relevant
calibration procedures,
– equipment for non-destructive tests,
.5 types of products (plates, sections, bars, tubes), supply conditions, grades of steel, range of
thickness and the expected material properties, as follows:
– the range of chemical composition and the analysis of grain refining, nitrogen binding, micro-
alloying and residual elements for the various grades of steel; if the range of the chemical
composition depends on thickness and supply condition, the different ranges shall be specified,
as appropriate,
– where Zr, Ca and rare earth metals have been used during steelmaking for grain refininement
or inclusion modification, the contents of these elements shall be specified in the manufacturing
specification,
– expected carbon equivalent values according to paragraph 4.4.3 of this Part,
– production statistics of the chemical composition and mechanical properties (Re, Rm, A and KV),
intended to demonstrate the capability to manufacture the steel products in accordance with the
requirements of this Part,
– deoxidation, grain refining, nitrogen binding and alloying practice,
– desulphurisation, dehydrogenation, sulphide treatment, ladle refining and vacuum degassing
installations, if any,
– casting/solidification cooling rate control,
.7 reheating and rolling:
– type of furnace and treatment parameters,
– rolling: reduction ratio of slab/bloom/billet to the finished product thickness, rolling and
finishing temperatures,
– descaling treatment during rolling,
– capacity of the rolling stands;
.8 heat treatment:
– type of furnaces, heat treatment parameters and their relevant records,
– accuracy and calibration of temperature control devices,
– austenizing temperature, re-crystallization temperature and Ar3 temperature and the methods
– description of quenching and tempering processes, if applicable;
.9 programmed rolling: for products supplied in the controlled rolling (CR) or thermo-mechanical
rolling (TM) condition, the following additional information on the programmed rolling schedules
shall be given:
– description of the rolling process,
– austenizing temperature, re-crystallization temperature and Ar3 temperature and the methods
– control standards for typical rolling parameters used for the different thicknesses and grades of
steel (temperature and thickness at the beginning and at the end of the passes, interval between
passes, reduction ratio, temperature range and cooling speed of accelerated cooling, if any) and
the relevant method of control,
– calibration of the control equipment;
.10 recommendations for working and welding, in particular for products supplied in the NR or TM
condition:
– cold and hot working recommendations if needed in addition to the normal practice used in the
shipyards and workshops,
– minimum and maximum heat input and recommended preheat/interpass temperature;
.11 additional information on the manufacturing process shall be included if any part of the process is
assigned to another firms or manufacturing plants,

In such cases as, where applicable:
.1 change of the manufacturing process (steel making, casting, rolling and heat treatment),
.3 change of the chemical composition, added elements, etc.,
.4 subcontracting the rolling, heat treatment, etc.,
.5 the use of the slabs/blooms/billets manufactured by other manufacturers which are not approved
by PRS,
Appendixes 211
chapter 3.1).
3 Approval Tests
3.1.1 The extent of the test programme is specified in sub-chapters 3.6 and 3.7. It may be modified on
the basis of the preliminary information submitted by the manufacturer.
This refers, in particular, to a reduction of the indicated number of casts, steel plate thicknesses and
grades to be tested or waiving the approval tests. PRS may accept such proceeding taking into account, as
follows:
.1 approval already granted by another Classification Society and documentation of approval tests
performed,
.2 grades of steel to be approved and availability of long-term statistic results of chemical and
mechanical properties performed on rolled products.
3.1.2 In the case of multi-source slabs or changing the slab manufacturer, the rolled steel manufacturer
is required to obtain the approval of the manufacturing process of rolled steels using slabs from each slab
manufacturer and to conduct approval tests in accordance with 3.6 and 3.7. A reduction or waiving the
approval tests may be considered by PRS taking into account the previous approval, as follows:
.1 the rolled steel manufacturer has already been approved for the manufacturing process using other
semi-finished products characterized by the same thickness, steel grade, grain refining and micro-
alloying elements, steelmaking and casting process,
.2 the semi-finished products manufacturer has been approved for the complete manufacturing
process with the same conditions (steelmaking, casting, rolling and heat treatment) for the same
steel grades.
3.2 Approval Test Programme

Where the extent of the tests differs from that specified in sub-chapters 3.6 and 3.7, the approval test
programme shall be agreed with PRS before the tests.

The approval tests shall be supervised by PRS Surveyor at the manufacturer’s plant. The execution
of the plant inspection in operation may be required by PRS Surveyor during the approval tests. If the
testing facilities are not available at the works, the tests shall be performed at approved laboratories.

For each grade of steel and for each manufacturing process (e.g. steel making, casting, rolling and
condition of supply), one test product with the maximum thickness (dimension) to be approved shall be
selected for each kind of product.
In addition, for initial approval, PRS may require the selection of one test product of average thickness.
particular regard to the specified CEV, CET Pcm values and grain refining micro-alloying additions.
3.5 Position of Test Samples and Specimens
Unless agreed otherwise, the test samples shall be taken from the product (plate, flat, section, bar and
tubular) corresponding to the top of the ingot or, in the case of continuous casting, a random sample.
The position of test samples shall be in accordance with paragraph 3.9.3, this Part. The term “piece” is
defined in paragraph 3.9.1, this Part. The direction of the test specimens with respect to the final direction
of rolling of the material shall be as indicated in Table 3.6.1 of this Appendix.
The position of the tensile and Charpy impact test samples with respect to the plate thickness shall be
in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 3.6.2 of Appendix A2.
3.6 Parent Material Tests
3.6.1 Type of Tests
The tests shall be carried in accordance with Table 3.6.1.
Table 3.6.1
Parent material tests
Position of test samples and
direction of the test specimens 1)
Chemical analyses 1) Top Contents of C, Mn, Si, P, S, Ni, Cr, Mo,
Al, N, Nb, V, Ti, B, Zr, Cu, As, Sn, Bi,
Pb, Ca, Sb, O, H shall be reported
CEV/CET calculation Pcm calculation, as
applicable
Sulphur prints Top Sulphur prints 2) are to be taken from
plate edges which are perpendicular to
the axis of the ingot or slab. These
sulphur prints shall be approximately
600 mm long taken from the centre of
the edge selected, i.e. on the ingot
centerline, and shall include the full plate
thickness.
Micrographic examination 3) Top a) Grain size determination. Ferrite
and/or prior austenite grain size shall be
determined;
b) All photomicrographs shall be taken
at 100x and 500x magnification;
c) Non metallic inclusion
contents/Cleanliness: The level of
non-metallic inclusions and impurities in
term of amount, size, shape and
distribution shall be controlled by the
manufacturer. The standards of the
micrographic examination methods ISO
4967 or equivalent are applicable.
Alternative methods for demonstrating
the non-metallic inclusions and
impurities may be used by the
manufacturer.
Tensile test Top and bottom longitudinal and R e, Rm, A, Z and Re/Rm ratio shall be
transverse test specimens reported.
Impact tests 3) on non-aged specimens for Top and bottom – longitudinal and Test temperature [°C]
grades 4) transverse test specimens
AH420÷AH960 +20 0 –20
DH420÷DH960 0 –20 –40
EH420÷EH960 0 –20 –40 –60
FH420÷FH690 -20 -40 –60 –80
Impact test 3) on strain aged test specimens 4,5) Top – longitudinal or transverse test Test temperature [°C]
AH420÷AH960 specimens +20 0 –20
DH420÷DH960 0 –20 –40
EH420÷EH960 0 –20 –40 –60
FH420÷FH690 –20 –40 –60 –80
Appendixes 213
Position of test samples and

direction of the test specimens 1)
Pellini drop weight test 6) Top The Nil Ductility Transition
Temperature (NDTT) shall be
determined and photographs of the tested
specimens shall be taken and enclosed
with the test report
Through thickness tensile test Top and bottom Only for grades with improved through
thickness properties
Weldability test 7)
a) Butt weld assembly, as-welded Top Cross weld tensile test, Charpy impact
test on weld metal, fusion line (FL),
FL+2 mm, FL+5 mm, FL+20 mm,
b) Butt weld assembly, PWHT, if applicable Top macro examination and hardness survey,
CTOD at –10°C on grain-coarsened
heat-affected zone.
c) Y-shape weld crack test (Hydrogen crack Top
test)
1) Besides product analyses, ladle analyses are required. The product analyses shall be taken from the tensile specimen. The
deviation of the product analysis from the ladle analysis shall be permissible in accordance with the limits given in the
manufacturing specification.
2) Other tests than Sulphur prints for segregation examination may be applied after prior PRS acceptance.
3) One set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens is required for each impact test.
4) In addition to the absorbed energy value, also the lateral expansion and the percentage cristallinity shall be reported.
5) Deformation 5% + 1 hour at 250°C. Strain ageing test shall be carried out on the thickest plate.
6) Required only for plates.
7) Weldability test shall be carried out on the thickest plate.

The test specimens and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 2,
this Part.
3.6.3 Other Tests

For newly developed types of steel not covered by the requirements of Chapter 3, this Part, additional tests
such as CTOD test, large scale brittle fracture tests (Double Tension test, ESSO test, Deep Notch test, etc.)
or other tests may be required by PRS.
3.7.1 Extent of the Tests
3.7.1.1 For strength levels 420, 460 and 500 MPa weldability tests shall be performed on test samples
taken from the thickest plate. Testing on higher grades can cover the lower strength and toughness grades.
.1 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat input 15±2 kJ/cm shall be tested as-welded,
.2 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat input 50±5 kJ/cm for steels in N/NR and TM condition
and 35±3.5 kJ/cm for steels in QT condition shall be tested as-welded,
.3 1 butt weld test assembly welded with the same heat input as given in .2 shall be post-weld heat
treated (PWHT) prior to testing.
.4 when steel is intended to be designated as steel for high heat input welding, additional 1 butt weld
test assembly shall be tested as-welded and 1 butt weld test assembly shall be tested in PWHT
condition, both welded with the maximum heat input being approved.
3.7.1.2 For strength levels 550, 620, 690, 890 and 960 MPa weldability tests shall be performed on test
samples taken from the thickest plate with the highest toughness grade for each strength level. Provided
the chemical composition of the higher grade is representative to the lower grade, testing requirements
of the lower grades may be reduced at the discretion of PRS.
.1 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat input 10±2 kJ/cm shall be tested as-welded,
.2 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a maximum heat input as proposed by the manufacturer
shall be tested as-welded; the approved maximum heat input shall be stated on the approval
certificate,
.3 when the manufacturer requires to include the approval for post-weld heat treated (PWHT)
condition, additional 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a maximum heat input proposed by the
manufacturer same as in .2 shall be tested shall be post-weld heat treated (PWHT) prior to testing.
3.7.2 Preparation and Welding of the Test Assemblies
The butt weld test assemblies of plates in N/NR condition shall be prepared with the weld seam
transverse to the plate rolling direction, so that impact specimens will result in the longitudinal direction.
The butt weld test assemblies of plates in TM/TM+AcC/TM+DQ and QT conditions shall be prepared
with the weld seam parallel to the plate rolling direction.
The butt weld test assemblies of long products, sections and seamless tubular in any supply condition
shall be prepared with the weld seam transverse to the rolling direction.
The bevel preparation should be preferably 1/2V or K.
The welding procedure shall be as far as possible in accordance with the normal welding practice used
at the yards for the type of steel in question.
Test report containing the welding procedure specification (WPS) and copies of certificates of welding
consumables used for the weld test assemblies preparation shall be submitted to PRS for review.
3.7.3 Post-weld Heat Treatment Procedure
Steels supplied in N/NR or TM/TM+AcC/TM+DQ condition shall be heat treated for a minimum time
of 1 hour per 25 mm thickness (but not less than 30 minutes and needs not be more than 150 minutes) at
a maximum holding temperature of 580°C, unless otherwise approved by PRS.
Steels supplied in QT condition shall be heat treated for a minimum time of 1 hour per 25 mm thickness
(but not less than 30 minutes and needs not be more than 150 minutes) at a maximum holding temperature
of 550°C with the maximum holding temperature of at least 30°C below the previous tempering
temperature, unless otherwise approved by PRS.
Heating and cooling above 300°C shall be carried out in a controlled manner in order to heat/cool the
material uniformly. The cooling rate from the maximum holding temperature to 300°C shall not be slower
than 55°C/h.
3.7.4 Types of Tests

From the test assemblies, the following test specimens shall be taken:
.1 1 cross weld tensile test specimen (1 full thickness test sample or sub-sized samples covering the
full thickness cross section);
.2 a set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens transverse to the weld and 1-2 mm below the surface
with the notch located at the fusion line and at a distance 2, 5 and minimum 20 mm from the straight
fusion line. An additional set of 3 specimens at root is required for each aforementioned position for
plate thickness t ≥ 50 mm. The fusion boundary shall be identified by etching the specimens with
a suitable reagent. The test temperature shall be the one prescribed for the testing of the steel grade in
question;
.3 hardness tests HV10 across the weldment. The indentations shall be made along a 1–2 mm
transverse line beneath the plate surface on both the face side and the root side of the weld as
follows:
– fusion line,
– HAZ: at each 0.7 mm from fusion line into unaffected parent material (minimum 6 to 7
measurements for each HAZ).
The maximum hardness value shall be not higher than:
Appendixes 215
– 350 HV for steels with strength level 420 and 460 MPa,
– 420 HV for steels with strength level 500, 550, 620 and 690 MPa,
– 450 HV for steels with strength level 890 and 960 MPa.
A sketch of the weld joint depicting groove dimensions, number of passes, hardness
indentations shall be attached to the test report, together with photomacrographs of the weld cross-
section.
.4 CTOD test specimens shall be taken from butt weld test assembly specified in 3.7.1.1.2 or 3.7.1.2.2.
CTOD test shall be performed in accordance with EN ISO 15653 or equivalent standard.
– the specimen geometry (B=W) is permitted for plate thickness up to 50 mm. For plate thicker
than 50 mm, subsidiary specimen geometry (50×50 mm) is permitted, which shall be taken
50 mm in depth through thickness from the subsurface and 50 mm in width. See Figure 3.7.4-1
for more details;
– the specimens shall be notched in through thickness direction,
– grain-coarsened HAZ (GCHAZ) shall be targeted for the sampling position of the crack tip,
– the test specimens shall be in as-welded and post-weld heat treated conditions, if applicable,
– three tests shall be performed at –10°C on each butt weld assembly.
For strength level 690 MPa and above, dehydrogenation of as-welded test pieces may be carried out by
a low temperature heat treatment, prior to CTOD test. Heat treatment conditions of 200°C for 4 h are
recommended, and the exact parameters shall be noted with the CTOD test results.
a a
1-2 mm 1-2 mm
test test
GCHAZ specimen GCHAZ
specimen
a) b)
Fig. 3.7.4
a) for plate thickness t ≤ 50 mm, CTOD test specimen shall be sampled in full thickness
b) for plate thickness t > 50 mm, subsidiary test specimen with a thickness of maximum 50 mm in
subsurface area shall be sampled
3.7.5 Crack Susceptibility Test

Crack susceptibility test (hydrogen crack test) shall be performed in accordance with recognized
national or international standard, e.g. GB/T4675 or JIS Z 3158 for Y-groove weld crack test. Minimum
preheat temperature shall be determined and the relationship of minimum preheat temperature with
thickness shall be derived.
3.7.6 Other Tests

For newly developed types of steel not covered by Chapter 4, this Part, additional tests may be required
by PRS.
4 Results
All required information, specified in Chapter 2 of this Appendix, applicable to the products subjected
to the tests, shall be collected by the manufacturer and put in reports which will include all the results of the
tests and operation records relevant to steel making, casting, rolling and heat treatment of the test products.
5 Approval
If the results of the inspection and approval tests are satisfactory, PRS will issue Approval Certificate.
Manufacturers who have not produced the approved grades and products during the period between
renewals may be required to either carry out approval tests or, on the basis of results of production
of similar grades of products, at the discretion of PRS, be reapproved.
Appendixes 217
Appendix F
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of YP47 Steels
1 Scope
1.1 Appendix F specifies (as provided in paragraph 3.2.1, this Part) the procedure for the approval of
the manufacturing process of YP47 steels.
1.2 Unless otherwise specified in this Appendix, Appendix A2 shall be followed.
2 Approval Tests
2.1 Extent of the Approval Tests
Paragraphs 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 of Appendix A2 are not applied to approval of manufacturer of YP47 steels.
2.2 Type of Tests
2.2.1 Brittle Fracture Initiation Test
Deep notch test or Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) test shall be carried out. Test method
2.2.2 Weldability test
2.2.2.1 Y-groove Weld Cracking Test (Hydrogen Crack Test)
The test method shall be in accordance with recognized national standards such as JIS Z 3158-2016 or
CB/T 4364-2013. Acceptance criteria shall be agreed with PRS.
2.2.2.2 Brittle Fracture Initiation Test

Deep notch test of CTOD test shall be carried out. Test method and results shall be considered
appropriate by PRS.
2.2.3 Other Tests

In addition to the requirements specified in 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 of this Appendix, the approval tests required
for steels specified in Appendix A2 shall be carried out. Additional tests may be required when deemed
necessary by PRS.
Appendix G
Approval Procedure for Manufacturer of Brittle Crack Arrest Steels
1 Scope
1.1 Appendix G specifies (as provided in paragraph 3.2.1, this Part) the procedure for the approval of
the manufacturing process of brittle crack arrest steels.
1.2 Unless otherwise specified in this Appendix, Appendix A2 and/or Appendix F shall be followed.
2 Approval Application
2.1 Documents to be submitted
The manufacturer shall submit to PRS the following documents together with those required in
Appendix A2:
.1 In-house test reports of the brittle crack arrest properties of the steels intended for approval,
.2 Approval test program for the brittle crack arrest properties (see 3.1 of this Appendix),
.3 Production test procedures for the brittle crack arrest properties.
3 Approval tests
3.1 Extent of the Approval Tests

3.1.1 The extent of the test program is specified in 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 of this Appendix. If the manufacturing
process and mechanism to ensure the brittle crack arrest properties for the steels intended for approval are
same, paragraph 3.1 of Appendix A2 shall be followed for the extent of the approval tests.
3.1.2 The number of test samples and test specimens may be increased when deemed necessary by PRS,
based on the in-house test reports of the brittle crack arrest properties of the steels intended for approval
specified in 2.1.1.
3.2 Type of Tests
3.2.1 Brittle crack arrest tests shall be carried out in accordance with 3.3 of this Appendix in addition to
the approval tests specified in Appendix A2 and/or Appendix F.
3.2.2 In the case of applying for addition of the specified brittle crack arrest properties for YP36, YP40
and YP47 steels of which manufacturing process has been approved by PRS (i.e. the aim analyses, method
of manufacture and supply conditions are similar and the steelmaking process, deoxidation and fine grain
practice, casting method and supply condition are the same), brittle crack arrest tests, chemical analyses,
tensile test and Charpy V-notch impact test shall be carried out in accordance with this Appendix and
Appendix A2.
3.3 Test Specimens and Testing Procedure of Brittle Crack Arrest Tests
3.3.1 The test specimens of the brittle crack arrest tests shall be taken with their longitudinal axis parallel
to the final rolling direction of the test plates.
3.3.2 The loading direction of brittle crack tests shall be parallel to the final rolling direction of the test
plates.
3.3.3 The thickness of the test specimens of the brittle crack arrest tests shall be the full thickness of the
test plates.
3.3.4 The tests specimens and repeat test specimens shall be taken from the same steel plate.
Appendixes 219
3.3.5 The thickness of the test specimen shall be the maximum thickness of the steel plate requested for
approval.
3.3.6 In the case where the brittle crack arrest properties are evaluated by Kca, the brittle crack arrest test
method shall be in accordance with IACS UR W31 Annex 3. In the case where the brittle crack arrest
properties are evaluated by CAT, the test method shall be in accordance with IACS UR W31 Annex 4.
3.4 Other Tests

Additional tests may be required when deemed necessary by PRS in addition to the tests specified in
3.3 of this Appendix.
4 Results
Appendix A2 shall be followed for the results.
Additionally, results of test items and the procedures shall comply with the test program approved by
PRS. In the case where the brittle crack arrest properties are evaluated by Kca or CAT, the manufacturer
shall also submit to PRS the brittle crack arrest test reports in accordance with IACS UR W31 Annex 3 for
Kca and IACS UR W31 Annex 4 for CAT.
5 Approval and Certification

Upon satisfactory completion of the survey and test, approval is granted by PRS with the grade
designation including the suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” (e.g. EH40-BCA1, EH47-BCA1, EH47-BCA2, etc.).
The manufacturer shall also submit to PRS actual manufacturing records of the approved brittle crack
arrest steels within the term of the validity of the Approval Certificate.
Note: Chemical composition, mechanical properties, brittle crack arrest properties (e.g. brittle crack
arrest test results or small-scale alternative test results) and nominal thicknesses shall be described in the
form of histogram or statistics.
List of amendments effective as of 1 January 2021

Item Title/Subject Source
3.1.7 Requirements for YP47 steels and brittle crack arrest steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
3.2.1 Approval of Manufacturer (YP47 and brittle crack arrest steels) IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
3.16 Requirements for YP47 steels and brittle crack arrest steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
Table 20.4.1.3-1 Test load values for stud link chain cables IACS Rec. 10 Rev. 4
Sep 2020
23.1.1 Welding of brittle crack arrest steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
23.2.8, 23.2.9 Welding of YP47 steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
24.16 Welding consumables for YP47 steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
Appendix F Manufacturing Approval Scheme for YP47 steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
Appendix G Manufacturing Approval Scheme for Brittle Crack Arrest Steels IACS UR W31 Rev. 2
Dec. 2019
List of amendments effective as of 1 July 2021

Item Title/Subject Source
13.2 Cast Stainless Steel Propellers UR W27 Rev. 2 July 2020

Rules: For Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rules: For Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rules: For Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RULES

FOR CLASSIFICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

© Copyright by Polski Rejestr Statków S.A., 2021

R p0,2 – proof stress (yield strength) – determined at non-proportional strain,

2.2 Testing Laboratories

Modulus of elasticity of the material, E Rate of stressing [MPa ·s-1]

Explanation of symbols used in the figures and Table 2.5.3:

Dimensions of impact test specimens are given in Table 2.6.1-1.

2.12 ESSO Test

3 NORMAL AND HIGHER STRENGTH HULL STRUCTURAL STEEL

3.3 Methods of Manufacture

Ferrite + pearlite Tempering

□ – start rolling temperature

Description of applicable rolling processes are given as follows:

.3 Controlled Rolling (CR), Normalizing Rolling (NR)

stringent carbon equivalent.

3.6 Mechanical Properties

Re A Average impact energy

t – product thickness, [mm], L – longitudinal specimen, T – transverse specimen

Re A Average impact energy

t – product thickness, [mm], L – longitudinal specimen, T – transverse specimen

Product thickness t [mm]

3.8 Inspection of Surface and Work Quality

3.8.2 Identification of Materials

3.8.3 Inspection and Testing

Fig. 3.9.3.2-1 Fig. 3.9.3.2-2

Fig. 3.9.3.2-3 Fig. 3.9.3.2-4

Fig. 3.9.3.3-1 Fig. 3.9.3.3-2

3.10 Mechanical Test Specimens

3.11 Number of Test Specimens

3.16.1 YP47 Steels

Supply Yield Average impact energy [J] min.

TCMP 2) EH47 460 570 ÷ 720 17 –40 53 64 75

3.16.4 Material Specifications for Brittle Crack Arrest Steels

BCA1 50 < t ≤ 100 min. 6000 –10 or below

BCA2 80 < t ≤ 100 7) min. 8000 5)

4 HIGH STRENGTH STEELS

4.3.3 Steel shall be fully killed.

4.4 Chemical Composition

4.5 Supply Condition

4.6 Mechanical Properties

4.6.2 Impact Test

4.6.3.1 Number of Tensile Test Samples

4.8 Surface and Work Quality

− identification of the cast and piece,

5 STEEL WITH SPECIFIED THROUGH THICKNESS PROPERTIES (STEEL “Z”)

Principal rolling (longitudinal) direction “L”

Transverse direction “T”

Reduction of area shall be calculated in accordance with the formula below:

= Individual result = Average result

Fig. 5.3.4. Diagram showing acceptance/rejection criteria

6 STEEL FOR BOILERS AND PRESSURE VESSELS

6.1.2.2 Steel shall be in the killed condition.

6.2 Steel Grades

6.4 Mechanical Properties

6.5 Supply Condition

See paragraph 6.5.2.

6.6.4 Tensile Test at Ambient Temperature

6.9 Inspection Certificate